Elective Curriculum: Course Descriptions
Last Updated: 08 Nov 2024
Print View
View by Unit | View by Course Title | View by Faculty | Print View
# | Area | Faculty Name | Term | Quarter | Credits |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
3 Technologies that Will Change the World in the Next Decade | Entrepreneurial Management | Shikhar Ghosh | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
A | Area | Faculty Name | Term | Quarter | Credits |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
A Manager's Guide to Leveraging Technology | Technology & Operations Management | Michael Parzen | Fall 2024 |
Q1 | 1.5 |
Advanced Negotiation: Great Dealmakers, Diplomats, and Deals | Negotiation, Organizations & Markets | James Sebenius | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Africa Rising: Understanding Business, Entrepreneurship, and the Complexities of a Continent | General Management | Hakeem I. Belo-Osagie | Spring 2025 |
Q4 | 1.5 |
The Anatomy of Fraud (TAF) | Accounting & Management | Aiyesha Dey, Jonas Heese |
Fall 2024 |
Q1 | 1.5 |
The Arts of Communication | General Management | Candace Bertotti | Spring 2025 |
Q4 | 1.5 |
Authentic Leader Development | Organizational Behavior | Thomas J. DeLong, Monique Burns Thompson |
Fall 2024 |
Q1Q2 | 3.0 |
Authentic Leader Development | Organizational Behavior | Robin Ely, Monique Burns Thompson |
Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Avoiding Startup Failure | Entrepreneurial Management | Lindsay Hyde | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
D | Area | Faculty Name | Term | Quarter | Credits |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
Data Science for Managers 2 | Technology & Operations Management | Michael Parzen | Fall 2024 |
Q2 | 1.5 |
Data Science for Managers 2 | Technology & Operations Management | Michael Parzen | Spring 2025 |
Q4 | 1.5 |
Data Visualization for Analysis and Communication | Technology & Operations Management | Martin Wattenberg, Fernanda Viégas |
Spring 2025 |
Q4 | 1.5 |
Data for Impact: Impact Measurement from Startup to Fortune 500 C-Suite | Entrepreneurial Management | Benjamin N. Roth, Natalia Rigol |
Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Deal Making in Real Estate | Finance | Dan Gilbane, Christopher Graham |
Spring 2025 |
Q4 | 1.5 |
Deals | Negotiation, Organizations & Markets | Guhan Subramanian | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Deals Q2 | Negotiation, Organizations & Markets | Guhan Subramanian | Fall 2024 |
Q2 | 1.5 |
Demystifying the Family Enterprise | Technology & Operations Management | Christina Wing | Fall 2024 |
Q1Q2 | 3.0 |
Designing Technology Ventures | Technology & Operations Management | Thomas Eisenmann, Robert Howe |
Fall 2024 |
Q1Q2 | 3.0 |
Digital Marketing Workshop | Marketing | Jacob Cook | Fall 2024 |
Q1 | 1.5 |
Doing Business with China 2035: Navigating Uncertainty | General Management | William Kirby | Spring 2025 |
Q3 | 1.5 |
E | Area | Faculty Name | Term | Quarter | Credits |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
Energy | General Management | Dustin Tingley | Fall 2024 |
Q2 | 1.5 |
Entrepreneurial Finance | Entrepreneurial Management, Finance | Raymond Kluender | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Entrepreneurial Finance (Q2) | Entrepreneurial Management, Finance | Shai Bernstein | Fall 2024 |
Q2 | 1.5 |
Entrepreneurial Sales 101: Founder Selling | Entrepreneurial Management | Mark Roberge, Lou Shipley |
Fall 2024 |
Q2 | 1.5 |
Entrepreneurial Sales 101: Founder Selling | Entrepreneurial Management | Mark Roberge, Lou Shipley |
Spring 2025 |
Q3 | 1.5 |
Entrepreneurial Sales 102: Building, Managing, and Scaling the First Sales Team as a Founder, Investor, or Advisor | Entrepreneurial Management | Lou Shipley | Spring 2025 |
Q4 | 1.5 |
Entrepreneurship Outside the Valley | Entrepreneurial Management, Finance | Paul Gompers | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Entrepreneurship in Life Sciences | Entrepreneurial Management | Satish Tadikonda | Fall 2024 |
Q1Q2 | 3.0 |
G | Area | Faculty Name | Term | Quarter | Credits |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
Generative AI for Business Leaders | Accounting & Management, Technology & Operations Management | Suraj Srinivasan | Spring 2025 |
Q3 | 1.5 |
Global Trade, Capital and National Institutions | General Management, Business, Government & the International Economy | Laura Alfaro | Spring 2025 |
Q3 | 1.5 |
Globalization and Emerging Markets | Business, Government & the International Economy | Reshmaan Hussam | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
L | Area | Faculty Name | Term | Quarter | Credits |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
Launch Lab/Capstone 1 | Technology & Operations Management | Alan MacCormack, Russell J Wilcox |
January 2025 |
J | 3.0 |
Launch Lab/Capstone 2 | Technology & Operations Management | Alan MacCormack, Russell J Wilcox |
Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Launching Tech Ventures | Entrepreneurial Management | Christina Wallace | Fall 2024 |
Q1Q2 | 3.0 |
Launching Tech Ventures | Entrepreneurial Management | Jeffrey Bussgang | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Law, Management and Entrepreneurship | General Management, Entrepreneurial Management | John Batter | Fall 2024 |
Q1Q2 | 3.0 |
Law, Management and Entrepreneurship | General Management, Entrepreneurial Management | John Batter | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Leadership Execution and Action Planning (LEAP) | Organizational Behavior | Ryan Raffaelli | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Leadership and Happiness | General Management | Arthur Brooks | Spring 2025 |
Q3 | 1.5 |
Leading a Family Business (LFB) | Strategy | Josh Baron | Spring 2025 |
Q4 | 1.5 |
N | Area | Faculty Name | Term | Quarter | Credits |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
Navigating Your Worth: AI, Negotiations, and the Nature of Expertise | Entrepreneurial Management | Zoe Cullen, Shikhar Ghosh |
Spring 2025 |
Q4 | 1.5 |
Negotiation | Negotiation, Organizations & Markets | John Beshears, Katherine Coffman, Thomas Graeber, Kevin Mohan, Kym Nelson, Julian J. Zlatev |
Fall 2024 |
Q1Q2 | 3.0 |
Negotiation | Negotiation, Organizations & Markets | Livia Alfonsi, Max H. Bazerman, Alex Chan, Jillian Jordan |
Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
O | Area | Faculty Name | Term | Quarter | Credits |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
Ownership (OWN): Define Success, Create Advantage, Build to Last, Engage Effectively | Strategy | Josh Baron | Spring 2025 |
Q3 | 1.5 |
P | Area | Faculty Name | Term | Quarter | Credits |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
Power and Influence | Organizational Behavior | Lakshmi Ramarajan | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Power and Influence for Positive Impact | Organizational Behavior | Julie Battilana, Deborah Winshel |
Fall 2024 |
Q1 | 1.5 |
The Power of DEI: Harnessing Talent and Opportunity for Enduring Success | General Management | Nancy Koehn | Fall 2024 |
Q1 | 1.5 |
Pricing Strategy: Monetizing and Growing the Business | Marketing | Elie Ofek | Fall 2024 |
Q2 | 1.5 |
Private Equity Finance | Finance | Victoria Ivashina, Ted Berk |
Fall 2024 |
Q1Q2 | 3.0 |
Product Management | Entrepreneurial Management | Sara McKinley Torti | Spring 2025 |
Q3 | 1.5 |
Public Entrepreneurship | Entrepreneurial Management, General Management | Mitchell Weiss | Fall 2024 |
Q1Q2 | 3.0 |
R | Area | Faculty Name | Term | Quarter | Credits |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
Real Estate Investing | Finance | Dwight Angelini, Matt Kelly |
Spring 2025 |
Q3 | 1.5 |
Real Estate Private Equity | Finance | Nori Gerardo Lietz | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Real Property | Finance | Boris Vallee | Fall 2024 |
Q1Q2 | 3.0 |
Reimagining Capitalism: Business and Big Problems | General Management, Strategy, Accounting & Management | Ethan Rouen | Fall 2024 |
Q1Q2 | 3.0 |
Reweaving Ourselves and the World: New Perspectives on Climate Change | General Management | Rebecca Henderson | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Risks, Opportunities, And Investments In The Era Of Climate Change (ROICC) | Accounting & Management, Entrepreneurial Management, General Management | George Serafeim | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Road to the White House 2024, a Private Sector Perspective on Presidential Politics | Entrepreneurial Management | Robert F. White | Fall 2024 |
Q1 | 1.5 |
The Role of Government in Market Economies | Business, Government & the International Economy | Matthew Weinzierl | Spring 2025 |
Q4 | 1.5 |
S | Area | Faculty Name | Term | Quarter | Credits |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
Scaling Technology Ventures | Entrepreneurial Management | Jeffrey Rayport | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Social Entrepreneurship and Systems Change | General Management | Gerald Chertavian, Brian Trelstad |
Fall 2024 |
Q1Q2 | 3.0 |
Space, Public And Commercial Economics (SPACE) | Business, Government & the International Economy | Matthew Weinzierl | Spring 2025 |
Q3 | 1.5 |
The Spiritual Lives of Leaders | General Management | Nien-hê Hsieh, Derek van Bever |
Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Strategies for Value Creation (SVC) | Finance, Strategy | Benjamin Esty | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Strategies for Value Creation - Abridged (SVC-S) | Finance, Strategy | Scott Mayfield | Spring 2025 |
Q3 | 1.5 |
Strategy Execution | Accounting & Management | Dennis Campbell | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Strategy and Technology | Strategy | David Yoffie | Fall 2024 |
Q1Q2 | 3.0 |
Strategy and Technology | Strategy | Andy Wu | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Strategy for Entrepreneurs | Strategy, Entrepreneurial Management | Rembrand Koning | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Supply Chain Analytics | Technology & Operations Management | Kris Ferreira | Fall 2024 |
Q1 | 1.5 |
Supply Chain Management | Technology & Operations Management | Kris Ferreira | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Sustainable Investing | Finance, Entrepreneurial Management | Vikram Gandhi | Fall 2024 |
Q2 | 1.5 |
Systems for Scaling Ventures (SSV) | Entrepreneurial Management, Accounting & Management | Tatiana Sandino | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
T | Area | Faculty Name | Term | Quarter | Credits |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
TALK: How to Talk Gooder in Business and Life | Negotiation, Organizations & Markets | Alison Wood Brooks | Fall 2024 |
Q1Q2 | 3.0 |
Tough Tech Ventures | Entrepreneurial Management | Joshua Lev Krieger, Jim Matheson |
Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
Transforming Education through Social Entrepreneurship | General Management | John Jong-Hyun Kim | Fall 2024 |
Q1Q2 | 3.0 |
Transforming Health Care Delivery | Technology & Operations Management | Susanna Gallani, Robert Huckman |
Spring 2025 |
Q3 | 1.5 |
Turnarounds and Transformation | Entrepreneurial Management, Organizational Behavior | Ranjay Gulati | Spring 2025 |
Q3Q4 | 3.0 |
U | Area | Faculty Name | Term | Quarter | Credits |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
U.S. Healthcare Strategy | General Management, Strategy | Leemore S. Dafny | Fall 2024 |
Q1Q2 | 3.0 |
Unpacking the US-China Rivalry | General Management | Andy Zelleke | Fall 2024 |
Q1 | 1.5 |
V | Area | Faculty Name | Term | Quarter | Credits |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
Venture Capital and Private Equity | Entrepreneurial Management | Jo Tango, Archie L. Jones |
Fall 2024 |
Q1Q2 | 3.0 |
W | Area | Faculty Name | Term | Quarter | Credits |
---|---|---|---|---|---|
War & Peace: The Lessons of History for Leadership, Strategy, Negotiation & Humanity | Negotiation, Organizations & Markets | Deepak Malhotra, Kevin Mohan |
Fall 2024 |
Q1Q2 | 3.0 |
3 Technologies that Will Change the World in the Next Decade
Course Number 1632
Paper
‘The real problem of humanity is that we have Paleolithic emotions, medieval institutions and godlike technology.’
E.O. Wilson
This course examines 3 recently developed ‘godlike technologies’ - artificial intelligence (AI), blockchain and synthetic biology- that have passed commercial viability and are on-track to change the foundations of business and society by 2035.
These technologies predict behavior and increasingly create behavior. They learn and improve relentlessly. They make better decisions than humans in an increasing number of contexts. They are unconstrained by moral boundaries. Are these technologies different from other ground-breaking technologies such as electricity, nuclear power and computing? What commercial opportunities and risks will they create for business leaders? What ethical choices will they force business leaders to confront?
In November 2022, the introduction of ChatGPT brought the potential and power of Generative AI into public consciousness. It was downloaded by over 100 million people globally over the next 6 weeks. Business leaders, regulators, and professionals wonder how this magical technology would affect their business models. Workers in both creative and other professional career wonder how it will affect their livelihoods. Governments around the world, are waking up to the power of the technology to disrupt the established order. Venture Capitalists have lined up to fund over 500 startups that use Generative AI. CEO’s of some of the leading AI companies have gone on record to say that this generation of AI could destroy human society. Others have said that it could create a global utopia by solving intractable problems like climate change, ending the need for humans to work for a living and bringing the cost of energy to zero. Why are normally balanced leaders taking such extreme and opposite positions?
At about the same time that ChatGPT was growing explosively the Web 3 and crypto markets, that had been seen as the big disruptive force for society a year earlier, were limping through a crypto winter. Companies that had been slated to restructure financial market declared bankruptcy. Leaders like Sam Bankman-Fried who declared the birth of a new distributed era where our notions of ‘value’ and money itself would be redefined, were under house arrest for fraud.
Further in the background, a quiet revolution has been taking place in reengineering life itself. Several companies have been using CRISPR-based technologies to reprogram living organisms, promising a new, unimaginable future where humans capabilities could be enhanced, aging could be reversed, new forms of life created, and new custom designed materials could be grown rather than manufactured. Companies like Verve Therapeutics announced the first human trials of a single shot cure for all heart attacks through a one-time change in a single gene. In most of these cases, business choices like market selection, financing strategy and pricing are critical determinants of the value of the technology to humanity.
The course will give students an understanding of these three 3 emerging technologies from the perspective of a business leader, preparing students for a world where technology creates exponential increases in capabilities, forcing business leaders to rethink business models and reassess the commercial and ethical choices they make.
We will explore:
- Artificial Intelligence (AI) – Bringing the cost of cognition to zero (approximately 50 percent of class sessions): We cover the application of AI to a number of early and late stage companies and look at the ways in which AI can be used and misused. We look at foundational companies like DeepMind, Open AI and Anthropic as well as specialized companies like Videa Health, Metaphysic and Instadeep that are applying AI to more specific problems (Dentistry, Movie/TV production, Route optimization etc.) We also look at the power of algorithms to shape consumer behavior (TikTok), the misuse of AI in social contexts such as in the justice system and the industrialization of misinformation and hacking of elections. How can business leaders create great companies that enhance the value to society while earning a return for shareholders?
- Blockchain – Changing mechanisms for coordination and trust (approximately 20 percent of class session): We cover the under revolutionary promise of blockchain technologies to lower the cost of transactions and create new markets and new communities. Companies are issuing their own currencies, enabling distributed autonomous governance processes, enabling self-enforcing contracts, creating new forms of value capture (NFT’s for example) and, most of all, moving the provision of trust from institutions and governments to network protocols that have no central authority. They challenge the core notions of brand value, scale, regulatory guardrails, hierarchy, incentives etc. The classes cover companies like Polygon, Ava Labs that provide the platform for others to build new platforms for cooperation, companies like Uniswap that have the potential to restructure financial exchanges, Circle Financial , a company that is reimagining what digital money could be and Art Blocks a company that is redefining digital art and creating a way for artists to capture value from their art.
- Synthetic Biology – Enabling us to reprogram DNA and rewrite the code of life (25% of sessions): We examine the potential for gene editing and other forms of computational biology to change healthcare and manufacturing. By making DNA programable, these companies are creating a foundation layer for creating new materials, new therapeutic approaches and new forms of life that can be designed to solve particular problems (tiles that absorb CO2, bacteria that eat the microplastics in the ocean etc.) We look at companies like Twist Bioscience, that will design and manufacture DNA to order, Moderna that can use AI and digital technologies to create new therapeutics rapidly, and companies from Prof. George Church’s Labs that are pushing the frontiers of biology (recreating the Woolly mammoth from ancient DNA), extending health lifespans – ‘curing the disease of aging’.
We also look at feeder technologies that act as accelerants to the core technologies. These include ubiquitous networks that collect data on everything including what happens inside our bodies and brains, new models of computing that can be orders of magnitude faster than today’s fastest computers in certain calculations, Brain Computer Interfaces that enable us to augment our brains. On the negative side we examine and the business models of companies that are using these technologies to disrupt society through applications like Ransomware.
Approximately 60% of class sessions are case-based, and 60% of sessions feature industry experts and case protagonists. There are a few lecture / Q&A sessions to explain the core concepts and mechanics of the three technologies. There is a final paper in lieu of an exam.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
A Manager's Guide to Leveraging Technology
Course Number 1875
Information technology (IT) continues to revolutionize every aspect of 21st-century business and daily life. The rapid advancement of technologies such as cloud computing, artificial intelligence, machine learning, and generative AI is driving unprecedented levels of investment in IT. Globally, IT investments exceed $2.5 trillion, while in the United States, over 50% of capital expenditures are related to IT. These technologies are transforming organizations, enabling new business models, and reshaping entire industries.
The impact of IT extends far beyond the business world, influencing organizational structures, culture, politics, decision-making processes, and society as a whole. IT is fundamentally changing how physical products are designed, how services are delivered, and how individuals interact with businesses and each other. The proliferation of embedded IT in everyday objects is silently transforming the world around us, enhancing customer experiences and product performance. Moreover, the ubiquity of IT is facilitating the growth of global trade and redefining the nature and location of work.
As future managers, it is crucial to develop a comprehensive understanding of modern IT, gain practical experience in its application, and cultivate a strategic perspective on how IT is leveraged within organizations. This course is designed to provide students with a solid foundation in the key technologies shaping the business landscape, including cloud computing, mobile technologies, social media, data analytics, AI, machine learning, and generative AI. Students will learn to navigate the complex technology ecosystem, assess the business value of IT investments, and develop strategies for harnessing the power of emerging technologies. The course will also emphasize the importance of digital transformation and how students can develop the skills needed to lead such initiatives.
By the end of this course, students will be well-equipped to tackle the challenges and opportunities presented by the rapidly evolving technology landscape. They will have the knowledge and skills necessary to make informed decisions about technology adoption, implementation, and management, ensuring that their organizations remain competitive in an increasingly digital world. As the role of IT continues to expand and evolve, it is imperative that future managers across all business functions are prepared to leverage technology effectively and strategically. Classwork will include case studies, coding exercises, and projects.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Advanced Negotiation: Great Dealmakers, Diplomats, and Deals
Course Number 2261
Requirements: active, insightful class and negotiation exercise participation; paper or take-home final exam.
Revised: This course serves both as a sophisticated follow-on to basic negotiation courses and/or as a self-contained negotiation course taught at an advanced level with a heavy emphasis on handling challenging real-world cases. Unlike past versions of this course, there is no formal pre- or co-requisite, although an introductory negotiation course at one of Harvard’s professional schools or equivalent elsewhere will be beneficial and will offer more basic skill-building exercises. Those without prior negotiation coursework should read 3D Negotiation by Lax and Sebenius in its entirety before class begins to become familiar with key concepts and terminology that others who have taken an earlier negotiation course will already bring to the course.
Purpose: Take your negotiating ability to the next level by matching wits with some of the world’s greatest dealmakers and diplomats as they work through their toughest deals. Examples:
- In business and finance: Steve Schwarzman on several early make-or-break deals for Blackstone; Sarah Frey negotiates advantageous supplier deals for her tiny farm with a vindictive Walmart enroute to building an agricultural empire; Bruce Wasserstein negotiates to take Lazard public, etc.
- In diplomacy: Christiana Figueres guides the Paris climate talks to a near-unanimous agreement in 2015; Colombian President Juan Santos ends a 50-year civil war with the FARC guerillas; US Trade Negotiator Charlene Barshefsky takes on IP negotiations with China; former US Secretaries of State Colin Powell, Condoleezza Rice, and Hillary Clinton describe critical moments in their negotiations with Vladimir Putin, etc.
- In the arts and sports: Music industry lawyer John Branca negotiates the purchase of the Beatles catalog; Artists Christo and Jeanne-Claude negotiate with endless opponents to build “Running Fence,” The Gates in Central Park, and to wrap Paris’s Pont Neuf in golden fabric; Proponents of a “European Super League” try to form a breakaway football/soccer league, etc. etc.
A typical case challenges you to address its critical deal moments. For most cases in the course, we watch excerpts from stop action video interviews, mostly that I’ve conducted with the protagonist(s) describing how they handled a series of key decisions. After discussion of each such decision, we move to the next critical moment, and so on . . . after which we draw broader lessons. We often find that insights from private sector dealmaking inform public and not-for-profit sector negotiations and vice versa.
The objective of this approach is to extract highly practical lessons from studying the world’s greatest negotiators at work on their most challenging deals—in business, finance, diplomacy, the not-for-profit world, and across sectors. Since 2001, the Program on Negotiation—an interuniversity consortium involving Harvard, MIT, and Tufts—has regularly bestowed the “Great Negotiator Award” on men and women from around the world who have consistently overcome formidable barriers to achieve truly worthwhile purposes. In a closely related project at Harvard, faculty have conducted detailed interviews with former American Secretaries of State—Henry Kissinger, George Shultz James A. Baker, III, Madeleine Albright, Colin Powell, Condoleezza Rice, Hillary Clinton, John Kerry, and Rex Tillerson—about their most difficult negotiations. As chair of the Great Negotiators Award program and co-chair of the American Secretaries of State initiative, I am deeply involved in a multi-year project to systematically distill the strategies and tactics of this distinguished group (along with several other remarkable negotiators). The emerging findings of this ongoing project will heavily inform this course. By way of highly interactive case discussions, frequently interspersed with video clips of the protagonists, and a few negotiation exercises—although considerably fewer such simulations relative to many introductory negotiation courses—Advanced Negotiation will develop valuable lessons and skills for dealmaking and dispute resolution that go well beyond those offered in basic courses.
Career Focus
This course is designed for students who expect to analyze and participate effectively in challenging business, financial, diplomatic, and not-for-profit negotiations, often with public-private and cross-border aspects. Of the cases, exercises, videos, and significant examples in the course, roughly a third could be classified in a mainly business/financial/entrepreneurial category, a third could be classified in a mainly public/diplomatic/not-for-profit category, and a third would involve a mixture of private, public and/or not-for-profit parties that played meaningful roles.
Course Content and Organization
Throughout this course, a central theme is how to deal with difficult negotiators and genuinely hard negotiations in many different settings. Different aspects of meeting this challenge will be developed. One focus will be on "at-the-table" tactics for handling hardball moves, incompatible positions, adversarial relationships, ideological differences, the lack of vital information, and cross-cultural frictions. A second thread explores how sophisticated deal design moves can overcome impasses in order to create maximum value on a sustainable basis. A third consistent emphasis develops advanced concepts and skills for making effective "away-from-the-table" setup moves, especially to meet the challenges of cross-border negotiations and those that play out over time. Such challenges typically occur both "across the table" in negotiating "externally" with the other side(s) as well as "internally" within each side. Beyond doing individual deals, the course will explore how great negotiators often envision and carry out effective multi-front, sequential “negotiation campaigns” that culminate in achieving a target deal or deals with sufficient support for implementation and sustainability. Specific course modules that develop the above concepts include 1) introduction and course themes, 2) creating and claiming value, 3) preparing for tough negotiations, 4) dealing effectively with hard bargainers, 5) Two-level games/internal and external negotiations, and 6) Multiparty negotiations across borders and over times.
Course Requirements
Beyond constructive participation in class and faithfully preparing for and carrying out negotiation exercises, most students will opt for a self-scheduled written exam. Instead of taking a final exam, some students may prefer to write a paper on the kind of negotiation about which you care intensely or about a “great negotiator” whom you wish to study in depth. Since, inevitably, the class sessions won’t cover your specific areas of greatest interest in the kind of depth you might wish, the paper option provides the chance to do so for yourself and to build personally relevant intellectual capital. The major criterion for the paper is that it treats your topic in a sophisticated manner from a negotiation-analytic standpoint, and that it teaches you and me something significant about effective dealmaking.
Important: If you are interested in cross-registering for this course, it is imperative that you follow the HBS process, especially its timetable, which can be found here.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Africa Rising: Understanding Business, Entrepreneurship, and the Complexities of a Continent
Course Number 1555
6 Sessions
Paper
This short course is designed to introduce HBS students to the complexities of Africa – economic, sociological, and historical – and the ways in which these Africa-specific trends impact the opportunities and challenges in undertaking business and entrepreneurship ventures on the continent today. Drawing upon the active participation of prominent African alumni, as well as others with expertise in the field, "Africa Rising" will offer big picture understandings of the continent, and the ways in which its past informs the present. At the same time, the course will take deep, vertical looks at both the differences and nuances that render Africa unique in today's emerging market landscape, and the similarities that can be drawn from other regions of the Global South and beyond. "Africa Rising" is crafted to appeal to both students who have extensive experience working in Africa, as well as those who know very little about the continent, though are eager to expand their knowledge.
Course Framework
The Economist launched the "Africa Rising" framework into the international spotlight with its December 2011 cover story in which it posited, "After decades of slow growth, Africa has a real chance to follow in the footsteps of Asia." Thereafter, Time interrogated the same theme, as did multiple other media outlets. Major institutions also produced bullish reports. McKinsey's "Lions on the Move: The progress and potential of African economies," published in June 2010, was the firm's first of two major reports, in which it declared, "Africa's economic growth is creating substantial new business opportunities that are often overlooked by global companies." More recently, however, countervailing analyses and media reports, like The New York Times', "'Africa Rising'? 'Africa Reeling' May Be More Fitting Now," question Africa's growth rates, as well as the optimistic narrative more broadly.
In many ways, Africa is home to contradictory trends – trends that are rooted in the present and past. On the one hand, Africa's old margins are new frontiers, where mobile, globally-competitive capital (increasingly from the Global South) find minimally regulated zones for investment; a middle class of consumers continues to rapidly expand; and information-technology empires unfold at a rapid pace. On the other hand, Africa represents some of the most dire dimensions of global capitalism, with extreme wealth and poverty co-existing, corruption presenting significant challenges to business and economic growth, and old assumptions about the "treasure chest" motif militating against sustainable models. Of course, many of these trends are global, thus gesturing to the ways in which some processes in Africa, and other Global South markets for that matter, may well foreshadow longer-term trends that are emerging in the Global North. Ultimately, it is these dimensions of "Africa Rising" – the contradictory current condition and what we may learn from it in order to conduct business and initiate new entrepreneurship ventures on the continent – that will frame the agenda of this course.
"Africa Rising" will be taught through an integrative method, and one that will draw upon the rich expertise and experiences of alumni and other experts from Africa. The course is purposefully designed to leverage student and alumni/expert participation with its format that includes live cases, simulations, and Ted-style talks; as such, preparation is light relative to case-study preparation and includes some background reading as well as optional readings for students who wish to pursue deeper interests in the topics covered. Course themes will include, among others, resilience; long time frames; diversification; leadership; formal and informal structures of power; technology; infrastructure; and staffing, personnel and management.
We will of course also be examining the impact that COVID has had on Africa, the leadership challenges that it has thrown up and examining what a new normal would look like. We will examine the impact that the current geo political conflicts will have on the continent. How will Africa thrive in a deglobalized world , that nonetheless needs global solutions to climate change which represents a real existential threat for humanity. What does the rise of China mean for Africa ? Are we seeing a new cold war emerging in the Sahelian region. What impact will demographics have on Africa's place in the world. We will deal old industries like energy , finance and telecommunications. But will also deal with the new industries. Art. Music. Sports . Entertainment.
This course will run over 13 standard 80 minute classes. There will be an array of interesting outside speakers some of whom will be available for conversations after the classes. This course started as a SIP course and has developed into an EC course. We look forward to receiving you.
Grading
Grading will be based on 50% class participation. 50 % written paper.
The Anatomy of Fraud (TAF)
Course Number 1315
Educational Objective
We are in the golden age of fraud. Learning how to detect and prevent fraud, and make better investment decisions, has broad applicability for people joining or running companies, as well as private and public market investors.
This course examines the most sensational global frauds of this millennium, such as Enron, FTX, and Lehman Brothers, with the following goals in mind:
- To learn the strategies used in executing the fraud;
- To understand how the fraud unraveled;
- To spot financial and non-financial “red flags” that should have alerted investors;
The course features prominent speakers involved in the frauds, including executives, short sellers, and whistleblowers.
Career Focus
The course is relevant for future leaders, as they develop expertise to understand financial reporting implications of business decisions and identify key control fault-lines in companies that can lead to fraud. The course is also relevant for students seeking to develop sophisticated financial analysis skills to spot red flags in their investment portfolios, and better prepare for careers in hedge funds, investment banking, or private equity.
Course Administration
Course grades will be based on class participation (50%) and a final project (50%).
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
The Arts of Communication
Course Number 7515
14 2-hour sessions
Career Focus
Exceptionally effective leaders must have the ability to communicate clearly, persuasively, and thoughtfully to diverse audiences.
Skillful communication is essential, even if you don’t plan to be on the front lines or give frequent formal speeches. While this course focuses on public speaking, I designed it to also explore speaking beyond the formal podium: disagreeing with the boss, holding an employee accountable, giving a peer critical feedback, speaking on your feet, influencing someone to change their behavior, resolving conflicts, and more.
This class is for anyone ready to take risks, hungry to receive and apply feedback, and eager to improve the quality of their results and relationships.
Course Objectives
The course’s principal goal is to strengthen your capacity to achieve desired results and influence others, by communicating more effectively and authentically.
This course is highly participatory. Through hands-on activities, exercises, and application, participants interactively build skills in key competencies, including:
- Finding your voice and generating ideas
- Communicating complex information effectively (includes using visual aids and programs such as PowerPoint effectively)
- Understanding and applying effective frameworks for structuring your message
- Building trust and credibility
- Discussing topics that are high stakes, controversial, and emotionally charged
- Improving storytelling skills
- Giving and receiving feedback
- Resolving conflict
- Communicating under high stress/crisis communication
Course Outline
The class focuses on building skills around critical aspects of communication. On speech days, students deliver a series of speeches and receive feedback from the instructor and classmates. Speeches are videotaped and posted on the course webpage for later review and reflection (only visible by course participants).
Assignments
1) Speeches:
- Two in-class speeches of roughly 3-4 minutes. Prior to each speech, students submit a one sentence “thesis” that summarizes their speech, an outline of the key points of their speech, the name of the student they practiced with, and two bullet points for what improvement they wish to focus on in their delivery.
- One additional speech that students arrange outside of class on their own that is not a requirement of another class. Options include (but are not limited to) speech at a class event, Toastmaster meeting, fundraising event, local club (Lions Club, Kiwanis, Junior League, etc.), K-12 school, community event, orientation, non-profit, or undergrad organization. Credit requires submitting a 30 second video of speaking engagement and a reflection on lessons learned.
2) Reflection email:
- Watch video of speech from class
- Submit a paragraph via canvas confirming that you watched your speech and stating improvements/focus for going forward. Paragraph must be submitted within 48 hours of speech delivery.
3) Tough Conversation:
- Hold a significant conversation with someone you disagree with.
- Write a one-page reflection on how it went and what you could do differently next time.
4) Briefing:
- Submit a briefing via canvas
5) Journaling:
- Keep an active “speaking journal” collecting quotes, notes, ideas, and reflections.
- Journals are used in class and outside of class.
6) Practice:
- Each student is expected to practice their speech with one other student prior to their speech.
7) Feedback:
- Provide meaningful feedback to peers following their speeches, throughout the course, and in small groups.
8) Weekly assignments:
- Complete communication challenges each week. For example, “watch 3 TED talks of your choosing that you haven’t seen before.” Bring reflections on these weekly assignments to class.
Grading
Three Speech Presentations 50% Weekly Assignments, Tough Conversation, and Briefing: 25%
Class Participation—includes giving written/oral feedback and receiving feedback 25%
If for some reason a student must miss a section when their peers deliver speeches, they will be expected to watch the section video and send feedback via email, cc’ing the course instructor, to each student who delivered a speech that day. This must be done within a week of the missed class. In the rare instance where a student must miss a section when they are scheduled to deliver a speech, they must arrange a one-to-one switch with another student, to keep an even number of speeches in each section each week.
Attendance and Expectations
Increasing our skills in public speaking requires practice, receiving and applying feedback, and observing other speakers. As a result, students must attend and participate in class to pass this course.
Time requirements for this course are likely to be high.
Attendance at all class meetings is required. Every unexcused absence, or repeatedly arriving late or leaving early, will negatively affect your final grade. Certain exceptions for sickness, religious holiday, or personal emergency will be granted only if you contact the instructor and course assistant via email in advance (not right before class starts). Any other reasons, including missing class because you have another class across the river, or you scheduled a job interview at the same time, or you have a speech elsewhere, is an unexcused absence and will reduce your final grade.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Authentic Leader Development
Course Number 2090
28 Sessions
Paper/Project
26 Sessions
Paper
Purpose - Who Should Take this Course?
The purpose of ALD is to help you become more effective, authentic individuals, and leaders. We do this by carving out some sacred time and space in your busy lives to engage in a rigorous, theoretically-supported, meaningful conversation about who you are and the purpose of your leadership. This is a different kind of work. You cannot do it alone. Do not take this course unless you are open to sharing personal insights, experiences, ambitions, and fears both in class and in your Leader Development Groups (LDGs).
ALD requires an unusually high degree of curiosity, reflection, and interpersonal openness. You will be asked to think differently and explore new behaviors. We expect you to be absolutely honest with yourself and others. While few of our students are completely comfortable or sure about this type of work coming in, you must be at least open to experimenting with a different kind of learning. This is the bare minimum for joining ALD. Those who are not fully committed to investing in this course end up wasting their time. More importantly, they waste the valuable time and effort of others. We invite you to be “all in.”
Why Should You Take this Course?
If you spend time reflecting on some of the following challenges, you might consider taking ALD:
- I am 26 years old; I have lived for my resume. I am proud of what I have accomplished, but is that really all there is to it? What do I live for now?
- I seek public success and approval; my achievement masks deeper insecurities.
- I need to appear “strong” and “perfect.” I rarely open up or ask for help. These actions are signs of weakness to me.
- Why do I obsess about my image? Why do I care so much about what others think of me?
- Why am I afraid to tell you who I really am?
- I obsess about status and money, but don’t have the courage to pursue my personal passions. I’m not even sure anymore what they are.
Requirements
- Attend one 80-minute class each week for thirteen weeks on Tuesdays in assigned classrooms (please note exceptions for the first week and the week of 7 Novermber).
- Attend one, two-hour-long meeting per week with a six-person Leader Development Group (LDG). LDGs are held the afternoon of class between 5:30 and 7:30 pm. Rotating facilitators are drawn from the group. LDGs will be assigned in advance by your professor with the intent of creating diverse groups.
- Submit a reflective essay each week via Canvass. Reflections are due NLT midnight on the day following your class. Your reflection should be no less than one paragraph and no more than 2 pages double-spaced (think blog). This reflection is due even if you are the group facilitator that week.
- In lieu of an exam, students will write a final paper on the purpose of their leadership, as well as complete and submit a Personal Leadership Development Plan (PLDP).
Grading
There are three graded requirements:
- Class participation
- Weekly reflections
- Final Essay & Personal Leadership Development Plan (PLDP)
There is one simple overarching criterion for assessing performance in all three areas:
Are you “all in”? Are you deeply engaged in this different kind of work? Are you giving this your best shot?
Course Premise
In its simplest form, here is the theoretical premise for ALD:
To the extent that you have a clearer sense of:
who you are, your life story, your values & principles, your motivations and passions, your leadership purpose, your True North,
When it comes time to lead you will be more likely to:
- step up,
- lead effectively, and
- live a more integrated & meaningful life.
Course Goals:
Overarching: Increased CLARITY (self-awareness) & COMFORT (self-acceptance)
Detailed:
- Increase your self-awareness by engaging the “big questions” in life, with the goal to live with greater mindfulness and intentionality.
- Help you uncover personal patterns, decide which ones serve you well (accept and commit to them), and which ones don’t (commit to changing them).
- Learn how to participate more fully in open, intimate small-group discussions. Learn how to “listen deeply” to others, to be “fully there” for them.
- Gain some clarity about your leadership purpose, values, and motivations, and the role these play when leading others.
- Become more honest (and comfortable) with yourself in all dimensions of life.
- Learn how to empower, engage, and inspire others.
- Be able to more fully imagine the reality of others.
Course Outline
Drawing broadly from the fields of positive psychology, sociology, adult development, and leadership, you will be exposed to a powerful collection of theoretical frameworks and concepts all selected to support your progress in line with ALD Course Goals. Additionally, you will learn a set of foundational skills essential to the practice of authentic leadership. Finally, you will engage in several rigorous processes designed to support your continued growth and development throughout your life. Here is the course outline for ALD:
Lesson 1: |
Authentic Leader Development |
Lesson 2: |
Life Story |
Lesson 3: |
Losing Your Way |
Lesson 4: |
Crucibles |
Lesson 5: |
Develop Your Self-Awareness |
Lesson 6: |
Practice Your Values |
Lesson 7: |
Difficult Conversations |
Lesson 8: |
Find Your Sweet Spot |
Lesson 9: |
Build Your Support Team |
Lesson 10: |
Integrate Your Life |
Lesson 11: |
Lead With Purpose |
Lesson 12: |
Empower Others to Lead |
Lesson 13: |
Final Class |
Readings
- Brown, Brene. Daring Greatly: How the Courage to be Vulnerable Transforms the Way We Live, Love, Parent, and Lead. New York: Gotham, 2012.
- Craig, N., George, B.; & Snook, S. The Discover Your True North Fieldbook. New Jersey: Wiley, 2015.
- Stone, D., Patton, B. and Heen, S. Difficult Conversations: How to Discuss What Matters Most. New York: Penguin Books, 2010.
Students receive three texts. The first of them, The Discover Your True North Fieldbook, is the basic text for ALD. Assignments in this workbook are designed to personalize and deepen your understanding of each week’s topic. Students are expected to complete all assigned exercises in this workbook prior to attending class each week.
Selected chapters will be assigned from the books, Difficult Conversations and Daring Greatly.
Leader Development Groups (LDGs)
Prior to our second meeting, each student will be assigned to a six-person Leader Development Group (LDG). LDGs meet in designated classrooms from 5:30 – 7:30 pm each week on the same day as your class. LDG meetings are a central part of the course and as such are treated just like normal class time. Attendance is mandatory. Do not take ALD if you cannot commit to attending all 12 LDG sessions (there is no LDG meeting following Lesson 1).
The purpose of LDGs is to carve out an intimate and safe place to engage in a deeper discussion of that day’s topic with your peers. Each week, a different student will be assigned to facilitate that day’s session. Faculty will provide additional guidance in the form of suggested exercises and discussion questions to help facilitators prepare for and lead their groups.
Each student will have the opportunity to facilitate for two weeks during the course. Facilitators will meet briefly with their professor prior to the LDG to discuss that week’s meeting (typically just following each day’s class). An ALD “Facilitator’s Guide” will be posted on the course website and also sent out to you via email when it is your turn to facilitate. The Facilitator’s Guide will provide a helpful overview of your responsibilities as facilitator for the weeks that you are assigned to that role.
Following each LDG meeting, facilitators will submit a summary of the group’s discussion, including attendance records and open questions.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Avoiding Startup Failure
Course Number 1740
27 Sessions
Exam
Formerly Entrepreneurial Failure
Career Focus
Avoiding Startup Failure will be of interest to students who:
- Plan to start their own companies, immediately after graduation or in the future
- Have experienced a startup failure--of their own or of a company they were a part of--and want to build a narrative toolkit for talking to future employers and investors about the experience
- Want to join a startup and are looking for tools to evaluate companies and founding teams they are considering working with
- Intend to invest in startups or serve as startup advisors and board members
- Are interested in corporate innovation and applying the patterns of startup failure to innovation initiatives or incubator programs within traditional corporations
Educational Objectives
Most startups fail. Avoiding Startup Failure focuses on understanding why startups fail and what entrepreneurs can do to anticipate and avoid failure.
Additionally, the course prepares prospective entrepreneurs, those interested in joining startups, and those interested in investing in startups with a toolkit to rebound from startup failure, allowing them to maintain their reputations, relationships, and the opportunity to found again.
Course Content
Through a series of cases and discussions with founders, students will have the opportunity to build an understanding of the common causes of startup failure and how companies and founders can avoid, or rebound from, failure.
Over the arc of the course, we will explore:
- Common patterns that lead to startup failure
- Frameworks to identify these patterns in early-stage and late-stage ventures
- Rebuilding a venture after a near failure
- Avoiding ethical lapses as startups struggle
- Tactical steps for managing a venture’s shutdown to preserve relationships, reputations, and integrity
- How to learn from a venture’s failure and what to do with those learnings
- Addressing founder burnout & weighing tradeoffs when deciding if and when to found again
- Communicating key lessons from a venture’s failure when pitching a next venture to potential employees, investors, and strategic partners
Most class sessions will focus on venture capital-backed startups, but the course will also examine entrepreneurial failure in other contexts, for example: science-based “tough tech” ventures; startups that aim for social impact; new ventures launched by established corporations; and bootstrapped, “low tech” businesses. The case protagonist will join as a guest in most sessions.
Students can choose to take a final exam or complete a final paper (alone or in pairs). The final paper can either address a topic approved by the instructor or one of the following topics:
- Using course frameworks, analyze factors that contributed to the failure of a startup of their choosing.
- Write a “pre-mortem” for a going concern—or a startup that students might plan to launch—analyzing the factors behind that startup’s imagined future failure.
- Analyze distinctive factors behind startup failure in a specific context or industry sector, for example, biotech, social enterprise, or emerging markets.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
B2B Sales and Distribution
Course Number 1985
Faculty Name(s)
Lou Shipley, Senior Lecturer
https://www.hbs.edu/faculty/Pages/profile.aspx?facId=936677
Dianne Ledingham HBS ’90 – Executive Fellow
https://www.linkedin.com/in/dianneledingham/
Ed Boyajian HBS ’90 – Executive Fellow
https://www.linkedin.com/in/edboyajian/
Overview:
B2B Sales and Distribution will focus on the primary components of managing a large company sales organizations and focus on B2B businesses.
Career Focus:
If you are going to manage or invest in large companies, you will need to understand how to manage your top line, your sales organization. This course draws heavily although not exclusively on technology companies and is essential if you plan to be a CEO, General Manager or Chief Operating Officer or Chief Revenue Officer.
Educational Objectives:
This course is designed for students who would like to gain an understanding of the complexity of managing large sales and go-to-market organizations. There are three main themes to the class – people, go-to-market strategy and operations and analytics. The people section will address how to hire and manage first line sales managers, define a sales culture and create scalable compensation systems. The go-to-market design module will address how to choose an appropriate sales model to achieve growth and profitability and compare and contrast direct, indirect and other sales models. The operations and analytics module will focus on how AI and a sales operations tool stack give visibility into sales activities and drive sales forecasting accuracy.
Course Content and Organization:
There are live cases and traditional cases to reinforce the three core themes of the class. We have six live cases where senior executives from SalesForce.com, Samsara, IBM, Infor, Workday and EnterpriseDB will join us to grapple with actual sales management challenges they are currently experiencing. Five classes will be HBS published case studies on Microsoft, Qualtrics, ABB and Optigen.
Grading / Course Administration:
Theer is no final paper for this class. Grading will be 70% on class participation and 30% on the two experiential assignments,
Experiential assignment one: Write and submit a paper: You will find a salesperson on your own, interview them about how they are compensated, and write a two-page summary of your conversation.
The second experiential assignment is an opportunity to experience real sales management issues and conduct a role play in class. Topics for the role play include changing a salesperson’s compensation plan, reducing a reseller’s gross margin, managing an unhappy major account and integrating your sales organization into an acquiring company’s sales organization. Each student will be required to submit their strategy for handling management issues ahead of class.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Behavioral Economics for Managerial Decision Making
Course Number 2236
28 Sessions
Project
Course Description
Effective managers need sound judgment to navigate a complex world. Good judgment requires an understanding of the behavioral biases that can hinder effective decision-making. It also requires a foundational understanding of the modern analytical toolkit, which can mitigate the risk of mistakes and guide managerial decisions. This course explores modern managerial judgment through the lens of behavioral economics, experiments, and other forms of data. The course aims to help students (a) improve their ability to make decisions effectively, (b) understand how to create environments that encourage others to make wiser decisions-or more broadly to do good-and (c) learn how to leverage experiments and other data to guide managerial decisions. Students will learn how to use psychological, sociological, and economic research, and a thoughtful approach to data, to structure organizational or institutional environments that encourage wiser, fairer, or otherwise better decisions by others, including employees, clients, customers, counterparts in other organizations, and the public at large. Topics may include risk and loss aversion, inattention, memory, intertemporal choice, networks, organizational norms, default options, consideration sets, choice architecture, platform design, experimental methods, unintended consequences, fairness, and the public good.
The course is centered on five themes:
- Understanding decision-making. How do people make decisions? We discuss the psychology and sociology of decision-making, emphasizing the many ways that, in their everyday lives, people make decisions inconsistent with expectations of rationality.
- Clarifying objectives. How should leaders determine whether the decisions others are making are optimal? We address the questions leaders should consider before deciding to intervene in others’ decision-making behavior-including whether it is actually irrational and whose interest it serves.
- Creating environments. What strategies can leaders use to design and build environments conducive to better decisions? We explore the construction of environments that encourage others to do well by doing good or to make wiser decisions themselves, through processes that include nudges, incentives, and organizational changes.
- Leveraging experiments. How can experiments guide managerial decisions? We develop a basic understanding of experiments, address their value in assessing the effectiveness of decision-making environments, introduce frameworks for students to leverage them in such contexts, and discuss the managerial questions that arise around their use.
- Managing complexity.What broader questions must leaders consider when creating decision-making environments? We discuss the questions leaders must ask when managing the complexity of real-life environments, including how social networks and organizational capacity may complicate an intervention, what kinds of unintended consequences interventions may produce, and which constituents the leader can or should consider. Throughout the course, we discuss the ethical issues involved in behaviorally-informed management.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Building Trusted Organizations
Course Number 1825
Course Description
Trust is crucial to the success of any relationship. Building trust into the structure and daily operations of a business translates into increased revenue and profit, productive growth, the satisfaction of stakeholders and shareholders, industry reputation, and overall success. Yet when individuals and organizations are asked to define or measure trust, they often cannot. BTO is an exploration of what trust actually is and how leaders can build, maintain, and recover it within their organizations, teams, and themselves. Students will develop a practical understanding of trust, which they will apply through cases, exercises and simulations.
Details:
- 14, 80-minute in-class sessions, over 7 weeks.
- Diversity in context and industries.
- Guests include founders, executives, and industry experts.
Course Goals:
- Develop a practical understanding of trust at different levels (e.g. institutional, organizational, team, and individual), in different contexts (e.g. banking/investment management, AI/tech, media, climate, health), through US (Boeing, Bud Light) and global examples.
- Develop skills to strategically build trust in organizations and in oneself.
- Provide tools to effectively navigate trust challenges.
- Assess the effectiveness of trust recovery processes.
- Explore methods to effectively measure trust.
Why you should take this course:
- Trust is a cornerstone of successful relationships and organizations.
- Trust is important to everyone, yet few know what it means and how it works.
- Being able to operationalize trust – to turn it from a vague idea into a business and personal asset – is essential for leaders, managers, team members, and individuals.
- Customers, employees, shareholders, and others are increasingly motivated by their perception of an organization — how much they trust it.
- The ability to clearly understand how trust is built, lost, and recovered allows one to effectively build organizations and to navigate relationships and crisis.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Building and Sustaining a Successful Enterprise
Course Number 1504
28 Sessions
Paper/Project
28 Sessions
Paper
Career Focus
Leaders who aspire to run successful enterprises need to connect the dots tightly around their business model, their core technology and their competitive advantage in the market. Difficult enough, but the reward for building a successful business is that the leader must then spot when external conditions require a change to the formula. And the more successful the business, the harder that change will be to pull off. This course, which introduces a series of powerful frameworks for navigating these critical moments in enterprise growth, will prove valuable to students who anticipate founding, managing, advising, or investing in any of a variety of companies—from category-creating startups to industry-leading incumbents. Our goal is to increase your personal impact as a leader, as well as your odds of achieving successful outcomes.
Educational Objectives
The focus of the course is to learn to use well-researched causal theories about strategy, innovation, and management to understand why things happen the way they do in businesses, and to predict which tools, strategies, and methods will and will not be effective in the various circumstances in which our students find themselves. We integrate a unique understanding of strategy formulation with practical solutions to the execution challenges faced by general managers seeking to maximize positive outcomes.
The language and frameworks of the BSSE course have become widely accepted and acknowledged among HBS alumni and beyond as a series of powerful lenses through which to understand the most important challenges facing business leaders.
Course Content and Objectives
This is a foundational general management course built around former Professor Clayton Christensen’s globally applied decision-making frameworks. Early sessions will introduce models about the key jobs of the general manager, who must integrate the marketing, product development, operations, strategic planning, financial, and human dimensions of the enterprise. We will employ these models throughout the course to understand the root causes of the challenges that the general managers in our cases are facing, and to develop action plans for resolving them. During case discussions, we will seek to answer some of the following questions, which are relevant to companies of all sizes:
- What does disruptive innovation really mean—and how does it work?
- How can entrants disrupt market leaders, and what can market leaders do to avoid disruption?
- Who is our ideal customer, and how can selecting the wrong customers derail your growth?
- What’s the hidden danger of core competence theory? How should we decide which activities to keep in-house and which to outsource?
- What’s the signal that an industry is about to commoditize, and how can we profit from that shift?
- How do we set strategy in a rapidly changing world (where unknowns vastly outweigh knowns)?
- Whose investment capital will help us, and whose money might undermine our chances of success?
- To what extent do commonly used performance metrics kill innovation, and how can we develop metrics that encourage new growth?
- Can acquisitions become a pathway to new capabilities? Should we integrate acquired companies or keep them separate?
- What is the role of the CEO in building new growth engines within established companies?
Course Organization and Grading
The course includes a final paper, to be completed by teams. The paper will not require field or library research; instead, it will provide an opportunity for students to apply theories and frameworks introduced in the course to explore the opportunities and challenges of a company they know and/or in which they have a current interest. (This is a great opportunity to understand deeply a company you are interested in working for, or investing in.)
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Building and Sustaining a Successful Enterprise Q4
Course Number 1507
13 sessions
Paper
This short version of BSSE will focus on core theories and applications from the full-length course. It will have a series of shorter written analysis exercises instead of a full research paper.
Career Focus
Leaders who aspire to run successful enterprises need to connect the dots tightly around their business model, their core technology and their competitive advantage in the market. Difficult enough, but the reward for building a successful business is that the leader must then spot when external conditions require a change to the formula. And the more successful the business, the harder that change will be to pull off. This course, which introduces a series of powerful frameworks for navigating these critical moments in enterprise growth, will prove valuable to students who anticipate founding, managing, advising, or investing in any of a variety of companies—from category-creating startups to industry-leading incumbents. Our goal is to increase your personal impact as a leader, as well as your odds of achieving successful outcomes.
Educational Objectives
The focus of the course is to learn to use well-researched causal theories about strategy, innovation, and management to understand why things happen the way they do in businesses, and to predict which tools, strategies, and methods will and will not be effective in the various circumstances in which our students find themselves. We integrate a unique understanding of strategy formulation with practical solutions to the execution challenges faced by general managers seeking to maximize positive outcomes.
The language and frameworks of the BSSE course have become widely accepted and acknowledged among HBS alumni and beyond as a series of powerful lenses through which to understand the most important challenges facing business leaders.
Course Content and Objectives
This is a foundational general management course built around former Professor Clayton Christensen’s globally applied decision-making frameworks. Early sessions will introduce models about the key jobs of the general manager, who must integrate the marketing, product development, operations, strategic planning, financial, and human dimensions of the enterprise. We will employ these models throughout the course to understand the root causes of the challenges that the general managers in our cases are facing, and to develop action plans for resolving them. During case discussions, we will seek to answer some of the following questions, which are relevant to companies of all sizes:
- What does disruptive innovation really mean—and how does it work?
- How can entrants disrupt market leaders, and what can market leaders do to avoid disruption?
- Who is our ideal customer, and how can selecting the wrong customers derail your growth?
- What’s the hidden danger of core competence theory? How should we decide which activities to keep in-house and which to outsource?
- What’s the signal that an industry is about to commoditize, and how can we profit from that shift?
- How do we set strategy in a rapidly changing world (where unknowns vastly outweigh knowns)?
- Whose investment capital will help us, and whose money might undermine our chances of success?
- To what extent do commonly used performance metrics kill innovation, and how can we develop metrics that encourage new growth?
- Can acquisitions become a pathway to new capabilities? Should we integrate acquired companies or keep them separate?
- What is the role of the CEO in building new growth engines within established companies?
Course Organization and Grading
The course includes a final paper, to be completed by teams. The paper will not require field or library research; instead, it will provide an opportunity for students to apply theories and frameworks introduced in the course to explore the opportunities and challenges of a company they know and/or in which they have a current interest. (This is a great opportunity to understand deeply a company you are interested in working for, or investing in.)
Business Analysis and Valuation Using Financial Statements
Course Number 1306
28 Sessions
Paper/Project
Career Focus
This course provides a comprehensive framework for using financial statements to evaluate a company’s strategy execution, performance, financial prospects, and value. The primary emphasis is on the analysis of public companies, but the framework and tools are also relevant to private enterprises. This course is particularly valuable to students seeking a career in consulting, corporate finance, hedge funds, venture capital, private equity, or investment banking.
Educational Objectives
The objective of the course is to provide hands-on experience in financial statement analysis and valuation that enhances investment decisions. By the end of the course, students are comfortable with analyzing complex financial statements to gain a richer understanding of firm performance and value. The course is a capstone course for the MBA program as it integrates and extends topics covered in various RC courses, including strategy, finance, and accounting.
Course Content and Organization
The course uses case-based discussions to develop a comprehensive framework that integrates strategy and financial analysis, and applies this framework to fundamental analysis and valuation. The first half of the course develops the framework through two main topics:
- Reporting strategy analysis: assessing a firm's value proposition and identifying its key value drivers and risks; evaluating the degree to which accounting policies and standards capture underlying economics; assessing earnings quality; and making adjustments to eliminate accounting distortions.
- Performance analysis and valuation: assessing current performance and its future sustainability; making forecasts of future profitability and risk; and valuing businesses using earnings and book value data.
The second half of the course applies the above framework to various contexts including equity-investment analysis, IPOs, mergers, short selling opportunities, and hedge fund activist investing strategies. Over the course of the semester, several high-profile guest speakers, such as renowned CEOs and CFOs, short sellers, hedge fund managers, activist investors, and research analysts will share their experiences with students.
To deepen students' ability to apply the course skills in a practical context, they also work on a group project. The project involves a comprehensive analysis using the course framework and a stock pitch to a panel of investors. In the past, students’ stock recommendations have outperformed the market.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Business Solutions for the Global Poor
Course Number 1587
Six 2-hour Sessions in Seminar Format
One Final Paper (Limit 1,000 words and two exhibits), No Exam
Enrollment Limited to 25 students
Overview
For customers at the top of the socioeconomic pyramid, traditionally served by business entities with rules and regulations set by governments, the process of creating value for customers and shareholders are relatively easier to converge than it is for customers who are in the bottom quarter of the socio-economic pyramid. This course will focus on how certain businesses have attempted to serve such segments. The course will explore business opportunities, challenges and limitations. We will examine the role of corporate social responsibility and creating shared value. We will also consider how new philanthropy attempts to serve that segment. The backdrop for class discussion will be sectors such as housing, hunger, healthcare and so on, both domestic as well as international. One of the main goals of the course will be to develop a contingency model regarding when business/nonprofits should participate and when they should abstain; we will also discuss the role of government.
Target Audience
This is a General Management course offered jointly with the Marketing Unit because of its focus on poor customers. The course is intended to bring a societal context to the many careers that students wish to aim for. Thus, it should have broad appeal to private sector and public sector entrepreneurs and managers. However, students taking this course should be forewarned that the course materials are not intended to address students’ career needs including those who wish to go into the nonprofit sector.
Syllabus
Through a mix of cases, books and guest speakers the course will attempt to identify the principal opportunities, challenges, and limitations of businesses and nonprofits in serving the poor. The course will examine the conditions under which economic returns are compatible with the creation of social value, and vice versa. Throughout the course, we will explore the intersection and overlaps of business with civil society and government, all three of whom have key roles to play.
Course Evaluation and Grading
60% of the grade will be based on class participation and 40% on the final paper.
Business and Geopolitics
Course Number 1155
14 Sessions
Paper/Project
Educational Objectives
The goal of the course is to examine the ways in which firms not only react to the geopolitical environment, but actually shape it, including how they impact bilateral relationships, contribute to power shifts, and act as vectors for the promotion of values and ideologies. The course will consist of three modules. The first will look at historical examples of firms impacting geopolitics, especially relations between developed and developing countries. The second module will look at recent and contemporary instances of business and investment decisions that have geopolitical effects. The final module will focus on the US-China relationship, and look at how business is both impacting and being impacted by the struggle for hegemony currently underway.
Grading
Grading will be based on class participation (50%) and a 10-page research project to be completed by teams of four on a firm that faces a problem with geopolitical consequences.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Business at the Base of the Pyramid
Course Number 1908
28 Sessions
Exam
28 Sessions
Exam
Overview
Between a well-served top of the socio-economic pyramid and an almost indigent bottom, lies the majority of humanity, accessing goods and services, not through government or civil society, but through markets. Yet this remains largely unstudied. Through 24 cases, module summaries and guest protagonists, this course seeks to fill the gap. Composed of the emerging middle class and low-income sectors, the base of the pyramid encompasses 5.0 of the 7.5 billion people in the world. In most nations, it accounts for the largest aggregate expenditure of the economy, yet continues to be significantly underserved. This makes possible innovative, disruptive models that dramatically expand access while generating commercial returns equal to or greater than conventional businesses. This success has drawn the attention of large multinational corporations, looking at the base of the pyramid for the growth that has become ever more challenging in their saturated, intensely competitive traditional markets.
But why do some businesses at the base of the pyramid succeed while others fail? The course examines the opportunities and the challenges of the base of the pyramid markets and seeks to identify the key factors behind commercial success and failure. How is technology and the digital age changing this space? And when businesses generate strong financial returns, does it come at the expense of social impact --- can business play a significant role in addressing social issues? When is an enterprise generating high social value or destroying it? In the process, the course delves into the intersection of business, government, and civil society.
Cases are drawn from around the world, including some from the developed economies, where 40-50% of lower-income citizens access goods and services differently than those at the top of the pyramid.
Target Audience
This is a General Management course for operating managers, entrepreneurs, investors and consultants who are interested in the opportunities of fulfilling the largely unmet needs of the growing middle class and lower-income segments. In emerging markets, this often represents a majority of people and total spending; in developed economies it comprises the lowest two quintiles of the population. The course focuses on business at the base of the pyramid as a core commercial activity of the enterprise. Accordingly, it is not for those primarily interested in corporate social responsibility or in serving the ~10% lowest-income population of the world that is near indigence and for whom market solutions are less relevant.
Course Evaluation and Grading
50% of the grade will be based on class participation, 10% on an original posting and two responses on the course blog, and 40% on a take-home final exam.
This course is offered in conjunction with Finance. It is also part of a portfolio of courses relevant to Social Enterprise. For a full listing, see the Social Enterprise Initiative website.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
The Business of Entertainment, Media, and Sports
Course Number 1914
28 Sessions
Paper/Project
Career Focus
This course is primarily designed for students who are pursuing a career in film, television, music, publishing, performing arts, sports, or other sectors that supply goods that are commonly associated with artistic, athletic, cultural, or entertainment value.
The course is also useful for students who are planning to work in companies that advise or support those sectors. It may further be interesting for students seeking to advance their knowledge of general management, strategy, and marketing in the context of a challenging, rapidly changing, and fun environment.
Educational Objectives
The course starts with an examination of the properties that define the entertainment, media, and sports industries, and how those properties together introduce a unique set of challenges and opportunities for managers. Subsequent modules explore:
- How can entertainment businesses best allocate resources across a portfolio of projects and for one project over time? For example, does it pay to pursue a "blockbuster" strategy?
- How can entertainment businesses best approach the management and marketing of creative talent? In particular, how should companies invest in and capture value from "superstars" and the teams to which they belong?
- How are digital technologies changing the entertainment industries? For instance, how are creative businesses affected by - and how can they benefit from - the rise of online channels?
The course ends with an examination of firms that fall outside the core entertainment industries but that seemingly face similar challenges or opportunities.
Cases focus on established and emerging firms, products, and personalities in media, sports, and other entertainment industries. Examples include The Walt Disney Studios, Live Nation, FC Barcelona, Paris Saint-Germain, American Ballet Theatre, Jay-Z, Beyoncé, LeBron James, Dwyane Wade, Roger Federer, Dwayne ‘The Rock’ Johnson, Shonda Rhimes, Ninja, Spotify, the NFL, MRC’s House of Cards, Disney versus Netflix, Nike sneakers, and Magnolia Network.
Grading
Grading is based on class participation (50%) and the final project (50%).
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Capitalism and the State (CATS)
Course Number 1120
Weekly seminar
Paper
Enrollment by application only. Students should submit their applications by August 1, and will be informed of their registration status by August 15.
This course seeks to explore the theory, history, and state structures of capitalism; examine its manifestations in several national contexts; and understand the ways in which systemic changes to market capitalism are likely to both demand and cause systemic political change as well.
Course Content and Objectives
Capitalism today is under attack, criticized from many quarters as being the source of societal ills that range from inequality and systemic racism to climate change and labor market disruption. The goal of CATS is both to examine these criticisms and, more importantly, interrogate the deep and fundamental connections between the market structures of capitalism and the political structures of the states that seek to support and nourish this system. What are the political prerequisites of a working capitalist system, the course will ask. What are the political risks inherent in a market economy, and what kinds of solutions, both economic and political, are best suited to address the current slate of concerns?
CATS is considerably more theoretical than most courses at HBS. The materials are non-case based, and draw from a combination of book chapters, academic articles, journalistic essays, videos, and podcasts. The reading load is relatively heavy (particularly for the first several sessions of the course), and students should be prepared to engage in conversations that are both philosophical and practical. After an introductory class that highlights several contemporary critiques of our market system, the course dives deep into some of the foundational theories of capitalism (John Locke’s Second Treatise, Adam Smith’s Wealth of Nations, and Karl Marx’s Communist Manifesto) and the capitalist state (F.A. Hayek’s Road to Serfdom, Milton Friedman’s Capitalism and Freedom, and Karl Polanyi’s Great Transformation). We will then examine several critical tenets of market economies – including property rights and competition – and several of the most pressing problems that are allegedly inherent in their development. After reviewing some of capitalism’s most important international variants, the course will conclude by examining a range of solutions currently being offered to address capitalism’s ills and discuss their feasibility within various political structures.
Course Administration and Grading
Students will be asked to write two short analyses of weekly course materials and a final paper on a topic of their choice (together worth 50% of their grade). The remainder of their grade (50%) will be based on class participation.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Capitalism: Past, Present, Future
Course Number 1152
14 sessions
Exam
Few forces have shaped the world over the past millennium more than capitalism has, yet few terms remain more elusive and more divisive. Today, less than half of young Americans view capitalism positively, and calls for alternatives are becoming ever more frequent. Why? And why have different forms of capitalism led to such unequal outcomes around the world? What is capitalism, really; what has it been, and what might it be? This course takes students on a journey to explore the past, present, and future of various forms of capitalisms, globally and beyond, introducing them to theories and frameworks to help make sense of the world in which they live, and where it might be headed.
The world economy is experiencing a rare confluence of inflection points, and this course uses a variety of both country and company cases to give students a deeper understanding of why, how, and with what consequences economic life on the planet will change in their lifetimes, and the unique roles played by businesses in this process. In so doing, it challenges students to think critically about the future and how they might contribute to shaping a more equitable and sustainable economic system.
Challenges and Opportunities in the Restaurant Industry
Course Number 1564
27 Sessions
Exam
Note: Andy Pforzheimer (Harvard College ’84) is the co-founder and former CEO of Barteca (Barcelona Wine Bar and bartaco). He is currently a board member of US Foods and multiple privately-owned restaurant groups.
Course Overview
Uniquely within the HBS EC curriculum, this course is industry specific. Despite its pervasiveness and intimate consumer interaction, the restaurant industry has been lightly studied academically. And yet its entrepreneurial and management learnings have broad application beyond restaurants. Sited within General Management, this course explores exactly that.
We will run the gamut from planning for the first restaurant to scaling to leadership of multinational chains, and evaluate opportunities inherent in typical restaurant business models as well as those created by disruptive changes affecting and shaping the industry.
Michael and Andy will co-teach the course using written cases, as well as “live” cases with protagonists facing real-time challenges. We will draw on industry executives, HBS alumni active in the industry, industry investors, and well-known chefs and restaurateurs.
Background. 9 in 10 consumers say they enjoy going to restaurants and half of consumers consider restaurants to be an essential part of their lifestyle. Restaurants are an important source of employment: the industry is the 2nd largest private employer in the US, employing over 15 million people in 2023, with over 60% of adults and 70% of millennials in the US having worked in the restaurant industry at some point in their life and 1 in 3 Americans having their first job experience in a restaurant.
Restaurants have provided significant management and ownership opportunities for women and minorities. Restaurants are also big business. In 2023, US restaurant industry sales exceeded $1 trillion representing a $3 trillion economic impact and approximately 4% of the US gross domestic product. While scaled restaurant operations are frequently featured, interestingly approximately 70% of restaurants are single unit operations. Restaurants have also attracted significant interest from venture capital and private equity and the industry has spawned a number of “unicorns.”
We hope to engage not only with students interested in the restaurant industry, but also those interested in food and sustainability, applications of technology and, given the labor-intense characteristic of restaurants, the complex interaction of food and labor costs with consumer value. The course may also appeal to future consultants, investment bankers and venture capital/private equity professionals, as well as to students interested in general management, particularly regarding an industry subject to hugely disruptive forces and spawning compelling investment opportunities.
Course Content
Restaurant Economics. We will do a deep dive into the levers of financial management of restaurants – examining both revenue and cost strategies.
Compensation and Workforce Management. The execution of restaurant/dining experiences requires a focus on both hospitality and profitability – how can cultures be developed to deliver both consistently? Among the most significant challenges facing the industry are the decreasing availability, increasing cost, and high turnover in the labor force. We will examine the responses of the industry to these issues, especially in light of increasing concerns about how to bridge the gap between consumer willingness to pay/perception of value and the hurdles restaurants face in trying to pay living wages.
Menu Management. Chefs and restaurateurs often say they offer what their guests want to eat but many are also interested in the healthiness and sustainability of their offerings. We will examine whether and how chefs lead or follow trends, how they distinguish trends from fads, what drives their selection of menu items and how they manage their supply chain.
Crisis Management. We’ll consider the critical issue of food safety and the crisis management implications when a foodborne illness strikes.
Disruption/Technology. We will examine how restaurants are assessing, adopting, affording and maximizing the utility of technological changes such as mobile ordering, delivery and advanced loyalty programs. We’ll also consider the rapid growth of “ghost kitchens” and how restaurateurs are developing asset light models providing consumers with increasing choices among brick-and-mortar restaurants and delivered meals.
Growth and Scale. This module will examine the factors that have traditionally determined profitability and valuation. It will consider growth potential and exit strategies for successful restaurants and emerging chains, including the advantages and disadvantages of franchising, institutional investment and leverage. We will consider the challenge of scale – how to achieve it and how to manage it once achieved. In addition, how founders consider a partial or complete exit and the criteria they established for a possible sale, as well as how the markets evaluate a public restaurant company and the factors that drive valuation.
Franchising. How does it work? When does it make sense from both investment and brand perspectives? Recent HBS alums have pursued franchising of quick-service restaurant brands – we’ll study both the challenges and opportunities they encountered. We’ll also view franchising from the franchisor perspective, including when a franchised brand faces unexpected challenges.
Grading will be based on class participation (40%) and a final exam (60%). Cross registrants will be accepted.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Changing the World: Life Choices of Influential Leaders
Course Number 1350
27 Sessions
Paper
The mission of Harvard Business School is to educate leaders who make a difference in the world. As you prepare to leave HBS, you are likely asking yourself, “How can I make a real and sustainable difference?”
To answer this question, we will study—and learn from—the lives of a variety of remarkable people who created a lasting legacy (see list of protagonists below). Each week, we will analyze case-length biographies to understand the choices that these high-impact individuals faced and the paths they chose.
In the first part of the course, you will discover the recipe for making a substantial difference in the world: the personality traits that must be acquired, the building blocks of success, how to navigate life’s important decisions, and how add purpose to your life.
In the second part of the course, you will learn how to apply these principles to develop a personal strategy: how to tailor an approach to reflect your interests and capabilities, how to develop mentoring and support systems, and how to identify high-payoff areas to focus your time and attention.
In the final part of the course, you will consider the extent to which you should (or should not) emulate and draw lessons from the lives of the exceptional people we have studied.
For the final paper, you will apply what you have learned by either interviewing someone you admire or analyzing a biography of your choice.
If you want to (1) be inspired by the lives of exceptional individuals who changed the world and (2) think deeply about your own life and the choices you will confront, you will find this course interesting, unique, and invaluable.
Individuals We Will Study:
Business: Mary Kay Ash, P.T. Barnum, Sarah Breedlove (Madam C.J. Walker), Walt Disney, Henry Ford, Katharine Graham, Steve Jobs
Government: Dwight Eisenhower, John F. Kennedy, Robert McNamara, Ronald Reagan, Margaret Thatcher
Humanitarian: Mahatma Gandhi, Helen Keller, Nelson Mandela, Bill Wilson
Science: Marie Curie, Albert Einstein
Sports: Muhammad Ali, Jackie Robinson
Writers: Ayn Rand
Entertainment: Leonard Bernstein
Education: James Conant
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Cities, Structures, and Climate Shocks
Course Number 1487
27 Sessions
Final Exam
Formerly “Sustainable Cities and Climate Adaptation”
Career Focus
This course prepares students to invest in, advise, or lead organizations in the context of increasing pressures of global urbanization, resource scarcity, and perils relating to climate change. The course takes a finance and real assets point of view focusing on houses, buildings, infrastructure, and cities as individuals, businesses, and global society make choices about who and what to protect. There are perils and also extensive opportunities in the analysis of situations and the deployment of tools, data science, and capital leading to success even in the face of these tensions.
Educational Objectives
The course starts with fundamentals of analysis of buildings, infrastructure, and economic development of cities. The content then progresses into how to incorporate considerations of urbanization, resource scarcity, and climate perils with proactive interventions that meet financial and societal returns on investment. The course concludes with opportunities at the level of individual actors.
- What are the core tools and skills for analysis of green and healthy buildings, sustainable infrastructure, large project finance, and public private partnerships?
- How do legacy and new cities realize both economic growth and equitable opportunity for residents? How does private investment help to accelerate beneficial outcomes?
- What are the timeframes and impacts in various geographies of increases in river flooding, extreme heat, sea level rise, wildfires, and drought? What are the policy and private sector tools to assess investments in reinforcement, or response, or recovery and when are these best used?
- How will capital markets, mortgages, property casualty insurance, and public health considerations, combined with data science, influence both investing and behavior?
- Where are the entrepreneurial and investment opportunities relating to climate adaptation, including for example analytics, sensors, membranes, equipment, real estate development and relocation, and the finance and delivery of resilient infrastructure?
Cases are drawn from the USA and also extensively from emerging markets including Africa, South Asia, and Latin America.
Cross-registrants are welcome with prior permission of the instructor. Prerequisites are HBS Finance 1 and Finance 2, or HBS Real Property, or equivalent. Complementary courses include Real Estate Private Equity, Risks and Opportunities Investing in Climate Change, and Global Climate Change.
Grading
Grading is based on class participation (50%), several polls and short assignments (20%), and a final exam (30%).
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Climate Action Now
Course Number 2045
Course Overview
Climate Action Now (CAN) aims to deepen students’ ability to create and implement high-impact climate solutions by focusing on key ventures, cities, and regions, along with the leadership skills and tactics that can accelerate climate action. The course will explore business models and stakeholder coalitions that can produce solutions quickly while building markets and constituencies for change -- the “demand” side of climate action.
CAN will feature cities/regions as critical for addressing climate change, especially in high-emission domains such as energy, transportation, buildings, and consumer household choices. Issues include developing and scaling innovations, cross-sector coalition-building, stakeholder engagement, and dealing with obstacles as ventures proceed. Solutions explored will include renewable energy, such as offshore wind farms; electric school buses and vehicle fleets; green buildings and districts, including a model sports arena and air conditioning innovations; and climate tech ecosystems to grow and deploy solutions faster.
Cases will feature key actors and constituencies across sectors (business leaders, climate tech entrepreneurs, government leaders, clean energy developers, community activists, climate action resisters) who must collaborate to identify promising solutions and promote their adoption as positive responses to climate risks and opportunities. The use of cross-sector multi-stakeholder coalitions will be explored in diverse places. Questions of climate justice – who is most vulnerable to climate change, who benefits from actions – will also be raised.
Class guests will include leaders from focal ventures and places, many of which are new and innovative. Throughout, class discussions will contribute to developing a leadership-for-climate-action toolkit. Students will finish CAN better able to build climate-related ventures or take on civic leadership to promote faster, more effective change.
Career Focus
-Entrepreneurship: starting, partnering, scaling, gaining support for climate-related ventures
-Consulting: environmental and sustainability analysis and solutions
-Policy leadership: sustainability management roles in the private and public sectors
-Civic activism and philanthropy
Educational Objectives:
-Enhanced knowledge of high-impact climate solutions and the change management skills involved in implementing them
-Ability to overcome systemic or social barriers to the development and deployment of innovative solutions
-Success factors in public-private partnerships and cross-sector coalitions
-Leadership skills for mobilizing support and accelerating effective action
Grades
Grades will be based on class participation (50%) and written work (50%) – 2 short reflection memos and 5-7 page final paper.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
The Coming of Managerial Capitalism
Course Number 1122
28 Sessions
Exam
Career Focus
For MBAs who want to study the past and present to help guide their thinking about the future.
Educational Objectives
To provide an understanding of the development of entrepreneurship, modern management, business, technology and finance; to examine other institutions that have affected these areas such as governments, unions, and intellectual property rights; and to analyze the evolution of changing attitudes toward American capitalism as defined by how business leaders and other stakeholders operate.
Course Content and Organization
This course offers students an opportunity to explore the historical development of the United States as the country became increasingly industrial, urban, and technologically and financially advanced. The course covers the founding of the new nation, early entrepreneurial venturing, changes in the strategy and structure of business, the winners and losers from capitalist expansion and the impact of technology and finance.
The course's perspective provides a broad understanding of the long-term impact of technological change, entrepreneurship, and market evolution on U.S. business, managers, the work force, and government. The history of capitalism in the United States offers students a comparative point of reference for considering capitalistic development more generally and its long-term impact on material prosperity.
Students will encounter several different units of analysis: much of the focus of the course is on the individual business leader and entrepreneur, but the worker, the company, the industry, and the country are also covered. The main idea behind the course is to understand historical events, determine why certain pathways were chosen, and to use history as a guide to the present and the future.
The course is divided into four main (largely chronological) modules with a concluding session on the American Dream which covers the arc of the course:
- The Creative and Destructive Sides of Early U.S. Capitalism (c. 1790-1870)
- Scale and the Emergence of Organization (c. 1870-1920)
- Prosperity, Depression and War (c. 1920-1945)
- Innovation, Finance and Regulation (c. 1950-2008)
- The American Dream (c. 1790 to the present)
Grading and Exam
Grading is based 50% on class participation and 50% on the exam. The exam is self-scheduled and will require a written response to an essay question (or questions) centered on the course.
Copyright © 2022 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Corporate Finance: Corporate Financial Operations (CFO)
Course Number 1416
28 Sessions
Exam
NOTE: Because there is considerable overlap between the fall course, Corporate Finance: Corporate Financial Operations (CFO) 1416, and the spring course, Strategies for Value Creation (SVC) 1417, students cannot take both of them.
Career Focus
This course provides a general management perspective on corporate finance and is designed to improve your ability to make strategic and operating decisions that create value. It should appeal to students who want to work as part of senior leadership teams, particularly finance executives; as strategy consultants or investment bankers who advise organizations; or as private equity, public equity, venture capital, or hedge fund investors. The course should also appeal to students who simply want to deepen their understanding of corporate finance and how finance concepts can be effectively applied within a wide range of organizations.
Educational Objectives
The goal of the course is to provide students with the knowledge, skills, and judgment required to make good strategic, operating, investment, and financing decisions. The course emphasizes the development of practical insights rather than formal theories. We will cover the shortcomings of the frameworks developed in RC Finance 1 and 2. We will discuss how the analytical tools developed in those courses relate to ideas in other courses and how they can be applied to address a broad set of business decisions. We will study the optimal design of processes that are key to an organization’s success, including strategic planning, forecasting, capital allocation, budgeting, risk management, and investor relations.
Course Content and Organization
As a consequence of differences in perspectives, finance leaders and other operators often fail to collaborate effectively. Finance teams focus on the value implications of core business decisions. However, many fail to recognize considerations that lie beyond financial ones. Furthermore, many do a poor job applying finance frameworks and reach incorrect conclusions. Other leaders often focus on different issues like delighting customers, developing talent, or innovating. These other leaders frequently have limits in their understanding of finance which prevent them from effectively engaging the finance function.
The finance divide between the finance team and other operators can generate a number of problems. For example, if finance teams are not sufficiently included in the strategic planning process, firms might embrace a strategy that is not tied to a reasonable set of assumptions and projections. More generally, raising and allocating capital effectively requires strong collaboration across many roles.
This course aims to prepare students to bridge the finance divide. It focuses on the core finance activities performed within organizations. These often are run by the CFO. This focus intends to expose you to what these activities are, to engage you in rich discussions about the key considerations behind fundamental choices, and to teach you financial decision-making frameworks and processes that firms often use. The key modules include:
- Measuring and Driving Performance
- Forecasting
- Managing Cash and Source of Funding
- Managing Risk
- Managing Investment, Divestitures, and Portfolios of Businesses
Nearly all class sessions will be case based. We will have numerous guests over the course of the semester, most of whom are HBS graduates. In addition to hearing from several case protagonists, we will be joined by subject matter experts on topics we will discuss. Many of the guests will have held the CFO role at some point in their career. In the past, guests have included Amrita Ahuja, COO and CFO of Block; Adam Aron, CEO of AMC; Amy Hood, CFO of Microsoft; Jonathan Mariner, former CFO of Major League Baseball; Peter Baldwin, CEO of birddogs; and numerous other senior executives. We will use part of our time with these guests to discuss their career paths and explore career options.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Corporate Governance and Boards of Directors
Course Number 2010
28 Sessions
Exam
Who should take the course?
This course should be of interest to most, if not all, students. Many of you will be entrepreneurs building and working with a board of directors as you create and grow your company. Others will join private equity or venture capital firms where you will serve on the boards of the firm’s portfolio companies. Still others will be consultants or advisors to boards, or investment professionals needing to assess the governance of companies you invest in. Over the longer term, many of you will serve as a CEO or other senior executive working with your company’s board. And, of course, many of you will serve on one or more boards during your careers, either as an investor, executive, or independent director. The goal of the course is to prepare you for these roles, as well as to be an informed shareholder.
What will you learn?
For many students, boards of directors are a “black box.” Little is known about their critical role and functions, let alone their internal workings. This course seeks to dispel the mystery. Through cases that put you in the shoes of executives, directors, shareholders, and other players in the corporate governance ecosystem, you will learn about
- the work that boards do and the critical decisions they make;
- how boards select company leaders, shape strategy, and oversee performance;
- the complex dynamics among boards, executives, and shareholders;
- the changing rights and powers of shareholders;
- different theories of corporate governance and their practical implications;
- the legal, financial, managerial, and behavioral issues that directors must contend with;
- the classic dilemmas that boards confront;
- the costs and rewards of board service and the challenges faced by individual directors.
We will examine these issues in the context of both private and publicly-traded companies, and at different stages of a company’s development—from startup to mature listed company. Our cases include private equity, venture-backed, and family-controlled companies, as well as companies with a large diversified shareholder base. Roughly two-thirds of the sessions concern the boards of US-based companies; the others are about companies based in other parts of the world, including Europe, the UK, the Middle East, South Africa, and Latin America.
Throughout the course, we will explore differing conceptions of “good governance” and what they mean in practice. We will consider, for instance, departures from the long-standing norm of “one-share, one-vote” as seen in many recent IPOs. We will also examine contemporary debates about shareholder activism, board diversity, board leadership, executive compensation, environmental and social factors in governance, hostile takeovers, and director liability. We will consider the role of stakeholders other than shareholders in corporate governance and examine new governance structures such as the public benefit corporation or B-Corp and the hybrid structure adopted by OpenAI.
How is the course structured?
The course has five main modules: (1) the purpose of governance, including the role of shareholders, management, and the board; (2) building an effective board, including director selection and board dynamics; (3) the board’s role in ensuring effective leadership, including hiring, firing, and compensating the CEO; (4) the board’s role in strategy and major transactions such as mergers, acquisitions, or sale of the company; (5) the board’s role in overseeing areas such as financial reporting, compliance and culture, sustainability and ESG. The class sessions will involve case discussions, role-playing exercises, and other activities. We expect to have guests in a number of sessions.
What are the course requirements?
The basic learning for the course takes place through preparation and participation in class discussion. Thus class participation quality as well as frequency will count for 50% of the grade. A final exam will account for the other 50%.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Crafting Your Life: The First 10 Years Post MBA (LIFE)
Course Number 2077
Paper
Class meets weekly on Tuesdays as a section.
Class meets weekly on Wednesday nights to enable unique interactions with HBS alumni and other guests. Usually these sessions are from 5:30-7:30pm, but there will be two Wednesday sessions that will be longer – 5:30-8:30pm – to accommodate special opportunities. The exact dates will be announced before the semester begins.
Educational Objectives
Crafting Your Life: The First 10 Years Post MBA (LIFE) is fundamentally a course about you. It is about preparing and equipping you to better handle the choices, tradeoffs, and surprises that you will inevitably face after graduating from HBS. Throughout the course, you will define what a life well-lived means to you, and discover and implement tactics and practices to enable you to live consistently with what matters most to you. In addition, you will consider how to adapt along the way when life inevitably does not go according to plan.
A unique feature of the course is the emphasis on community – with your fellow students as well as alumni. You will have access to alumni and their lived experiences. There are a multitude of interactions with both alumni 10+ years out reflecting on their lives to date as well as the over 300 former students of the course (known as LIFERs) who continue to be involved and share their current experiences. Alumni and LIFERs interact with students as part of the class in more traditional ways as case protagonists, and panelists, but also as part of small group discussions and one-on-one conversations. These interactions are meant to help inform you about others’ experiences and what they learned from them – and in turn to help you think more deeply about what you want out of your life and how you want to best equip yourself for what lies ahead.
The course strives to help you think deeply and intentionally about the following questions:
- Defining Your Compass
- What are my values? Who am I at my best?
- How has my past shaped me? What assumptions do I have about my life – which do I want to keep and which do I want to revise?
- What does it mean to me to live a good life? What is important to me, and how will I prioritize my time and energy towards what matters most?
- Owning Your Actions
- How do I approach decisions and tradeoffs across different areas of my life?
- How do I use my time on a daily and weekly basis? How do I create and change habits that enable me to continue making progress towards the life that I want?
- How do I think about my choice of geography?
- How do I create structures for navigating life, with all of its twists and turns, with a life partner?
- How do I think about career/family choices? What does it mean to be part of a dual-career couple? Would I ever consider opting out of the work force?
- Equipping Yourself for What You Cannot Control
- How do I take care of myself, and especially take care of my mental health? How do I build my capacity for resilience?
- How do I develop relationships that will sustain me – both at work and in life?
- How do I think about making a “difference” in the world? In what ways can I craft my life and my job in ways that will enable me to achieve my goals?
With this in mind, LIFE is not your typical HBS class. When you sign up for LIFE, you sign up for:
- A Laboratory. We think of life as a laboratory, and crafting your life as an ongoing discovery process of experimenting, learning, and adapting over time. Similarly, the LIFE course is not and never will be a finished product. The first version of the course was developed in close partnership with EC students and we continue the process of co-creation with students every year—and expect you to play an active role in shaping the course for future generations. By getting comfortable with trying new and different ways of learning, providing feedback, and sharing ideas to improve the course, you will also practice a “test-and-learn” mindset and develop skills that you can apply in your own life laboratory.
- A Community for Life-Long Learning. When you join LIFE, you are joining a broader community of students and alumni invested in learning with and supporting each other in the pursuit of a life well-lived. Throughout the course, we will build shared language, skills, and norms about what it means to craft your life, thereby enabling you to engage with one another deeply on personal topics that might otherwise be undiscussed in an academic or professional setting. LIFERs (graduates of the course) will interact with you throughout the semester, and in the final class they will welcome you into the LIFER community.
- Intergenerational Learning. HBS has a tremendously broad and diverse alumni network with a wide array of professional and personal experiences. LIFE is a platform to unlock the potential of the alumni network by facilitating intergenerational learning. Throughout the course, you will engage with alumni in a variety of ways, including: one-on-one interviews, panel discussions on specific topics, and two unique events—a reception featuring small group conversations between students and alumni and a celebration at the end of the semester where LIFERs will welcome you into the LIFER community.
Two important notes to consider, before signing up for LIFE:
1. LIFE involves a lot of work. LIFE students should be deeply invested in learning about themselves, in supporting others, and in partnering with Professor Perlow and the LIFE Team to innovate on the course and the broader LIFE initiative. Former students have commented on the intense workload!
2. The alumni vignettes that you will read/hear in LIFE are meant to share with you diverse examples of HBS alums who have made different choices, in different areas of their lives, for many different reasons, and have drawn many different life lessons from those choices. When you read/hear these materials, and when we discuss them in class, the goal is for you to learn from their experiences and think about what their experiences teach you about you. We’re not interested in judging them or assessing whether they are living a life well lived. It’s your job to figure out what it means for you to live a life well lived by engaging with these materials and conversations.
Course Structure and Requirements
LIFE has two sections of 40 students each. This class size is designed to foster deep connections through class discussion, small group conversations, and pair-and-shares.
Time
LIFE has a unique class structure designed to create the best possible learning environment for each topic and experience. Each section meets separately on Tuesdays during a regular X schedule block, and both sections will come together on Wednesday nights from 5:30-7:30 pm except on two Wednesday nights it will meet from 5:30-8:30pm (dates will be announced before the semester begins) to enable special opportunities. These evening sessions are classes, and you are required to attend all of them.
Assignments During Semester
Weekly Readings. Each week you will read cases and/or vignettes about alumni as you do in a traditional HBS class. However, the intent of these cases/vignettes is to help you understand what the person being described did, and for you to reflect on your own reactions and what you would do – not to judge what they did.
Weekly Exercises. Most weeks you will have exercises that accompany the readings to learn more about you, whether it’s looking back at your past, or tracking how you spend your time, or playing a life simulation to uncover the choices and tradeoffs you are inclined to make. The exercises will include LIFE Reflection & Activity workbook exercises and other online exercises.
Module Reflections. At the end of each of the three modules of the course you are asked to stop and reflect on what you have been learning about yourself. These reflections are required to be done on time, but are not graded, and rather are built in for you to pause and explore your insights. They will form the basis of your final paper so the more you invest during the semester the easier your task come the end of the term.
Interviews. Throughout the semester you are required to conduct 4 interviews. The first interview is with a former Crafting your Life student (LIFER) and the remaining 3 are with alumni five or more years out of HBS. You can choose your own alumni or use the LIFE Connect tool developed for this course to match you with alumni that are prepared to talk about the topics you are hoping to discuss. The LIFE Interview Guide and Notebook is where you will capture your preparation and interview notes before formally writing up your learnings as part of the final paper. You will submit your LIFE Interview Guide and Notebook as part of the final course submissions.
Final Paper
Your final paper is an opportunity to compile all that you have done throughout the semester. Essentially, you will be “writing” your final paper throughout the semester through the weekly exercises, module reflections, and alumni interview summaries. The purpose of the paper is to meaningfully reflect on all that you’ve learned about yourself, and to create something to which you can refer back throughout your life. The final paper integrates what you have learned, and you will also involve the creations of an artifact as a tangible companion piece to the paper to remind you in your daily life of what you have learned about yourself and wish to stay true to going forward.
Design Partners
LIFE is unique in that it is an EC course created by EC students, for EC students. The course originated in 2019 through a partnership between EC students and HBS alumni and continues to evolve (in both form and content) in collaboration with our students – who we consider to be our design partners. If you sign up for LIFE, you are not just electing to take a course—you are choosing to pick up the baton from those students who came before you, and continue the course development process with all the attendant joys of leaving a legacy that will be part of HBS students’ experience for years to come. Note, however, that this also requires the full awareness that some aspects of LIFE are in the process of being designed, in partnership with you. Your ongoing feedback and help will be part of the experience, and part of the learning that you (and we) take away from the course.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Creating Brand Value
Course Number 1925
14 Sessions
Exam
14 Sessions
Exam
Career Focus:
This course is designed for students who plan to create, unlock, or invest in value created through brands in the consumer and retail space. It is appropriate for:
- Marketing professionals charged with creating, nurturing, and managing brand value;
- Entrepreneurs looking to create their own brands in the consumer/retail space;
- Consumer/retail general managers and consultants engaged in stewarding brand strategy; and
- Venture capital or private equity investors seeking to identify brand asset potential.
Educational Objectives:
In the consumer/retail space, brands are often companies’ most valuable assets and sources of their sustainable competitive advantage. But, managing brands to achieve their full value potential has never been more difficult. Consumers are increasingly diverse, skeptical of marketing, and empowered by digital technologies that easily connect them to others who share their tastes. They co-create the meaning of the brands that shape their lives and play a participatory role in brand management that can make them allies or adversaries. The contemporary brandscape is crowded with new competitors vying to stake claims to rich, meaning-laden value propositions that reflect and leverage the zeitgeist. Iconic brands are toppled everyday by young upstarts telling new types of stories in authentic ways. Firms are aggressively buying consumers’ brand loyalty at the same time they are firing their customers. Customer relationship management (CRM) investments have failed to deliver on their promise and are often hurting rather than helping the development of strong consumer-brand relationships. Brand managers are losing control as consumers hijack brand meaning and engage in open-source branding. And, the next brand crisis is just around the corner in a 24/7 news cycle driven by social media.
This course takes a contemporary view of branding as a collective and collaborative meaning-making process among firms, consumers, and other cultural producers, and of brands as meaning-based, relational assets that must be carefully designed, curated, and negotiated to unlock their considerable value. As branding becomes more participatory, experiential, social, and experimental, the role of the brand manager requires cultural and relational prowess. Today’s managers must be able to author resonant stories that spark conversations that capture attention, generate engagement, and provide culturally-relevant meaning to consumers. Learnings will focus on how brands and the stories that define them can be crafted, communicated, and managed in ways that nurture relationships that create value for both consumers and firms.
Course Content and Organization:
The course is organized into four modules:
Module 1: The Value of Brands
Key questions will include:
- What, exactly, is a brand? What “jobs” do brands do for consumers?
- How do brands create value for consumers and for firms?
- How can brand be used as a competitive advantage?
- What is competitive brand positioning and how can firms big and small use it to their advantage?
- How relevant are brands in today’s marketplace and what are the forces that are making brands more or less relevant to consumers?
- Is AI-based automation diluting brand value?
Module 2: Brand Storytelling
Key questions will include:
- What is consumer-based brand equity (CBBE) and how is it built and maintained? How may it be measured?
- How can brand managers use consumer research to inform their brand strategy?
- How is brand meaning created and who are the multiple authors that narrate it? How can brand managers best manage brand meaning co-creation alongside consumers?
- What makes a good brand story?
- How can managers use cultural branding techniques to craft culturally resonant brand narratives?
Module 3: Brand Management
Key questions will include:
- How should brands be best managed over time for continued growth?
- How flexible are brands and how can this flexibility be leveraged for growth?
- What is the optimal way to manage investments behind brands for the short- and long-term?
- What are the opportunities and challenges associated with geographic, target market, product line, and brand extensions?
- How can brand portfolio strategy and brand architecture increase the value of a firm’s brands?
- What's the best way for brands to go global? How are global brands best managed?
- Under which conditions should a firm pursue a global branding strategy versus a portfolio of local brands?
- How can AI be leveraged to bring out the ‘art’ and ‘science’ in brand management?
Module 4: The Social Value of Brands
Key questions will include:
- What roles do brands play as relational partners? How do different relational roles contribute to differential costs and benefits to firms?
- How does a consumer-brand relationship form and evolve over time? Why do some relationships decline and dissolve while others intensify and endure?
- What is brand loyalty and how does it manifest itself? How is it best nurtured and negotiated?
- What is customer relationship management (CRM) and how do brands and their consumers enact their relationships?
- Who is responsible for an unprofitable relationship? Should firms “fire” their customers? Under which conditions?
- Why do consumers join brand communities? What types of value do they provide?
- How can brand communities be crowdsourced to help build brands?
- How are brand communities valuable to and dangerous for brands? How are they best managed?
- What is the role of influencer marketing in building brands?
- What happens when consumers hijack brand meaning? How can brand managers work with online and offline influencers and brand communities to create rather than destroy value?
- How do brand experiences deliver brand myths and bring customers closer to each other and to the brand?
- How can AI influence customer-brand relationships?
Grading:
Grades will be earned through the following activities:
- 50% Class Participation and in-class Exercises
- 50% Final Exam
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Creating Value Through Corporate Restructuring
Course Number 1420
28 Sessions
Exam
Career Focus
This course provides students with skills and knowledge that will prepare them for a variety of careers including all types of investing (particularly in companies with debt), special situations investing, financial advisory, and general management.
Educational Objectives
Corporate restructuring is a common and significant event affecting not only lenders, shareholders, and employees but also the web of relationships between companies and their corporate customers, suppliers, and competitors. Restructuring is the process by which companies renegotiate the financial contracts and commitments they have entered into with their creditors and other stakeholders, usually in response to some financial challenge or crisis. This process of renegotiation and re-contracting - the “re-slicing of the corporate pie” - is the central focus of the course.
An additional objective in dissecting the complex finances and operating challenges that confront companies in financial distress is to deepen student understanding of corporate debt financing, including the rights of secured creditors, subordination agreements, and debt covenants. By understanding how to fix a “sick” capital structure, students will better understand how to optimally finance a business, and more effectively manage financial risk, when times are good.
Lastly, there are important lessons to be learned through studying companies and industries that have struggled. Through understanding a variety of reasons why “things go wrong”, students will be better able to identify the patterns of behavior that often lead to trouble.
Content and Organization
The course is organized around two modules. The first module focuses on the restructuring of debt – and provides a foundation to understand the fundamentals of corporate restructuring and then applies these tools to explore the many offensive and defensive strategies employed by debtors, creditors, and other constituents. The second module focuses on the restructuring of other sections of the balance sheet such as mass tort claims or employees’ claims.
The cases that students study in this course tend to focus on large companies, with complex capital structures, facing extremely challenging business situations (including threats to their survival). Restructurings are often extremely complicated, and involve multiple issues around valuation, bond indentures, subordination agreements, bankruptcy law, employment law, taxes, litigation, regulation, etc. In analyzing the cases in the course, emphasis will be placed on drilling down into the details and "fine print" of these and other issues.
Topics covered in this finance course include Chapter 11 bankruptcy, out-of-court workouts, distressed exchange offers, "Section 363" asset sales, prepackaged bankruptcy, debtor-in-possession (DIP) financing, mass tort clais, restructuring of retiree health care/pension plans, and corporate layoff/downsizing programs. While the course focuses on U.S. corporates, it also applies the core principles of U.S. restructuring to corporate restructurings in other countries as well as infrastructure, municipal, and sovereign restructuring.
Although CVCR is primarily a finance course, students will also often have to take an interdisciplinary approach to problem solving, drawing on their training in strategy, accounting, law, and negotiation. The primary pedagogical approach is case discussion. Cases will be supplemented with mini-lectures and outside readings. We will also be joined by a number of visitors who were involved in the cases.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Creating Value in Business and Government (HKS-HBS Joint Degree Seminar)
Course Number 5230
10
Paper
Educational Objectives
This seminar will bring together students in Year 3 of the Harvard Business School / Harvard Kennedy School of Government joint degree program. Meetings will be held on ten Mondays in fall term, from 4:30-7:30 PM
This 3.0-credit course is open only to students in the HBS/HKS Joint Degree Program, and is a required course for all joint degree students in the fall semester of their third year. Its purpose is to integrate the perspectives and analytic tools provided by the HKS core curricula in the MPP or MPA/ID programs with the perspectives and analytic tools provided by the required HBS curriculum in the MBA program.
The course features a series of integrative modules on specific topics. In each of the modules, pairs of faculty members, one from HBS and one from HKS, teach as a team, bringing their distinctive perspectives and analytical approaches to bear on a specific subject area. These subject areas may be defined by: policy realms (for example, finance, tax, health, education, environment, or national defense); methods (for example, decision making under uncertainty, project evaluation, performance measurement, or negotiation); or other topics (for example, international trade, technological innovation, economic development, infrastructure, insurance, management styles and processes, or risk management).
Students will emerge from this course with an understanding of questions such as: how a regulation is developed and promulgated, and how business can seek to influence the outcome; how legislative battles are fought and how business organizes to shape provisions in legislation; and how business and government can work together to shape an international environment that is conducive to economic growth. The aim of the course is to cultivate in students the capacity to view problems comprehensively from multiple perspectives: how various business interests view an issue, and how government officials in a variety of agencies and institutions view the same problem.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Creating the Modern Financial System
Course Number 1160
27 Sessions (with some reserved for paper preparation), 2-hour class sessions
Paper/Project
Creating the Modern Financial System offers a vital perspective on finance and the financial system by exploring the historical development of key financial instruments and institutions worldwide. The premise of the course is that students will gain a richer and more intuitive understanding of modern financial markets and organizations by examining where these institutions came from and how they evolved. The course is ideal for students who want to deepen their understanding of real-world finance.
Course Organization and Objectives
The course content covers pivotal financial developments in a diverse set of countries – but with a special focus on the United States – from the 18th century to the present. Reaching across the chronological arc of the course are three broad topics: (1) financial markets and instruments, (2) financial intermediaries, and (3) financial behavior. Although nearly every case touches on all three topics, each case also has a primary focus. Whereas some cases highlight the introduction of new financial markets (such as the Dojima futures market in early modern Japan) or the creation of new instruments (such as mortgage-backed securities), others trace the emergence and maturation of critical financial institutions (including banks and insurance companies). Still others focus on the behavior of financial actors and groups, particularly in the context of financial bubbles and crashes. Because the course highlights the origins of financial markets and instruments as well as the fallout from numerous financial crises, government also looms large as an actor in many of the cases.
Throughout the course, the goal is to provide students with the broadest possible grounding in real-world finance by exposing them to some of the greatest (and, at times, most devastating) moments in modern financial history. Although the past is unlikely to repeat itself exactly, business managers who have a strong background in financial history are likely to be better prepared for the full diversity of financial innovations, shocks, and crises that they'll face in the future.
(For more details, please see Sample Entries from CMFS Syllabus, login required)
Course Administration
Course grades will be based on class participation (50%) and a final paper (50%).
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Crucibles of Crisis Leadership
Course Number 1527
13 sessions
Paper
Overview:
This course focuses on crisis leadership and how leaders, their teams, and organizations rise to the challenges of unexpected, high-stakes situations. More specifically, it examines how the exigencies of intense turbulence act as crucibles in which ordinary people (and their teams) make themselves capable of doing extraordinary things—first, internally, and then, in terms of what they achieve as they pursue larger, external objectives.
The class concentrates on different leaders and situations. Some of these people and contexts are from the past; others are much more recent. In each instance, the relevant people are enveloped by a profound crisis that they did not see coming and which was not of their making. But once each of these actors was in the middle of calamity, he or she recognized they could not falter and then fail to recover; they couldn’t give up (although each came close.) Instead, these men and women resolutely navigated through the storm and were transformed. Each became more resilient, stronger, braver, and more self-assured in the high waves and strong winds they confronted.
Understanding precisely how these people did this is the overarching objective of the course. We will pay particular attention to the larger “rules of the road” of crisis management and leadership. We will also concentrate on the more specific insights, tools, and behaviors that these leaders developed—often, on the fly—and then used to steer through the crisis and to accomplish their ambitious goals. In each instance, we will assess which of these resources are useful to leaders in today’s world of non-stop crises.
By the last session, each of us will have assembled a toolbox of concrete insights, actions, and personal behaviors to help us be consistently more focused, resilient, confident, and courageous in our anxious, uncertain time.
3 Traits of Effective Leadership
3 Times it is Best to do Nothing
Career Focus:
The course will be of particular interest to those who aspire to lead others toward a worthy, significant mission—either in an established organization or in an entrepreneurial endeavor. It is particularly well-suited to those interested in the non-stop crises of the present moment and what this broader context means for leading courageously.
Educational Objectives:
This course has three principal educational objectives.
First, to understand the principles of crisis leadership. We will concentrate on the general components of steering an organization through unexpected disaster, paying close attention to how these aspects of leadership differ from those relied on in more stable environments. We will examine the “rules of the road” or “dashboard” of crisis leadership with reference to several widespread emergencies, including the Covid pandemic, evaluating the successes and failures of different teams as they tried to navigate the large storms they faced.
The second objective is to understand how crises always contain the possibility of substantial innovation. Some of this innovation occurs at an organizational level as the time pressures and high-stakes nature of crisis situations (literally) force creativity in staffing, problem-solving, teamwork, collective purpose, and other features of performance. Some of the innovation unfolds at a deeper level as individuals realize—internally—they must raise the level of their respective games and begin leading themselves with new resilience, commitment, humanity, clarity, and courage. We will examine this process and its results in several leaders, distilling the relevant lessons for our respective paths forward.
Third, to analyze the insights, tools, and behaviors that the men and women we are studying developed in crisis situations. Many of these resources were created “on the fly,” in the crucible of a crisis, but most of these tools transcended the disaster in which they originated and became key elements of these individuals’ leadership playbooks. What were these tools and what function did they serve that proved so longstanding and significant? As we shall see, these resources were forged from the “inside out” in each of these people; consequently, they played important roles in fortifying each leader’s self-belief, wiping away anxiety, clarifying purpose, and stoking their bravery. We will pay focused attention to which of these insights, tools, and behaviors are useful to our leadership going forward.
Grading / Course Administration:
Grading is based on class participation (50%) and the final paper (50%).
Data Science for Managers 2
Course Number 2125
14 Sessions (split between hands-on lab sessions and case discussion sessions)
Final Team Project
13 Sessions (split between hands-on lab sessions and case discussion sessions)
Final Team Project
Career Focus
DSM2 is designed for students who already have some exposure to basic data science. DSM2 allows students to build a deeper understanding of how data and analytics can complement judgment for managerial decision making. The course builds on concepts learned in DSM and is specifically suited for students who want to continue their career at companies such as technology companies, where data collection, aggregation, and analysis permeates the entire organization.
In the course, students will learn to “data wrangle” (collect and clean data that suit their purposes) and expand their machine learning repertoire to include gradient boosting, neural networks, unsupervised algorithms and natural language processing. As in DSM1/IDS, students will be guided through data analysis with “starter code.” In addition to the computing software R, students will gain familiarity with SQL to manage relational databases.
Educational Objectives
DSM2 builds on the foundations developed in DSM1 to provide students with an understanding of how to create, design, and manage data science projects from inception through data collections, analysis, and reporting. Students will be introduced to new tools (such as SQL) and new techniques (such as K-Means clustering, natural language processing, and Monte Carlo simulation). The course will also explore essential notions of data privacy, algorithmic fairness, and agile project management to prepare students to manage and lead data science projects at any organization level.
Content and Organization
The DSM2 course comprises four modules:
Module 1: Data Wrangling: Students will learn SQL (Structured Query Language), commonly used to store, manipulate and retrieve data from a relational data base.
Module 2: Inference: This module’s topics include probability distributions, Monte Carlo simulation, Clustering, K-Means, and variable transformations and interaction terms in linear and logistic regression.
Module 3: Machine Learning & Artificial Intelligence: This module will examine several concepts key to machine learning: e.g.,
autocorrelation, time series, Lasso and Ridge regressions, confusion and payoff matrices, ROC curves, neural networks, gradient boosting and algorithmic bias, as well as NLP (Natural Language Processing), including sentiment analysis, naïve Bayes classification, and LDA (Latent Dirichlet allocation)
Module 4: Data Science Strategy & Agile Development: This module will focus on essential strategy questions around data privacy, algorithmic fairness, and agile product development.
The course consists of two types of class sessions: Laboratory sessions in which students practice analyzing assigned problems and class sessions with case discussions. Teaching fellows will be available at each lab session to answer questions and provide both technical and conceptual support. Teaching fellows will also hold office hours and review sessions outside of class.
Course Pedagogy
The classroom sessions will utilize a problem-solving strategy that gives students a clear outline for solving any data science business problem. Emphasis will be put on communication, rigor in analysis, ethical reporting of results and dealing with messy issues such as missing data, nonresponse of participants and study design. Throughout the course, reproducibility of results will be emphasized.
Grading
The course grade will be based on class participation (including posting one lab notebook), a written assignment, and a final team project.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Data Visualization for Analysis and Communication
Course Number 2135
Overview:
A hands-on introduction to data visualization. The course is structured around a series of projects in which students will practice skills learned in class. The classroom format will include lectures, discussion, tutorials on visualization tools, and full-class project critiques.
Career Focus:
This course is designed for students who expect to analyze or present data during their career—and these days, data is everywhere, from finance to management consulting. For anyone working with complex information, visualization is a power tool that can drive insight and understanding. It can also be a compelling ingredient in clear and persuasive communication.
The course will also be useful for students who are planning on managing or advising teams that work with data. We will discuss how to critically evaluate visualizations, and how to use them as a bridge between quantitative analysis and decision-making.
Because the course will require significant hands-on work with data, students should have taken DSM (or have equivalent expertise).
Educational Objectives:
Students will learn to use data visualization as a tool to gain actionable insights from data, and then communicate those insights to others. The format will be a departure from the standard case study method. Instead, we’ll focus on projects that require building visualizations as well as extended in-class critiques.
Objectives include:
- An understanding of the basic theory behind data visualization: perceptual science, design, and technical underpinnings, as well as how to match different techniques to different data sets.
- The ability to create visualizations using such tools as spreadsheets, Tableau, and AI-based systems
- Knowledge of how to apply visualization techniques for both exploratory data analysis and communication of data
- Ability to critique visualizations made by others, and understand common pitfalls that can lead to ineffective or even deceptive visualizations
- Analysis of complex visualizations, and what insights they can provide
- How to use psychological science to enhance visualization efficacy
- Intro to visualization tools
- Themes: analysis vs. communication
- Graphic design principles
- Telling a story with visualization
- Visualization tools: annotation and illustration
- Project: create a visualization presentation that sends a message
- Boston CityScore case
- Dashboard design
- Visualization tools: testing hypotheses
- Project: create a dashboard using Boston city data
- Finding hidden and unexpected aspects of a data set
- Uncovering errors, and how to clean data
- Visualization tools: interactivity
- Project: Explore data from a domain where you have expertise, then present a surprising result to your classmates
- 65% project work
- 35% class participation
Course Content and Organization:
Course organization and exact number of projects may vary, and we aim to have at least one expert outside speaker. However, here is the basic structure of the course.
Visualization fundamentals
Communication
Analysis and Control
Exploration with Visualization
Grading / Course Administration:
Weekly homework will involve building and critiquing data visualizations. In some cases students will be expected to find, clean, or prepare their own data sets. There will be a two-week final project.
Grading is based on:
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Data for Impact: Impact Measurement from Startup to Fortune 500 C-Suite
Course Number 1641
Paper
Educational Objectives
Businesses leaders in companies of all sizes are increasingly facing demands to look beyond their bottom line, to meet a broader set of responsibilities to society and our planet. This is evidenced by the strength of ESG and impact investing industries but also by the proliferation of roles dedicated to impact measurement and management at some of the world's largest companies. Fortune 500 companies like McDonald's, IBM, and Salesforce have invited impact into the C-suite through Chief Impact Officer roles. Similarly, companies such as Deloitte, PwC, Hasbro, and Cisco among many others have a Chief Purpose Officer. The fervor behind these movements has the potential to change the world.
But to deliver on these new, multifaceted obligations, managers and investors must be sophisticated in how impact is measured. Impact measurement is critical for assessing which initiatives to leave by the wayside, for improving those that are working well, and for reporting impact to key stakeholders.
What are the most effective tools and frameworks for measuring impact? How does the answer to these questions differ for investors and managers, and for companies at different growth stages? Can impact be reduced to a dollar figure? How can managers utilize impact measurement to massively amplify their impact? These are some of the questions we will tackle in this course.
Data for Impact (DFI) is intended to train students to become informed and discriminating consumers of evidence, so as to enable the more effective management of impact. DFI aims to develop data literacy even amongst managers who never plan to implement statistical analyses themselves. This course requires an openness to – but no prior background in – statistical analysis and quantitative thinking.
Throughout the course, students will engage with evidence from a wide range of impact studies applied to companies of all sizes. The emphasis will be on the managerial issues related to designing impact studies that are cost effective, credible, and persuasive to various stakeholders, as well as critically interpreting the evidence that these studies produce, and drawing implications for how companies should adapt to amplify their impact and (often) their profitability.
DFI will be of core interest to students with aspirations to manage for impact in businesses and nonprofits of all sizes as well as students with an interest in impact investing. While class discussions will center on social and environmental impact, the methods utilized in class extend to any question of causal inference, including questions about whether a particular endeavor increases a firm’s profits, raises customer engagement, etc. It will therefore also be of interest to any manager that aspires to commission and evaluate data analysis as a part of their workflow.
Course Deliverables
Grades will be based on in-class participation, several at-home statistical exercises, and a final paper (completed in groups of up to 3), in which students will assess the impact of an existing or aspirational enterprise.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Deal Making in Real Estate
Course Number 1480
Career Focus
Real estate is a multidisciplinary industry that requires strong analytical rigor as wells as broad strategic thinking. Taught by two active real estate practitioners at industry leading firms and utilizing prominent protagonists and guest speakers, this course will provide students with the fundamental skills in real estate investment, operations and value creation to pursue a career in real estate investing, development or operations.
Educational Objectives
Students will learn about a broad spectrum of opportunities to create value through real estate ranging from real estate investment and development to strategies to add value by optimizing corporate real estate and operations. The course will provide exposure to real estate fundamentals including how to build relationships, how to negotiate and win a deal, and considerations when structuring financing options. It will explore underwriting, deal structure and considerations including taxation, legal and regulatory matters, technology, facilities management, design and construction, and leasing. The class can be taken without prerequisites but is designed to complement and build on the current real estate course offerings (Real Property, Real Estate Investing, Real Estate Private Equity) while examining additional opportunities to create value through real estate investment and operations.
Course Structure
The course is taught using the case method, with traditional and multimedia cases along with frequent protagonists and occasional supplementary readings.
Pedagogical Mix
Real estate lends itself to case method teaching as virtually every subject requires quantitative and qualitative analysis, judgment calls, quick thinking and development of practical action plans. "Cold calling" and active participation are frequent and important components of class. We expect that students will be prepared as most classes will have the case protagonists or other industry leaders present.
Most homework assignments are required to be completed in groups. Additionally, polls will be used frequently and are considered an important aspect of class participation. The course will have a final exam.
Christopher Graham
Senior Managing Director and Head of Global Investment Strategy
Starwood Capital Group
Christopher Graham is a Senior Managing Director and Head of Global Investment Strategy at Starwood Capital Group, where he focuses on our various investment strategies globally, and advises and mentors our investment teams around the world. He is also a member of the Firm’s Executive, Investment and Disposition Committees.
Prior to joining Starwood Capital in 2002, Chris worked at CB Richard Ellis in Washington, D.C., where he was Director of the financial consulting group for the Eastern Region of the U.S.. Chris was previously Associate Director, Eastern Region, of CB Richard Ellis’ investment properties group. Chris received a BBA degree in finance from James Madison University and an MBA from Harvard Business School.
Daniel M. Gilbane
President and Managing Director
Gilbane, Inc.
Dan Gilbane is a 5th generation family leader of Gilbane, Inc. one of the largest privately held construction and real estate development firms in the industry with a global footprint of 46 office locations around the world and three thousand employees generating over $6.5 billion in annual revenue. As President and Managing Director, Dan leads key strategic areas within Gilbane including profit and loss oversight of Gilbane’s Next 150 subsidiary providing site services, equipment and self-perform workforce and GRS Disaster Response, an emergency recovery business. He also leads the company’s internal Supply Chain team, market sector Centers of Excellence and Gilbane’s acquisitions team.
Previously Dan served as the Division Leader for Gilbane Southwest with responsibility for construction operations with revenues in excess of $1.2 billion across the southwestern U.S. and Mexico. Prior to joining Gilbane Dan worked for Donaldson, Lufkin & Jenrette, ING Barings Furman Selz, ABN Amro, and Morgan Stanley Real Estate Fund. Dan received a BBA degree in international relations finance from Brown University and an MBA from Harvard Business School.
Deals
Course Number 2267
Weekly 120 minute seminar (across two time slots)
Paper
Enrollment: Limited to 42 HBS and 42 HLS students
Overview:
This advanced negotiation course examines complex corporate deals. Many of the class sessions will be structured around actual corporate deals, selected for the complex issues of law and business that they raise. Students will research and analyze these transactions in order to present their most important aspects and lessons to the class. The goal is to help students develop their transactional instincts, better prepare them to anticipate deal challenges, and equip them with the skills to creatively address those challenges through contract and deal design.
Career Focus:
This course is restricted to JD and MBA students and is geared towards preparing those students to face complex deals of many different natures. In the spring, there are often guest practitioners that join the course, and they hail from both legal and business backgrounds to offer their expertise. The class will be comprised of approximately an equal number of students from HBS and HLS. For HLS students, the basic course in Corporations, Corporations taken concurrently, or permission of the instructor is a prerequisite. A familiarity with basic business concepts will be assumed throughout the course. For HBS students, in addition to the first-year curriculum, a basic Negotiations course is recommended though not required.
Educational Objectives:
Topics developed throughout the course include: how negotiators create and claim value through the setup, design, and tactical implementation of agreements; complexities that can arise through agency, asymmetric information, moral hazard, and adverse selection; structural, psychological, and interpersonal barriers that can hinder agreement; and the particular challenges inherent in the roles of advisors as negotiators. The course will also explore the differences between deal-making and dispute resolution; single-issue and multiple-issue negotiations; and between two parties and multiple parties.
Course Content and Organization:
In previous iterations, this course has been split into four modules. Module 1 introduces the different perspectives that law and business training bring to transactions. Module 2 provides certain building blocks for transactional practice, through a series of focused caselets. Module 3 examines the particular tactical aspects of deal execution and deal drafting. This module will feature two complex negotiation exercises, each focusing on different aspects of dealmaking. Module 4 examines complex corporate deals, focusing in particular on multi-party deals and the lawyer/business interface.
Grading / Course Administration:
Evaluation will be on the basis of class participation and a final paper or project.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Deals Q2
Course Number 2265
14 Sessions (120 minutes, across two time slots)
Paper
Enrollment: Limited to 42 HBS and 42 HLS students
This advanced negotiation course examines complex corporate deals. Many of the class sessions will be structured around actual corporate deals, selected for the complex issues of law and business that they raise. Students will research and analyze these transactions in order to present their most important aspects and lessons to the class. The goal is to help students develop their transactional instincts, better prepare them to anticipate deal challenges, and equip them with the skills to creatively address those challenges through contract and deal design.
Topics developed throughout the course include: how negotiators create and claim value through the setup, design, and tactical implementation of agreements; complexities that can arise through agency, asymmetric information, moral hazard, and adverse selection; structural, psychological, and interpersonal barriers that can hinder agreement; and the particular challenges inherent in the roles of advisors as negotiators. The course will also explore the differences between deal-making and dispute resolution; single-issue and multiple-issue negotiations; and between two parties and multiple parties.
The class will be comprised of approximately an equal number of students from HBS and HLS. For HLS students, the basic course in Corporations, Corporations taken concurrently, or permission of the instructor is a prerequisite. A familiarity with basic business concepts will be assumed throughout the course. For HBS students, in addition to the first-year curriculum, a basic Negotiations course is recommended though not required.
Evaluation will be on the basis of class participation and a final paper or project.
Students in this course may also be interested in Mark Gordon and Meng Lu’s Mergers and Acquisitions Workshop: Boardroom Strategies and Deal Tactics at Harvard Law School. Prof. Subramanian encourages students to register for both courses. The classes complement each other substantively and the timing works out in that the workshop takes place in the same time slot as Deals but during the first half of the semester, with no overlap.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Demystifying the Family Enterprise
Course Number 2158
28 Sessions
Exam or Final Project
Office: Morgan T93; Telephone: 617-495-2481; E-mail: cwing@hbs.edu
Assistant: Mads Tolsdorf, Morgan Hall 420D, Telephone: 617-495-0792, E-mail: mtolsdorf@hbs.edu
Career Focus
This course is designed for students who are pursuing a career in businesses that are family owned - i.e. the majority shareholders are family, investment roles in family offices, or students that might invest in or wholly purchase a family-owned business through a private equity firm, search fund model or a public company that through dual class stock is still family controlled. It is also useful for everyone going into general management and / or want to be responsible owner investors.
90% of the global GDP is created through family enterprises. Family enterprises are frequently thought to be exclusively mom-and-pop, small businesses. Most fail to realize that Walmart, Fidelity, Cargill, Koch Industries, and Ford, to name a few, are all family-owned or controlled businesses. Family businesses can be private or public, sometimes with a dual-class stock structure. They can also be 100 percent family-owned or have outside investors; value is certainly affected not only by management quality, but also by the level of Family control and ownership. Family businesses come in all shapes and sizes, and they are here to stay globally, gaining power and influence by the day. Family offices and family foundations are also family businesses and growing in numbers faster than most other businesses.
The course is also useful for students who are planning to work in companies that advise or support family-owned businesses. It may further be interesting for students seeking to advance their knowledge of general management, strategy, succession, and governance issues in the context of a challenging and sometimes emotionally driven work environment.
Educational Objectives
Learning how to work in or run a family business, create and run a family office, invest in a family business and work within any of these structures. Course focuses on interpersonal dynamics of employees - both family and non-family professionals.
All three Family organizations, the Family, the Operating Company, and the Family Office should have (1) their own set of goals, (2) their own governance structures, and (3) their own contribution to supporting a Family’s legacy. There is great value that can be created through Family businesses. In fact, wealth creation in Families is becoming a powerful disruptor in all of the global markets as Families professionalize and deploy capital across a variety of industries and sectors.
Modules explore:
- Module one focuses on the Family, the bedrock of the organizations that comprise the collective Family organization, specifically, the virtues that define the Family members’ rules of engagement and the Family governance structure necessary to support it.
- Module two deep dives into the Operating Company and the Corporate governance structure necessary to support the Family Organization. In Module two, we also study non-Family minority partners of Operating Companies and non-Family acquisitions of Operating Companies.
- Module three examines the Family Office and its role in managing not only the Family’s assets but also the wealth governance that accompanies it. In Module three, we examine different best practices of (a) when and how to set up a Family Office, (b) how to bring in professional management and (c) how to compensate these professionals.
- Module four brings it all together by exploring what it takes to build an enduring Family legacy by creating excellent stewards of Family wealth and its impact on Society. The stewards struggle through both external and internal factors to achieve Family unity through (1) the Three Virtues and Family governance, (2) control through corporate governance, and (3) competence through wealth governance, to propel a Forever Legacy.
Cases focus on established and emerging companies, products, and personalities in family businesses and family offices both domestically and internationally. We will have many case protagonists and other guests that have been successful and failed.
Family Businesses are not only meaningful but can also be emotional-exciting and scary at the same time. This course will journey through many successes and failures within this space and examine best practices to help mitigate common pitfalls.
Families vary significantly in how they structure themselves, but the common link among Families that succeed in building multiple generations of wealth creation is that they all have policies and procedures that serve as a roadmap. Taking the time to create these documents-mission statements, shareholder agreements, succession plans, inheritance policies, distribution rules, outlaw / in-law procedures, hopefully lead to a more educated and cohesive group of Family members.
Course Content and Organization
The course consists of 28 sessions (very global content and many case protagonist participate in person) and includes the option of a final project or exam. Grading is based on class participation (50%) and the final project / exam (50%).
Office Hours: The instructor welcomes the opportunity to meet with students outside of class. Please contact her assistant, Mads Tolsdorf (mtolsdorf@hbs.edu) to arrange a meeting.
Goal of course – Create a community, learn from each other and have fun.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Designing Technology Ventures
Course Number 5240
Course Description
Launching a successful startup requires a business model that defines the venture’s customer value proposition; plans for technology, operations, and marketing; and a formula for eventually earning profit. It also requires an organization that can execute that business model. Students will learn the attributes of effective tech venture business models and organizations—and how to design them. They will employ system dynamics modeling using simulation software to inform business model choices, and gain practice with organization design methods to diagnose misalignment and resolve tradeoffs (e.g. efficiency vs. effectiveness, decision speed vs. quality).
Enrollment is limited to second-year students in the MS/MBA: Engineering Sciences program.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Digital Marketing Workshop
Course Number 1995
Course Description
Digital marketing has transformed the 21st century and has upended the playbooks of every major corporation. This elective course will teach you how to unleash your digital marketing prowess over seven weeks of hands-on exercises and data analysis straight from the trenches. You will be taught by the best of the best experts from the leading performance marketing firms in North America, who collectively manage over $10B of media spend annually.
This is a half-course based on lectures and custom-built hands-on exercises for HBS students to help build foundational knowledge of the modern tools of digital marketing and analytics. The course was tailored for aspiring entrepreneurs and marketers curious about emerging methods and tactics to build effective brands in the modern age. Students will apply the learnings from each class with world-class experts while assembling their own toolsets and frameworks for executing best-in-class digital campaigns.
In addition, the course will offer optional experimental labs on cutting-edge topics for students interested in going deep in areas like generative AI via ChatGPT4 with SEO and paid media, 0 and 1st-party customer data and privacy considerations, and multivariate testing methods for pricing new products online.
Finally, students will have access to guest speakers and instructors in a private Slack environment for asynchronous learning opportunities to augment pre-read assignments and Q&A follow-up from class exercises for completing assignments.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Doing Business with China 2035: Navigating Uncertainty
Course Number 1575
7 Sessions
Paper
Note: EC MBA students who are interested in earning an additional 1.5 credits through a related Independent Project are encouraged to reach out to Prof. Kirby at term start.
By 2035 China will be the largest economy in the world and an innovation superpower. Engagement with China—as entrepreneurs, investors, or partners—is part of our collective future.
But in 2024, Chinese firms—and foreign firms in China—face challenges and opportunities under President Xi Jinping. We will delve into China's domestic business environment and the changing relationship between the private sector and the Chinese Communist Party. Students will gain an understanding of the dynamics between state-owned enterprises and private firms, the regulatory environment, and the role of the government in business activities.
Furthermore, as relations between the world's two largest economies, the U.S. and China, deteriorate further, companies must find creative solutions to counter ongoing global trade and technology wars while still responding to ever-changing policy directions in Beijing, Washington, and Europe. Our course will examine case studies of firms that have faced these challenges and will equip students with strategies for managing geopolitical risk in a deglobalizing business environment.
Ultimately, how can you succeed in doing business in and with China in the coming decade and beyond?
In our course, we consider these questions:
- How do foreign businesses succeed and fail in Chinese markets?
- How can Chinese firms, such as Huawei and ByteDance, navigate investment restrictions that threaten to "decouple" the U.S. economy from China's?
- What happens to firms caught in the cross-fire of deteriorating US-China relations?
- Will China's ambitions to become a "self-sufficient" superpower succeed or flounder? What about the United States’ attempt to “re-shore” semiconductor manufacturing?
- How do the Communist Party and Chinese governments—local, provincial, and national—shape market opportunities?
- How do Chinese firms expand overseas?
- How do family businesses survive and thrive in an economy where the state still plays such a large role?
- Will Chinese universities lead the 21st century?
- What are the opportunities and risks for businesses in Taiwan, as "greater China" becomes integrated economically but with greater tension politically?
- In short, where is China going—economically and politically—and what will it mean for you?
We will be joined in this course by CEOs of many of the enterprises we study, in industries such as telecommunications, healthcare, consumer products, agribusiness, semiconductors, education, and automobiles.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Energy
Course Number 1105
14 Sessions
Paper
This course is about one of the largest industries in the world: energy. Not only will we cover energy sectors that have traditionally supplied economies across the globe, but we will also cover the energy transition needed to reduce climate change and its impacts. It will examine the economic, regulatory, and social contexts that provide the dynamic backdrop for how both new entrants and incumbent firms can navigate and drive the energy transition. How does the energy economy work, and how fast can it change? How are entrepreneurial start-ups disrupting the energy economy? How are corporations across sectors navigating and potentially driving the energy transition—or not? How are new policies being enacted worldwide impacting billion-dollar decisions? And how are different local communities responding, given the benefits and costs of enormous changes in the energy mix?
Energy tackles all of these questions and more.
This class is for students with a wide variety of interests seeking a better understanding of the role of energy in business and society. It will examine the energy transition in a time of surging global energy demand and the era of climate change. The course aims to drive an understanding of energy from both the supply and demand sides. It will unlock smarter perspectives in other domains, such as finance, real estate, and technology, that all rely on energy. Students will learn about new technologies and choices impacting financing, development, and deployment. Students will appreciate the interplay between market, regulatory, and societal influences on firm opportunities and choices.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Entrepreneurial Finance
Course Number 1624
27 Sessions
Career Focus
Entrepreneurial Finance is primarily designed for students who plan to get involved with a new venture at some point in their career -- as a founder, early employee, advisor or investor. However, the course is also appropriate for students interested in gaining a broader view of the financing landscape for young firms, going beyond the basics of venture capital and angel financing to look at venture debt, bank finance, corporate venture capital and receivables financing.
Course Content and Educational Objectives
The goal of Entrepreneurial Finance is to help managers make better investment and financing decisions in entrepreneurial settings. The course covers all stages of the venture's life cycle from startup to exit, and delves into issues such as deal structures, incentives, business models and valuation in much greater detail than TEM. Approximately one-third of the cases concern technology-based businesses, though the emphasis is on gaining insights into entrepreneurial management, not technology per se. Typically, case protagonists have participated in over half the class discussions.
The first two modules of the course address key issues faced by entrepreneurs: how much money should be raised at each stage; when should it be raised; what is a reasonable valuation of the company; and how should funding, employment contracts and exit decisions be structured. They aim to prepare students for these decisions, both as entrepreneurs and as investors.
The next three modules look at a variety of financing models across the venture's life cycle, with an aim to understanding the incentives of each type of investor, the relative costs and benefits of each source of funding and the connections between a venture's financing strategy and its product-market strategy.
Inevitably, there will be some overlap with courses such as Launching Global Ventures, Financial Management of Smaller Firms and Venture Capital and Private Equity. We are aware of the content of each of those courses and will be sensitive to differentiation.
Entrepreneurial Finance (Q2)
Course Number 1625
14 Sessions
Exam
Career Focus
Entrepreneurial Finance is primarily designed for students who plan to get involved with a new venture at some point in their career -- as a founder, early employee, advisor or investor. However, the course is also appropriate for students interested in gaining a broader view of the financing landscape for young firms, going beyond the basics of venture capital and angel financing to look at venture debt, bank finance, corporate venture capital and receivables financing.
Course Content and Educational Objectives
The goal of Entrepreneurial Finance is to help managers make better investment and financing decisions in entrepreneurial settings. The course covers all stages of the venture's life cycle from startup to exit, and delves into issues such as deal structures, incentives, business models and valuation in much greater detail than TEM. Approximately one-third of the cases concern technology-based businesses, though the emphasis is on gaining insights into entrepreneurial management, not technology per se. Typically, case protagonists have participated in over half the class discussions.
The first two modules of the course address key issues faced by entrepreneurs: how much money should be raised at each stage; when should it be raised; what is a reasonable valuation of the company; and how should funding, employment contracts and exit decisions be structured. They aim to prepare students for these decisions, both as entrepreneurs and as investors.
The next three modules look at a variety of financing models across the venture's life cycle, with an aim to understanding the incentives of each type of investor, the relative costs and benefits of each source of funding and the connections between a venture's financing strategy and its product-market strategy.
Inevitably, there will be some overlap with courses such as Launching Global Ventures, Financial Management of Smaller Firms and Venture Capital and Private Equity. We are aware of the content of each of those courses and will be sensitive to differentiation.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Entrepreneurial Sales 101: Founder Selling
Course Number 1655
14 Sessions
Paper/Project
14 Sessions
Paper/Project
‘Nothing happens until a sale is made’
Nothing happens until a sale is made. That simple point underlines the critical importance of sales. Every operating model and business plan ‘assumes’ a certain amount of sales, but that assumption is the tipping point. Without sales, the entire model is an exercise in frustration and futility.
The purpose of this course is to demystify sales and help you understand how to sell products and services within entrepreneurial settings. The course material is applicable whether you become an entrepreneur, venture capitalist, management consultant, general manager, product manager, salesperson, or sales manager. The course is geared toward entrepreneurial settings, specifically execution required by the founder. However, the best practices are applicable to larger company requirements as well.
“The #1 skill HBS alums wish they had spent more time understanding at school was how to sell.”
-Dean Nohria
Entrepreneurs and general managers must not only understand the sales process but also embrace that the ability to sell is the single most critical success factor of any new enterprise. This course does not approach sales from the vaunted perspective of ‘strategy’. It gets right into the very practical and tactical ins and outs of how to sell as a founder. In a larger sense, the entrepreneur and general manager must “sell” his or her vision to prospective employees, to angel and venture investors, and to strategic partners. While all true and all necessary, this course focuses mainly on selling to customers, whether that is through a direct sales force, a channel sales force, or building an OEM relationship. Sales is the one function that cannot hide behind the veil of corporate doubletalk; sales goals are either made or not made. Every organizational activity leverages off that single fact. Markets are not totally rational organizations and the firms with the best sales teams will usually win.
“Superior sales and distribution by itself can create a monopoly, even with no product differentiation. The converse is not true. No matter how strong your product, even if it easily fits into already established habits and anybody who tries it likes it immediately, you must still support it with a strong distribution plan.”
-From “Zero to One” by Peter Thiel
One common misconception is that product innovation alone is a winning tactic. It is not. Often the critical success factor is exactly how a firm goes to market – with its sales force. But the rules have changed – innovations like ‘product-led-growth’ models and social media are changing the status quo and forcing managers to consider new way to structure and incent sales teams.
CLASS REQUIREMENTS
Preparation and class participation are a requirement. We will cold call students to open each class. Every class is associated with a short assignment, and all students are required to be ready to discuss the assigned material.
Sales is a highly experiential, hands on skill that requires role playing and iterative practice to master. As such, Founder Selling uses a more experiential pedagogy during the semester. Unlike most courses at HBS, there is no final exam or final project. Instead, we will run seven experiential assignments, largely executed outside of the classroom, in parallel with the classroom sessions. You will learn how to book appointments, run the first sales meeting, demonstrate your product and service, close large complex deals, and run renewal and expansion calls. In addition to the course faculty, students will be assigned to a sales coach who will review assignment submissions with the course faculty and be available for one-on-one coaching after each assignment.
Class sessions will be 80 minutes long and will be largely be executed in three parts: a cold call opening in which a student presents his/her course of action as outlined in the case, class discussion of the case, and a presentation by the professor to emphasize the key leanings from the case. More than one unexcused absence will affect your final grade.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Entrepreneurial Sales 102: Building, Managing, and Scaling the First Sales Team as a Founder, Investor, or Advisor
Course Number 1695
14 Sessions
Paper/Project
Entrepreneurial Sales 101 is a required prerequisite for this course.
‘Nothing happens until a sale is made’
Nothing happens until a sale is made. That simple point underlines the critical importance of sales. Every operating model and business plan ‘assumes’ a certain amount of sales, but that assumption is the tipping point. Without sales, the entire model is an exercise in frustration and futility.
The purpose of this course is to demystify sales and help you understand how to manage go-to-market functions within entrepreneurial settings. The course material is applicable whether you become an entrepreneur, venture capitalist, management consultant, general manager, product manager, salesperson, or sales manager. The course is geared toward entrepreneurial settings, specifically execution required by the founder, investor, or advisor. However, the best practices are applicable to larger company requirements as well.
“The #1 skill HBS alums wish they had spent more time understanding at school was how to sell.”
-Dean Nohria
This course explores the complex subject of how to build, manage, and scale the first sales force including how to:
- Hire your first salesperson and sales leader
- Develop a scalable demand generation program
- Pay your first salesperson
- Train, manage, promote, and fire your first sales team
- Establish your first sales plan
- Manage the board’s expectations on revenue
- Instrument an accurate forecasting model
“Superior sales and distribution by itself can create a monopoly, even with no product differentiation. The converse is not true. No matter how strong your product, even if it easily fits into already established habits and anybody who tries it likes it immediately, you must still support it with a strong distribution plan.”
-From “Zero to One” by Peter Thiel
One common misconception is that product innovation alone is a winning tactic. It is not. Often the critical success factor is exactly how a firm goes to market – with its sales force. But the rules have changed – innovations like ‘product-led-growth’ models and social media are changing the status quo and forcing managers to consider new way to structure and incent sales teams.
CLASS REQUIREMENTS
Preparation and class participation are a requirement. We will cold call students to open each class. Every class is associated with a short assignment, and all students are required to be ready to discuss the assigned material.
Sales management is a highly experiential, hands on skill that requires role playing and iterative practice to master. As such, Entrepreneurial Sales 102 uses a more experiential pedagogy during the semester. Unlike most courses at HBS, there is no final exam or final project. Instead, we will experiential assignments, largely executed outside of the classroom, in parallel with the classroom sessions.
Class sessions will be 80 minutes long and will be largely be executed in three parts: a cold call opening in which a student presents his/her course of action as outlined in the case, class discussion of the case, and a presentation by the professor to emphasize the key leanings from the case. More than one unexcused absence will affect your final grade.
Entrepreneurial Sales 101 is required as a pre-requisite for this course, as 102 builds on many of the concepts introduced in 101. There is minimal overlap between Entrepreneurial Sales 101 and 102.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Entrepreneurship Outside the Valley
Course Number 1631
Overview:
Entrepreneurship has been shown to be a major driver of economic development in markets like Israel, India, Singapore, China, and Estonia. These success stories highlight why promoting entrepreneurship globally has become an important policy agenda. From the perspective of entrepreneurs and investors, however, little research has been devoted to providing insights into how to successfully navigate these markets. While the strategies of lean experimentation, minimum viable product, bootstrapping, and staged investment are critical to startups in these emerging ecosystems, one needs to adapt the lessons from mature markets like Silicon Valley, New York, and Boston that receive the majority of attention in the media and in the classroom. Entrepreneurship Outside the Valley develops strategies for entrepreneurs and investors in these emerging ecosystems around the globe. The course will have cases from 26 different countries on every continent. The course examines the multifaceted nature of entrepreneurship in emerging ecosystems, highlighting the areas of context that affect the decisions of players in the sector. These areas will be highlighted in six modules which include differences in industry structure and the macroeconomy, availability and access to talent, financing sources, legal and regulatory environments, local culture, and exit markets.
Career Focus:
Entrepreneurship Outside the Valley (EOV) is a course for a variety of students. First, individuals potentially exploring careers in startups or venture capital in these emerging ecosystems will gain valuable insights into how to adapt strategies. These actionable insights will improve decision-making by providing a framework for adapting to local market context. Second, those who intend to pursue startups or venture capital investing in developed markets can gain a deeper understanding of what factors likely influence success and failure. Many startups in developed ecosystems eventually enter other markets and understanding constraints can aid this expansion. Additionally, venture capital investing has transitioned to a global phenomenon and being able to evaluate which emerging ecosystems are likely to be sustainable provides a roadmap for expanding an investment footprint. Finally, for those interested in evaluating economic and business environments generally, EOV provides a robust macro setting in which to understand how various levers aid or hinder economic development by examining one of the engines for such development, the entrepreneurial sector.
Educational Objectives:
Entrepreneurship Outside the Valley is intended to provide critical knowledge and frameworks for founders and investors to navigate the complex setting of startups in emerging ecosystems around the globe. The course will provide institutional understanding as well as apply strategic and analytic tools to make important decisions.
Course Content and Organization:
The first module explores how the significant differences in industry structures and the macroeconomy affect the types of startups that we see in different markets. Emerging entrepreneurial ecosystems often exhibit diverse and evolving industry structures. Understanding this structure is critical to finding and developing startup opportunities. Unlike mature economies with established sectors, emerging markets are marked by rapid changes and the emergence of new industries.
There are several common types of opportunities that we see across emerging ecosystems. First, digitization and technology can allow certain sectors to be modernized in a way that is different from more mature economies. In areas like fintech, supply chain, and agriculture, technology can be used to modernize various elements of the economy and provide value to businesses and consumers. For example, 73% of Egypt is unbanked, having no access to financial services. In Mexico, that number is 50.9%. The increasingly pervasive nature of mobile connectivity and access to big data tools provides the opportunity to increase financial inclusivity through fintech startups. Mobile payments, saving, and lending are sectors in which we see startups flourishing. Startups in the fintech sector are often either hindered or helped by the responsiveness of government regulators like central banks. Similarly, in some countries, the financial sector is dominated by large family-owned banks that can become a barrier to market access. Many emerging markets also have very inefficient supply chains that dramatically hinder the efficiency of a variety of industries. By investing in technology and logistics, these supply chain startups, both in the B2B and the B2C space, can create tremendous value. Monetization of these types of opportunities, however, can prevent certain challenges. Finally, in many countries, agriculture still represents a large share of the domestic economy. Small farms and lack of resources often means that agriculture is highly inefficient. Technology can dramatically improve productive capacity of farms and increase food security in a country.
A second type of opportunity that entrepreneurs in emerging ecosystems develop are those that are imitations of successful startups in other geographies, both developed and emerging ecosystems. Imitation of a successful business model provides a roadmap for what types of opportunities may success. For example, the Saudi-based food delivery startup Jahez was founded in September 2016, three and a half years after Doordash was founded in Palo Alto. Careem, a ride hailing service in the MENA region, was founded in the UAE in 2012, three years after Uber was started in San Francisco. Similarly, MecadoLibre, an Argentinian-based ecommerce company often called the Amazon of Latin America, was founded in 1999, five years after Amazon itself. We also find that entrepreneurs will imitate startups from other emerging ecosystems. WeChat became the first superapp when it launched in 2011 in China. Startups like Grab (Singapore/Indonesia) and Gojek (Indonesia) soon evolved into similar offerings over time. The critical element of imitation startups is how they adapt to the local market in which customer tastes, buying habits, and willingness to pay may differ. For B2C companies, are customer buying habits and tastes similar? What are logistical constraints that differ? Are there legal or regulator concerns? For B2B companies, similar concerns must be considered. Additionally, in countries where the cash economy is prevalent, startups must consider how they can convince businesses to enter the formal economy.
A third type of startup that exists in some, but not all, emerging entrepreneurial ecosystems are deep tech companies. These types of startups rely on specialized technical skills that exist in a particular country and often develop startups that can have global reach. Sectors like biotechnology, artificial intelligence, quantum computing, and advanced materials find centers of excellence in a number of emerging ecosystems. The quality of STEM education as well as the government support for basic R&D can create opportunities to found companies that can have global impact. Often these companies enjoy a cost advantage as local labor may be cheaper than similar technical talent in developed ecosystems. Countries like Singapore, Korea, Japan, Poland, Hungary, Estonia, Argentina, and South Africa have pockets of technical domains that are world class. Key to exploiting these opportunities is ensuring that not only does the startup have access to quality technical talent, but that the company can recruit the necessary business professionals to access global markets.
Finally, all founders and investors in emerging ecosystems need to understand broader macroeconomic factors like declining investment in startups, rising interest rates, high inflation, and currency devaluation. The retrenchment in the global venture capital investing landscape hit emerging entrepreneurial ecosystems especially hard. Companies that could have easily raised follow-on funding only a year before suddenly found it impossible to raise capital. This sudden change means dramatic shifts in operating strategies for startups, often leading to reduced headcount and a focus on becoming profitable. Similarly, in countries with high inflation and currency devaluation, managing revenue and expenses can become difficult. In certain sectors, the cost of funds, for example in fintech lending, can become prohibitive. While the macroeconomy effects startups in all markets, the volatile nature of the macroeconomy in emerging ecosystems makes such strategic choices even more painful.
The second module of EOV examines where the talent for startups comes from in various countries. One of the critical factors influencing entrepreneurship in emerging markets is the availability of the right type of talent. These regions are characterized by a diverse pool of human capital with varying levels of expertise. Entrepreneurs must deal with talent shortages in certain specialized fields while harnessing the potential of a young and eager workforce. Moreover, cultural nuances and language barriers can impact team dynamics, requiring entrepreneurs to cultivate a deep understanding of local work environments and adopt effective cross-cultural communication strategies. Module 2 will examine strategies that founders can undertake to identify key technical and business talent to develop and grow their companies.
The third module deals with sources of financing for entrepreneurial ventures across different ecosystems. Access to financing remains a pivotal challenge for entrepreneurs in emerging markets. Traditional funding avenues, such as venture capital and angel investors, may be limited, prompting entrepreneurs to explore alternative financing models. We will examine the role of government programs in jump starting a venture capital sector as well and how those programs can be effective. Crowdfunding, impact investing, and government-sponsored initiatives become crucial lifelines for startups seeking capital in many geographies and understanding where and how they fit into a startup will be explored. Entrepreneurs in emerging markets must be adept at navigating these diverse funding sources and developing resilient financial strategies to weather the uncertainties inherent in such economies.
The fourth module examines differences in legal and regulatory environments and how they affect startups. Navigating the legal and regulatory landscape is a complex aspect of entrepreneurship in emerging markets. Regulatory frameworks may be less established or subject to frequent changes, creating uncertainty for businesses. Entrepreneurs must be agile and proactive, staying abreast of legal developments and building relationships with local authorities to ensure compliance. Bureaucracy and corruption are often major hurdles that affect entrepreneurs and investors. Similarly, legal frameworks around the types of securities, bankruptcy regulations, and taxation can be major impediments to startups.
EOV’s fifth module examines how cultural differences affect the vibrancy of startups and how entrepreneurs and investors can succeed despite these cultural differences. Understanding and integrating with culture is a cornerstone of successful entrepreneurship in emerging markets. Culture often affects the desire of individuals to start companies. For example, in Japan, failure historically was severely punished. The most sought-after jobs were in large companies in which title and compensation were determined strictly by tenure. Similarly, in other countries, like Hungary, a pervasive attitude of the lack of personal opportunity and a lack of creativity provide a difficult context in which to start companies. In Francophone countries like Cote d’Ivoire, risk aversion also runs deep. De-risking the startup process may be important for fostering pioneering entrepreneurs. Cultural nuances also influence consumer behavior, market acceptance, and even team dynamics.
The sixth and final module examines exit strategies. Once a founder takes professional investment capital, they are committing to an exit at some point in the future. The availability of exits, however, is a pervasive and perplexing problem for many ecosystems globally. Given that much of the global growth in startups is less than a decade old, few ecosystems have solved this dilemma. As such, many of the venture capital investors still manage their venture capital funds with little realizations flowing back to investors. Ultimately, if attractive exits cannot be executed, then these venture capital firms will not be able to continue to raise new funds. As such, the exit issue is critically important to solve.
Grading / Course Administration:
The grading for the course will be 50% class participation and 50% final exam.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Entrepreneurship in Life Sciences
Course Number 1777
28 sessions
Paper
Career Focus
Life Sciences ventures face high levels of scientific, clinical and commercial pathway uncertainty, and these uncertainties present many opportunities for entrepreneurial innovation. This course is primarily designed for students who are interested in exploring entrepreneurial opportunities within the life sciences, including exploring ideation, generating and/or licensing intellectual property, business models, resourcing ventures with the appropriate financial and human resources, and scaling. The course will explore which areas of the life sciences are ripe for innovation and entrepreneurship and will cover therapeutics, devices, diagnostics, and related service providers, data, tools and technologies. Example topics of exploration may include emerging opportunities in pharma & biotech, medical device & diagnostics advances, and related topics such as digital therapeutics, platform technologies, use of real-world evidence, data and computing, AI and GenAI, decentralized clinical trials, the role of life sciences incubators, contract research/manufacturing organizations etc.
Educational Objectives
This course has been specifically designed for students who are considering founding or joining life sciences ventures upon, or soon after, graduation. This course covers many topics that are also important to students interested in working in or investing in the life sciences. While the course is focused on the life sciences, students need not have a scientific background, merely a passion for making an impact through participation in these ventures. The primary objective of this course is to enable students to explore entrepreneurship and careers within the life sciences. Students will explore opportunities along various aspects of the R&D and commercialization lifecycle, along science, clinical, regulatory and commercial areas of the lifecycle.
Key Learning Objectives include:
- Understand key business models for life sciences innovation
- Understand macro trends driving innovation in the life sciences, including the impact of emerging bioconvergence topics at the intersection of the life sciences, data and computing
- Define roadmaps for life sciences R&D and products, incorporating intellectual property concerns, clinical and regulatory pathways to commercialization.
- Explore financing sources, including early grants and non-dilutive financing sources, to equity financing
- Identify best practices for building life sciences teams
Class tools include case and/or lecture-based discussions based on a variety of life sciences ventures, including those in biotech, pharmaceutical, medical device, diagnostics, and related supporting technology and services organizations. In most classes, we will have case protagonists and guests, including life sciences entrepreneurs, investors and domain experts so you can engage directly with these practitioners from the burgeoning life sciences venture ecosystem.
Grading
Grading will be a combination of class participation (50%), and a final written paper (50%).
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: Business of the Arts
Course Number 6913
Ten afternoon class sessions plus 2-5 hours per week of team work.
Project
Enrollment: Limited to 30 students
Formerly Field Course: Arts and Cultural Entrepreneurship
Educational Objectives
The nonprofit arts and culture industry generates more than $166.billions of economic activity in the US—approximately $64 billion in spending by arts and cultural organizations and an additional $103 billion in event-related expenditures by their audiences. This activity supports 4.6 million jobs. A recent report by the Conference Board noted that in addition to the enormous financial impact of the sector, “companies consider the arts to be important in building quality of life, stimulating creative thinking and problem solving, and offering networking opportunities and the potential to develop new business and build market share.”
Business of the Arts (BOTA) is designed to introduce students to the key issues faced by leaders in this important economic sector.
Course Content and Organization
The course will utilize three approaches to learning—traditional case-based classes, talks by key arts leaders, and consulting assignments with Boston-area arts institution.
Cases: Cases and required background reading will cover leadership issues encountered by an extensive range of arts and cultural institutions both in the United States and abroad (e.g. the Louvre, the Los Angeles Philharmonic).
Guest Talks: Students will hear firsthand from a number of case protagonists who will discuss the challenges and opportunities they face as leaders of cultural organizations.
Projects: Students will assemble into five-person teams to work on projects throughout the course. Project partners will include a wide variety of Boston-area arts and cultural institutions. Each project will focus on solving a specific and well-defined strategic or operational challenge currently facing the organization. related. The projects will require extensive data collection and analysis.
Non-Disclosure Agreements: Partner organizations will provide student teams with confidential information. Students will be required to sign a confidentiality and intellectual property assignment agreement.
Course Requirements and Grading
Deliverables: The course will have five deliverables: (1) Team Launch Document (2) Situation Analysis, (3) Preliminary Draft of Partner Presentation, (4) Final Partner Presentation, and (5) Individual Learning Reflection.
Grading: Each student’s grade will be based on (1) Class Participation, (2) Quality of Team Deliverables, (3) Partner Input, (4) Team Member Peer Evaluation, and (5) Quality of Individual Learning Reflection.
Pre-Requisites
None
Cross-Registration
A limited number of places will be held for students from the Kennedy School of Government and the Graduate School of Design. The mix of students from diverse disciplines will contribute to both student learning and the range of solutions proposed for the entrepreneurial challenges faced by the course partners.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: Climate Solutions Lab
Course Number 1728
“I have become convinced that to avoid a climate disaster, we need to do three things: First, we have to get to zero net emissions by the year 2050. Second, we need to deploy the tools we already have, like solar and wind, faster and smarter. And finally, we need to create and roll out breakthrough technologies that can take us the rest of the way.”
Bill Gates in “How to Avoid a Climate Disaster”
Climate change is arguably the most pressing challenge facing the world today with enormous economic consequences and opportunities. Investments in decarbonizing the global economy are at various stages of invention and implementation and all will require skillful and dedicated leaders to fulfill their potential.
The Climate Solutions LAB (CSL) course will examine these different climate solution sets (including technical, financial, and/or political) to understand their potential impact and pathways to scale, as well as the challenges and frictions impeding their progress and ultimate success.
CSL is intended for students interested in pursuing careers founding, joining, leading and/or investing in climate solution companies and want to dig deeply into these topics with like minded students and experts. To that end, the course is designed as a combination of a Field and a Seminar course which will meet weekly on Thursday from 3:10 - 5:10pm.
Weekly class sessions will be dedicated to examining key topics including climate models and projections, climate technologies and commercialization frameworks, climate financing strategies & structures, carbon markets, climate policy and global geo-politics - including the relationship between the US, Europe and China, as well as the Global North and Global South. Each class will include discussion based on curated non-case readings and engagement with guests who are subject matter experts in the week’s topic(s) of interest.
The Field dimension of the course will consist of a team-based project focused on understanding and developing insights into strategies for accelerating climate solutions. Project options will include working with a leading climate solution company, climate investor, or government and policy organization. These projects may be sourced from Professor Matheson’s extensive network, or directly from CSL students who will have agency on the design and configuration of their team as well as the choice of the project topic and partner. There will regularly be class time dedicated to project team coordination, structured feedback between project teams, and shared learning across the class via project team presentations.
The final dimension of CSL will be focused on helping students design their career plan with the goal of having CSL students complete the course with a clear view of their path forward as a climate leader including their ideal first role post-HBS. Towards this end, CSL will offer optional small group discussions with climate leaders, career visioning and design exercises, as well as direct support from Professor Matheson and the HBS CPD Office.
In summary, CSL is intended to prepare the next generation of climate leaders who can fill key leadership positions across the climate landscape and help accelerate the deployment of high impact solutions. While Professor Matheson also teaches Tough Tech Ventures (TTV) in the Spring Semester, the TTV and CSL courses are quite distinct and highly complementary. Though not required, students who are committed to pursuing a career in climate technology are welcome and encouraged to take both classes.
To ensure an intimate and immersive experience, CSL will be limited to 40 students. The workload will be consistent with other full semester 3-credit courses with the primary course deliverable being a comprehensive project package and readout from the student teams to their selected project partners. Grading will be based on a combination of project performance (50%), class participation (35%), and selective other assignments (15%). Please email Professor Matheson (jmatheson@hbs.edu) with any questions about the Climate Solutions LAB.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: Entrepreneurship through Acquisition (Application Only)
Course Number 6452
12 Sessions
Paper
Prerequisite: Students must also take the Q1Q2 offering Financial Management of Smaller Firms (FMSF), 1452.
Enrollment by application only: Students enrolled in FMSF will learn more about the application steps from faculty in fall.
This course teaches specific practical skills that are required to become an effective entrepreneur through acquisition. The course is not a case-based course. It will meet weekly and students will be required to complete assignments on topics relevant to buying a small company such as how to screen potential acquisition targets, the likely types, terms and amounts of debt financing, the typical deal terms and the items open to negotiations, the sources of equity investments, including search funds, private equity partnerships and individual investors. We will also learn about the due diligence process and legal concerns when buying a smaller company. We will have guests in most classes who have practical, hands-on experience.
The course will have practical exercises designed to help entrepreneurs complete their acquisitions. These include pitching to potential equity investors, prospecting for potential targets, seller cold calls and negotiating bank loans.
The seminar is designed for students with a serious interest in buying a small company early in their careers.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: Field X
Course Number 6333
Weekly, 2 hour sessions
Project
Enrollment: Limited to 80 students
Fall 2021 video link
Educational Objectives
The course is designed to enable students to develop and grow their businesses. Doing so while on campus has several advantages, including access to resources (faculty time and attention, library and computer access); advice from your peers in a structured environment; and devoted blocks of time during your EC year to move your business forward while your team is all in one location. The course employs a combination of field methods, classroom exercises, cross-team interactions, and access to faculty, guest experts, and other advisors. The largest single allocation of time is for working with your team to make meaningful progress on your own business.
"Joiner" students who are interested in taking the class by joining a business with one or more existing members are strongly encouraged to do so. We will create opportunities for businesses with one or more members to meet and combine with joiners.
Students can expect to:
- Summarize and critique their existing business, its strengths and weaknesses, and set priorities for moving the business forward, including the most pressing priorities to be addressed during the course itself.
- Develop a strategy for taking the business to the next level, including a plan for funding, and a plan and timeline for reaching scale.
- Give and receive feedback from other highly motivated student teams.
- Meet frequently as a team with the faculty advisor.
- Receive feedback and counsel from outside business advisors.
- Have opportunities to pitch your work to angel, seed, and venture capital investors.
This course can be thought of as occupying a space between an IP and a traditional course, giving you an opportunity to work on something of great interest to you, while preserving many of the benefits of a larger course, including opportunities for guest speakers, feedback from your peers, and clearly delineated deliverables and milestones that act as commitment devices to push the business forward.
In the past the School has provided each Field X team with a modest grant of around $2,000 to help launch their business. While we cannot guarantee the grant program will continue this year, we hope and expect that it will.
A substantial number of Field X businesses have been funded by mentors and investors they met through the course. Several dozen teams from last year are running their businesses full-time now, most of whom have received funding of $500,000 or more; in some cases far more.
In terms of requirements, "in between an IP and a course" means that there will be almost-weekly class meetings, but there will not, in general, be substantial weekly homework or required preparation for class, other than that you work to push your business forward.
Who Should Enroll?
Students who are sufficiently excited about a business they are running, or a business they want to start immediately, that they want to focus on it in a serious way. Some, because they treasure the lessons they are learning from building a business. Some, because they think their business has a legitimate opportunity to grow rapidly and create a successful career path for them. And some because they believe their business can do a substantial amount of good for the world and so they want to continue working on it during their EC year and perhaps after graduation.
Course Deliverables
The main deliverable will be the team’s final presentation and the supporting slide deck and report. There will also be intermediate deliverables building up to that point. In short, expect to produce a Word document and a Powerpoint deck with descriptions of your business at the beginning of the course and a (perhaps similar, perhaps very different) version at the end of the course.
On the final day of class, students who wish to will have the opportunity to present their businesses to an audience of angel, seed and venture investors at our Pitch Day event. At our most recent Pitch Day, the first run over Zoom, around 350 investors attended.
Short FAQ:
Q: Can I take Field X if I am the only person involved in my business?
A: Yes, Field X welcomes teams of all sizes; including solo founders, multiple team members in the class, and teams with multiple members, only one of whom attends HBS and takes the course.
Q: What are classes like?
A: Most weeks the class consists of an hour-long interactive talk/discussion with a luminary, followed by an hour of "mini office hours" in which student teams pair up with mentors who can help their business. Past speakers have included venture capitalist Tim Draper, Shark Tank's Kevin O'Leary, stellar entrepreneurs like Yvonne Hao of PillPack and Charles Curran of Armored Things, and many others with wisdom to share.
Q: How will the course be different due to Covid-19?
A: The course has now returned to meeting in person, with a Zoom option still provided for mentors who wish to visit remotely and students who may need to be physically absent. "Mini office hours" with mentors are still offered via Zoom - students post their person Zoom links on the course Google Sheet for the mentors to join.
Meetings with the Professor and TA can still be in person if students wish, or they can be by Zoom for students who prefer that.
Q: Can I take the class if I just have an idea but I haven't started yet?
A: Yes, this is typically the situation of between a quarter and a half of the teams in the course.
Q: What if I don't even have an idea yet?
A: If you want to start a business but don't have an idea, we'd welcome you as a "joiner" in Field X -- we will match you up with a team that is doing something you find exciting and that is looking to add talent. If you want to start your own business and have a nascent idea, we can work with you to build it into something real.
Q: How about the other side of the coin, what if it's an old family business I'll be taking over, something like that?
A: Yes, that's also fine.
Q: Is Field X aimed at any particular sector, like tech?
A: No, Field X teams run the gamut, every year we have consumer, healthcare, finance, real estate, tech, arts and entertainment, social enterprise, you name it.
Q: What if my business has modest goals?
A: That's fine, in Field X we're happy to work with teams that want to serve a small need as well as teams with enormous ambition.
Q: If I take Field X, can I take Field Y? Do I have to take Field Y too?
A: You can take just X, just Y, or X and Y.
Cross Registration
Cross-registrants are welcome to take the course.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: Field Y: Projects in Business Management
Course Number 6334
Weekly, 2 hour sessions
Project
Enrollment: Limited to 80 students
Field Y welcomes both students who have taken Field X and those who have not. If we reach the enrollment limit, preference will be given to students who took Field X.
Fall 2021 Field X video linkEducational Objectives
The course is designed to enable students to develop and grow their businesses. Doing so while on campus has several advantages, including access to resources (faculty time and attention, library and computer access); advice from your peers in a structured environment; and devoted blocks of time during your EC year to move your business forward while your team is all in one location. The course employs a combination of field methods, classroom exercises, cross-team interactions, and access to faculty, guest experts, and other advisors. The largest single allocation of time is for working with your team to make meaningful progress on your own business.
Several dozen teams from last year are running their businesses full-time now, most of whom have received funding of $500,000 or more; in some cases far more.
NOTE ALSO: BECAUSE THIS COURSE HAS MANY CHARACTERISTICS OF AN INDEPENDENT STUDY, THIS CLASS, UNLIKE FIELD X, COUNTS TOWARD THE MAXIMUM NUMBER OF IP CREDITS A STUDENT CAN RECEIVE. Thus if the rule is that you can do three IPs in your EC year, if you take Field Y you can only do a maximum of two other IPs (6 credits total).
Students can expect to:
- Summarize and critique their existing business, its strengths and weaknesses, and set priorities for moving the business forward, including the most pressing priorities to be addressed during the course itself.
- Develop a strategy for taking the business to the next level, including a plan for funding, and a plan and timeline for reaching scale.
- Give and receive feedback from other highly motivated student teams.
- Meet frequently as a team with the faculty advisor.
- Receive feedback and counsel from outside business advisors.
- Have opportunities to pitch your work to angel, seed, and venture capital investors.
This course can be thought of as occupying a space between an IP and a traditional course, giving you an opportunity to work on something of great interest to you, while preserving many of the benefits of a larger course, including opportunities for guest speakers, feedback from your peers, and clearly delineated deliverables and milestones that act as commitment devices to push the business forward. In terms of requirements, "in between an IP and a course" means that there will be some class meetings, but not every week. Coursework will be focused on improving and growing your business.
Who Should Enroll?
- Students who took Field X and who are still running and growing their businesses
Students who are starting and/or running businesses in Spring of their EC year and who did not take Field X.
Course Deliverables
The main deliverable will be the team’s final presentation and the supporting slide deck and report. There will also be intermediate deliverables building up to that point. In short, expect to produce a Word document and a Powerpoint deck with descriptions of your business at the beginning of the course and a (perhaps similar, perhaps very different) version at the end of the course.
We will work hard in the course to connect students with sources of funding, including angel, seed, and venture investors. At the end of the semester there will be an opportunity for each team to present their business to a room full of such investors; in the past many fruitful relationships have been initiated through these presentations.
Short FAQ:
Q: Can I take Field Y if I didn't take Field X? If I did?!
A: Yes to both. Field Y is open to both students who took Field X and those who didn't. If we are above capacity we will give priority to students who took Field X.
Q: Can I take Field Y if I am the only person involved in my business?
A: Yes, Field Y welcomes teams of all sizes; including solo founders, multiple team members in the class, and teams with multiple members, only one of whom attends HBS and takes the course.
Q: What are classes like?
A: Most weeks the class consists of an hour-long interactive talk/discussion with a luminary, followed by an hour of "mini office hours" in which student teams pair up with mentors who can help their business. Past speakers have included venture capitalist Tim Draper, Shark Tank's Kevin O'Leary, stellar entrepreneurs like Yvonne Hao of PillPack and Charles Curran of Armored Things, and many others with wisdom to share.
Q: How will the course be different due to Covid-19?
A: The course has now returned to meeting in person, with a Zoom option still provided for mentors who wish to visit remotely and students who may need to be physically absent. "Mini office hours" with mentors are still offered via Zoom - students post their person Zoom links on the course Google Sheet for the mentors to join.
Meetings with the Professor and TA can still be in person if students wish, or they can be by Zoom for students who prefer that.
Q: Can I take the class if I just have an idea but I haven't started yet?
A: Yes, this is typically the situation of between a quarter and a third of the teams in the course.
Q: What if I don't even have an idea yet?
A: If you want to start a business but don't have an idea, we'd welcome you as a "joiner" in Field Y -- we will match you up with a team that is doing something you find exciting and that is looking to add talent. If you want to start your own business and have a nascent idea, we can work with you to build it into something real.
Q: How about the other side of the coin, what if it's an old family business I'll be taking over, something like that?
A: Yes, that's also fine.
Q: Is Field Y aimed at any particular sector, like tech?
A: No, Field Y teams run the gamut, every year we have consumer, healthcare, finance, real estate, tech, arts and entertainment, social enterprise, you name it.
Q: What if my business has modest goals?
A: That's fine, in Field Y we're happy to work with teams that want to serve a small need as well as teams with enormous ambition.
Cross Registration
Cross-registrants are welcome to take the course.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: Foundry AI Lab
Course Number 6617
6 Weekly Two-Hour Sessions
Project
HBS Foundry will be a digital platform that trains and coaches underserved entrepreneurs, including underrepresented minorities, women, and founders in emerging markets or U.S. cities that aren’t startup hubs. Foundry will feature: 1) modular content – video rich and practical – providing comprehensive coverage of the concepts and skills that an entrepreneur needs to master; and 2) AI-powered applications that will guide an entrepreneur to relevant content, serve as a tutor, and advise the entrepreneur on key venture decisions. HBS’s goal with Foundry is to dramatically increase the School’s impact on entrepreneurs, helping to provide opportunity for all and showcase business as a force for good.
In Foundry AI Lab the instructors — the faculty co-leads for HBS Foundry — will work with small teams of students who will develop, test, and refine prototypes of AI applications that will eventually be built into Foundry. Through learning-by-doing, students will gain skills with applying GenAI technologies and deeper understanding of the capabilities and limitations of these important new technologies. Students will also gain familiarity with challenges confronting underserved entrepreneurs. Since most MBAs will work extensively with GenAI technologies in the future, the course should be of interest to a broad range of students. It may be of special interest to those who plan to work as product managers, in entrepreneurial ventures, or for organizations that aim for social impact.
Some examples of applications we expect to prototype in Foundry AI Lab include:
- Bots that play the counterparty role in different entrepreneurial negotiation settings, e.g., splitting equity with a co-founder; negotiating terms with an investor; hiring a key early employee. The bots could also provide feedback on the learner’s negotiation approach.
- A bot that assumes the role of a targeted persona for customer discovery interviews, providing insight on unmet customer needs and feedback on the learner’s questioning approach.
- An avatar that answers a learner’s question from the perspective of a specific domain expert – say, an HBS professor fielding questions about startup sales.
- A bot that provides feedback on an entrepreneur’s pitch deck and suggestions for improvement.
In pairs, students will identify and evaluate the effectiveness any existing 3rd-party AI-powered applications that target the entrepreneurial tasks they’ve been assigned. Teams will then prototype their own bot or tool and aim to improve its reliability and functionality through iterative prompt engineering; by experimenting with different source content and instructions provided to Retrieval-Augmented Generation-powered Large Language Models; and through user testing.
The first half of our weekly two-hour class sessions will feature “how to build with GenAI” talks by guest speakers, including staff from HBS Digital Transformation Team and the Digital Data Design Institute at Harvard. These speakers and other experts will be available to coach student teams. The second half of our class sessions will be devoted to providing peer feedback on teams’ work-in-progress.
During the semester, teams will submit a workplan and periodic updates on their work-in-progress. Their final deliverable will be a prototype demonstrated during a class presentation, accompanied by a report evaluating the prototype’s strengths and limitations and detailing recommended next steps for the application.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: Go to Market Sales Playbook Field Study
Course Number 6665
Project/Paper
If you are founding a company or even considering founding a company, you need to know whether your product will sell. Many students start selling their products after graduation, but its best to know your product will sell before you join your startup full time. GoToMarket sales playbook is a course specifically designed for students who want to learn how to sell their product. In this class you design a playbook for your startup, either alone or as a team of two.
This field course will be designed to put into practice the tactics and strategies covered in ES 101, Founder Sales, although taking Founder Sales is not a requirement for the field course.
This course will have four or five in person class where former students will review their playbooks and experts in specific go to market functions will speak to the class. Grades are based 80% on the final project deliverable, which is a sales playbook for your startup and 20% on class participation.
Course objectives include:
1. What is the best go to market model for your company? Direct sales, indirect channel sales or another model.
2. What kind of salesperson should you hire. Why?
3. How will you close your first customers?
4. How would you generate inbound sales leads to your company?
5. How should you implement your sales playbook recommendations?
To gain entry into the course please submit your startup company, website, details of conversations you have had with prospects, addressable market etc. Please submit to Kalkidan Tadesse. ktadesse@hbs.edu
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: Innovating in Health Care
Course Number 6340
Paper/Project
Overview and Requirements
Problems with health care quality, access, and costs bedevil all countries. Health care—inefficient, erratic in quality and access, ripe for massive technological and consumer-facing innovations—is one of the largest and ripest sectors for innovation.
This course focuses on the creation of a business plan for an innovation in health care that can better meet these needs.
Students will continue to pursue plans generated in the prior Innovating in Health Care (IHC) course, offered in Q1 of 2024, or enroll with a new plan. They will also review and offer advice for the business plans of their classmates.
Prerequisite
One member of the team, at a minimum, must be enrolled in the Fall Term 2024, Q1, 2185 - Innovating in Health Care.
Career Focus
For those interested in entrepreneurial health care leadership, consulting, or investing. Students interested in careers in health care/life sciences financing or leadership, or creating innovative health care services, health insurance, health IT, digital health, consumer-based innovations, or medical technology.
Educational Objectives
Additional field-based experience in creating a business plan for innovating new health care/life science ventures on topics chosen by the students or from those made available by the faculty. Students will gain exposure to the key players in their chosen research topic with the help of Prof. Herzlinger’s network and that of their classmates and the course advisers. The advisers consist of faculty from related HU schools—SEAS, HMS, KSG, SPH; regulatory/legal/ reimbursement experts; seasoned VC/PE investors; and CEOs of firms related to the topic of the business plan.
Course Content and Organization
The students in this course meet six times as a group in the classroom. Between these meetings, they meet with their advisers to further their progress.
Session 1
Introduction to the course –
What can the Field Course do for you?
What does a good business plan look like?
Assignment: Briefly present and post on Canvas your preliminary business plan interest and partners/contacts you are looking for.
Sessions 2-4
Assignment: Present refinement of your preliminary business plan interest and partners/contacts you are looking for. During the prior week, please post these requests on Canvas.
Session 5
Assignment: Present your progress to date in completing your business plan and your plans/needs for completion. During the prior week, post your plans on Canvas.
Session 6
Assignment: Present your final business plan and include questions you would like the class to answer in PowerPoint format, posted on Canvas.
Students are reminded of the Class Absence and Remote Attendance Policy.
Grading is based primarily on class participation and quality of business plan, relative to that submitted in prior IHC class.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: Innovating in Health Care, Q2
Course Number 6345
Paper/project
Enrollment: limited to 20 students
Executive Fellows
Ben Creo
Brian Walker
Overview and Requirements
Problems with health care quality, access, and costs bedevil all countries. Health care—inefficient, erratic in quality and access, ripe for massive technological and consumer-facing innovations—is one of the largest and ripest sectors for innovation.
This course focuses on the creation of a business plan for an innovation in health care that can better meet these needs.
Students will continue to pursue plans generated in the prior Innovating in Health Care (IHC) course, offered in Q1 of 2024, or enroll with a new plan. They will also review and offer advice for the business plans of their classmates.
Prerequisite
One member of the team, at a minimum, must be enrolled in the Fall Term 2024, Q1, 2185 - Innovating in Health Care.
Career Focus
For those interested in entrepreneurial health care leadership, consulting, or investing. Students interested in careers in health care/life sciences financing or leadership, or creating innovative health care services, health insurance, health IT, digital health, consumer-based innovations, or medical technology.
Educational Objectives
Additional field-based experience in creating a business plan for innovating new health care/life science ventures on topics chosen by the students or from those made available by the faculty. Students will gain exposure to the key players in their chosen research topic with the help of Prof. Herzlinger’s network and that of their classmates and the course advisers. The advisers consist of faculty from related HU schools—SEAS, HMS, KSG, SPH; regulatory/legal/ reimbursement experts; seasoned VC/PE investors; and CEOs of firms related to the topic of the business plan.
Course Content and Organization
The students in this course meet six times as a group in the classroom. Between these meetings, they meet with their advisers to further their progress.
Session 1
Introduction to the course –
What can the Field Course do for you?
What does a good business plan look like?
Assignment: Briefly present and post on Canvas your preliminary business plan interest and partners/contacts you are looking for.
Sessions 2-4
Assignment: Present refinement of your preliminary business plan interest and partners/contacts you are looking for. During the prior week, please post these requests on Canvas.
Session 5
Assignment: Present your progress to date in completing your business plan and your plans/needs for completion. During the prior week, post your plans on Canvas.
Session 6
Assignment: Present your final business plan and include questions you would like the class to answer in PowerPoint format, posted on Canvas.
Students are reminded of the Class Absence and Remote Attendance Policy.
Grading is based primarily on class participation and quality of business plan, relative to that submitted in prior IHC class.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: Investing for Impact
Course Number 6604
Enrollment: Limited to 25 students. By application only.
Educational Objectives
The Field Course: Investing for Impact seeks to help students understand why certain business founders lack access to capital and whether small investments of $25,000 to $50,000 (made from an intermediary Donor Advised Fund) might help these businesses grow to deliver financial returns and measurable community impacts. Specifically, Investing for Impact will:
- Provide a hands-on experience in thinking about the financial, commercial, impact and operational diligence of small businesses.
- Provide hands-on experience with the investment process, from working with founders, negotiating with co-investors, presenting to an investment committee and moving into the mechanics of closing an investment.
- Help students understand the barriers in access to capital (financial, social and human) that have historically hindered small businesses led by under-represented founders in the Boston region, and nationally.
- Increase familiarity with and collaboration among HBS students and businesses in communities in and around Boston that they might not otherwise be familiar with.
- Learn about community development finance as a subset of a broader field of impact investing.
Course Content and Organization
The course primarily involves teams of 4-5 students conducting investment diligence on small businesses who are looking for flexible capital to scale their businesses. In partnership with Boston-area intermediaries (e.g. Boston Impact Initiative, Foundation for Business Equity, LEAF, Mill City Community Investments), teams will work to understand and make the investment case to an investment committee consisting of HBS alumni. Students may also provide advisory support for companies that have been supported with investments in prior years or portfolio companies of our intermediary partners.
Course Requirements and Grading
The final deliverables will be a due diligence plan to assess the business from a commercial, operational and impact perspective; a final investment memo that summarizes the diligence and recommends an investment (or not); a financial model that is the basis for informing the investment decision; and an impact plan that outlines how the business will deliver impact. The course grade will have the following components:
- Due Diligence Plan: 10%
- Investment Memo (with financial model and impact plan): 35%
- Investment Committee Presentation: 10%
- Class Participation: 35%
- Peer feedback from their project teams: 10%
Pre-Requisites
None
Cross-Registrants/Auditors
The course is only open to MBAs and Kennedy School of Government students enrolled in a joint MBA program.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: Life Sciences Venture Creation
Course Number 6756
12 Sessions
Paper
Click here for application due August 16.
Career Focus
Creating, launching and funding Life Sciences ventures is a difficult and daunting task, especially given recent market conditions. This course is a practical, hands-on field course primarily designed for students who are very serious about pursuing entrepreneurship within the life sciences, including therapeutics, medical devices, diagnostics, tools, software & data, contract research/manufacturing and more). The course will feature workshops with practitioners and domain experts providing guidance and exploring how to successfully navigate critical tasks when launching a life sciences venture. These tasks include negotiating licenses for intellectual property, developing clinical budgets and timelines, using these tools to develop a business model and resource the venture, exploring the process of building a syndicate and establishing a board of advisors, finding human talent to accomplish scientific goals, and more. All students interested in this course should have one of the following:
be actively pursuing a job or entrepreneurship in the life sciences post-graduation;
are already actively working on a life sciences company idea or startup;
joining a life sciences company and/or are already working part-time during the school year; or
have previous experience in the life sciences industry.
This field course complements concepts covered in the Entrepreneurship in the Life Sciences course and all other entrepreneurially-focused courses, but with a specific industry focus on the life sciences.
Educational Objectives
This course has been specifically designed to provide hands-on guidance and operational support for students who are seriously pursuing founding or joining life sciences ventures before, upon, or soon after, graduation. Students will learn and develop frameworks, tools, a network, and hands-on experience in critical functions of a life sciences startup, directly preparing them for a career in entrepreneurship in the Life Sciences. Sessions will feature skill-building workshops led by the instructor and outside experts as well as weekly peer-to-peer critiques on work-in-progress. Students are encouraged to work as a cohort to support each other through their networks and to offer insights based on their own experiences. While the course is focused on the life sciences, students need not have a scientific background, merely a passion for making an impact through participation in these ventures.
Course Content
Through hands-on workshops with industry experts and case and/or lecture-based discussions based on a variety of life sciences ventures, students will develop skills across every aspect of the life sciences venture creation landscape. Sectors of life sciences covered include those in biotech, pharmaceutical, medical device, diagnostics, and related supporting tools, technology and services organizations. Students can work on projects alone or in teams within the course. The field course will explore four different modules:
- Pre-Requisites to Fundraise - what will investors or grant-making bodies expect you to bring them, and how to do you build this out in a rational manner that investors will believe; building a business plan; developing budgets and milestones; intellectual property considerations and licensing/creation.
- When, and How, to Raise Funds - what do investors care about when considering a pitch, which investors should you target, how to build a syndicate, and which advisors do you want on board; negotiating term sheets.
- How to Meet Scientific Deadlines - you raised money, and now you need to hit milestones - where and how to build teams or outsource to achieve scientific goals and have success; optimizing capital efficiency; legal and intellectual property development; regulatory considerations.
- Industry Challenges and When to Get Help - when should you worry about regulatory concerns? Who do you hire internally or as a consultant? When and if to outsource to contract research organizations? How do you know what to worry about when you don't know what you don't know that is unique to life sciences ventures?
In most classes, we will have case protagonists and guests, including life sciences entrepreneurs, investors and domain experts so you can engage directly with these practitioners from the burgeoning life sciences venture ecosystem.
Key Learning Objectives include hands-on experience in successfully dealing with:
- Learning to operate and fund life sciences from industry-leading experts
- Avoid making the mistakes of others and learning to innovate in the industry
- Navigating careers within the life sciences
- Building a brand and community within the industry to leverage for help
- Building budgets; licensing/creating intellectual property; legal and regulatory considerations
- Fundraising with angel individuals and venture capital funds/investors
- Explore financing sources and how to practically access them, including early grants, non-dilutive financing sources, equity financing, and more
- Identify best practices for building teams (incl. compensation structures) & boards
- Explore ethical considerations while working in a hot-button field
Grading
The course is highly focused on ensuring each team’s venture evolves towards success criteria unique to their needs based on indication, modality, and requirements. Session participation, including working directly with industry mentors and routine session deliverables, will make up a large portion of the individual grade. All readings and deliverables are designed to move student ventures forward and will be critical to the ventures' successes. Grading will be a combination of class participation (40%), mentorship (bi-weekly summaries of activities, learnings and reflections - 20%), writing assignments (e.g., budget, industry reflections - 20%) and a final written paper (20%).
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: Private Equity Projects and Ecosystems
Course Number 6440
Weekly, two-hour classes
Project/Lecture Series - No Case Studies
Enrollment limited to 50 students
Course Overview
Entering its eleventh year, Private Equity Projects is a hybrid field and lecture series that provides the opportunity to work hands-on with leading private equity firms on "mutual value" projects and learn about the many things critical to success in PE beyond the transaction itself. Over thirty firms have participated, and over 90 percent requested renewed participation.
Through project work, students can "practice private equity" in a setting as close to authentic as possible. Projects will entail many aspects of private equity, and students will work directly with private equity firms and/or portfolio companies. A final presentation is made to a component of the private equity firm investment committee. Project work is designed to be of mutual value to students and the PE partner. Students can list the projects and the PE firm on their resumes upon the partner's review.
The course is structured to expose students to the inner workings of up to ten PE firms at once. Private equity firms hosting student projects for the 2025 year could include Advent, Apollo, Bain Capital, Berkshire Partners, CD&R, Great Hill, KKR, L Catterton, New Mountain, Odyssey, Warburg, Summit Partners, TH Lee, and Warburg. For several years, the course has enjoyed very high ratings from PE firms and students and is an excellent relationship-building opportunity.
Projects range from sector vertical analysis, portfolio operations, re-underwriting failed deals, deal sourcing, platform deal add-on strategies, and more. The workload is carefully managed. In addition to the projects, a very popular slate of PE professionals provides full-class lectures on a variety of PE topics, including Deal Sourcing, Portfolio Operations, Capital Formation, PE CEOs, First Time Funds, Career Management, Recent Alumni Retrospectives, "Getting Paid" and Product Line Extensions. The professor pushes the guests hard to maximize learning for the students.
Professor Dionne also provides a popular weekly Random Musings report based on his recent Blackstone Senior Advisor role, his PE fund formation business, and his directorship of many companies.
A mid-term networking event is held with the local PE community in downtown Boston.
There is virtually no overlap with Starting Your Own Private Investment Firm, which Professor Dionne co-founded as a SIP, and Private Equity Finance.
Who Teaches This Course?
The course will be taught by John Dionne, a Blackstone Senior Advisor and Senior Managing Director for almost 20 years. Mr. Dionne was a Member of the Private Equity and Alternative Credit investment committees and has led investments totaling $4 billion of equity over his career in Distressed and PE investing. He co-founded five multi-billion investment vehicles, including Blackstone's Tactical Opportunities Fund, its Energy Fund, and its Distressed Securities Fund. He has served on fifteen boards and raised over $30 billion in equity capital.
Professor Dionne ensures he is accessible to meet the various needs of his students.
Enrollment
The course could be open for cross-registration; enrollment will be limited to 50 students.
Enrollment by application only: To apply, please submit your CV and a paragraph of interest to this survey by January 5th, 2025. Email Tyler McHugh (tmchugh@hbs.edu) with any questions. Early applicants are encouraged.
Applicants are asked to submit a brief one-page summary explaining their interest in the course.
There are no pre-requisite courses.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: Public Markets Investing Seminar
Course Number 6454
10 Sessions
Project
Course Overview
This course represents a unique opportunity for students to apply the skills learned in the classroom to a real-world public-market investment setting. Students will partner with an investment firm to work directly and deeply on an investment theme or question. In conjunction with their sponsor, students will develop a process and plan and execute it during the 14-week semester.
Dynamic weekly seminars supplement the project work and allow the class to come together to engage with industry leaders, protagonists, and asset allocators.
Students will learn first-hand the challenges and issues surrounding the diligence of an investment idea, the sourcing of opportunities, implementation, and portfolio and risk management. Students will develop and refine their investment process organization, creating a framework for investing. This should allow them to better utilize and develop pattern recognition and allow them to ponder:
What is this firm's edge? How do they add alpha? How is the investment industry changing?
Is the industry in a crisis?
This experience will not only help students shape their skills as investors-- modeling, pitching, participating on an investment committee--but also continue to build perspective on the eco-system of investment management.
Learning Objectives
- Pattern recognition: Refine and develop a framework for investing
- Investment process organization: expose students to the investment process beyond research, from sourcing to implementation
- Develop more robust modeling and pitching skills
- Participate in an investment committee setting
- Work and develop relationships with incredible investors
Course Content
Field-Based Work: Teams of three will work with an investment firm on a specific investment theme or question; students will be allowed to rank top choices from a curated list of projects. Students will meet with their sponsor at least three times during the semester-- an introductory meeting, an in-person, and a final presentation. Students are expected to check in weekly with their sponsor. A final presentation will be given to their sponsors-- presented in front of the investment committee and senior management team. Students are expected to use their time with sponsors to think through and develop a research process, to plan out time management, to better understand other issues surrounding an investment such as legal, trading and risk management. Students should also spend time shadowing other functions within the firm to better grasp the investment process.
The majority of the work on the projects will be done independently by the students using the resources at HBS and from the sponsoring firms. Students must be proactive and motivated; sponsors are giving their time for these projects and students must respect this commitment and deliver a strong product.
Classroom Setting: In addition to the project work, we will meet weekly over the course of the semester. Classroom time will be used for a mix of skill building, guests and time to come together to share challenges, learn from each other and seek feedback across teams. Interactive guest lectures will provide focus on building skills in the investment process from data sourcing and research to risk management and operations to asset allocation. The content of these sessions will help support project work and a deeper understanding of eco-system of investment management. Students will be expected to present once during the semester. There will be a presentation mid-way through the semester to update the class on the project and their firm. Presentations will simulate an investment committee, allowing peers to actively participate in an investment committee-like setting. Teams will be expected to have regular meetings with faculty.
Course Requirements and Grading
In addition to attending all the classroom discussions, students are expected to spend 3-5 hours a week working on their projects. Students will present once over the semester to their peers and give one final presentation to the investment committee of their sponsoring firm.
Students will be asked to submit their final presentation. These materials in combination with classroom participation will determine a student's grade.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: Scaling Minority Businesses
Course Number 6614
Educational Objectives
This course is rooted in the belief that economic justice for communities of color in America hinges on the opportunity to create and scale impactful business enterprises. However, Minority Business Enterprises (MBEs) face economic, sociocultural, and institutional barriers across all phases of entrepreneurship from start-up through scaling and exit. Scaling Minority Businesses (SMB) was created to marshal the intellectual resources and community of Harvard Business School to help MBEs address this challenge. The course pairs teams of second-year MBA students with businesses owned by Black, LatinX, and other entrepreneurs of color to address either a strategic or operational issue faced by the businesses. In the course students draw upon and strengthen their learnings from a range of RC courses including, but not limited to, TEM, Marketing, Strategy, and TOM. As students prepare to become leaders who will make a difference in the world, SMB provides a unique opportunity to both serve and deepen their understanding of the issues facing entrepreneurs who are Black, Indigenous, and People of Color (BIPOC).
Course Content and Organization
The course is a mix of traditional case-based classes and hands-on consulting assignments with MBEs. There are five course modules:
- Historical Perspective
- Access to Capital
- Access to Customers and Markets
- Public Policy
- Allyship
The cases and background readings examine the range of issues faced by MBEs including racial discrimination, limited access to capital, and difficulties in establishing government and corporate supplier relationships. Students hear from a range of speakers, including policy experts and prominent businesspeople, who discuss the challenges and opportunities faced by minority-owned businesses.
The hands-on projects entail students working in small teams with an MBE (typically > $1m in revenue) to tackle a well- defined challenge or growth opportunity. To facilitate collaboration, students are required to sign a non-disclosure agreement covering their work in the course.
Course Requirements and Grading
Deliverables: The course has five deliverables: (1) team launch document, (2) draft presentation, (3) final presentation, (4) peer evaluation, and (5) individual reflection.
Grading: Each student’s grade is based on (1) quality of team’s final presentation and viability of recommendations, (2) class participation, (3) peer evaluation, (4) draft presentation, and (5) personal reflection.
Pre-Requisites
None
Cross-Registrants/Auditors
The course is open to a very limited number of cross-registrants. Auditors are not permitted.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: Startup Operations
Course Number 6673
Two-hour sessions meet on Tuesdays from 3:10-5:10
Applications will be accepted through 5pm ET on August 9, 2024
A maximum of 20 teams/60 students will be accepted into the fall cohort
Application can be found here. Accepted students will be notified by August 21, 2024
Application FAQ can be found here.
All ventures enrolled in the course may be eligible to receive non-dilutive grant funding.
Career Focus
Startup Operations is designed for three types of students:
- Those who have already launched or are about to launch a startup. See the course FAQ for more details about company stage expectations.
- Those who are curious about working for early stage startups or know they want to found a venture but don't have an idea yet.
- Those who are interested in investing in startups.
There is no specific industry focus for this course - all sectors and business models apply - including CPG, social enterprise, nonprofits and bootstrapped businesses.
This field course complements concepts covered in Launching Tech Ventures, Entrepreneurial Sales and Marketing, and Founders Mindset.
Educational Objectives
This course is designed to provide hands-on guidance through the early stages of building your business. Students will test assumptions and hypotheses to evolve their product, build their strategic and operating roadmaps, create organizational plans and develop skills necessary to manage the many complexities of operating a startup. Sessions will feature skill-building exercises led by the instructor and outside experts as well as weekly peer-to-peer critiques on work-in-progress. Students are encouraged to work as a cohort to support each other through their networks and to offer insights based on their own experiences.
Students who successfully complete Startup Operations will be eligible to apply for the Startup Operations Studio course 6675 offered in the spring.
Course Content
Through a series of class exercises and intimate conversations with experienced startup leaders, students examine operational challenges in early stage startups. Enrolled students’ ventures are “live” cases in the course, thus each student will not only learn through the startup they are working on, but through the 19 other startups in the course. Taking the perspective that there is more to just “build it and they will come”, the course will explore four modules:
- Getting To Product Market Fit: Exploring best practices for customer feedback, solution iteration, metrics that matter and developing a product and operations roadmap.
- Establishing The Startup Organization: Structuring early teams and the processes by which to operate your business. Topics will include: Who to hire and when - from technical hires and managing freelancers/first hires to product managers, operations, support and other key team members. Cross-functional communication from across and between the organization to external communication with customers, partners and investors - and role shifting as the organization scales.
- Startup Business Operations We will explore legal matters, budgets, contracts and early go-to-market strategies such as pricing and product marketing. We will also discuss the why/when/hows of raising venture capital.
- Startup Evolution As companies grow and scale, operations and products will evolve. We will explore when and how to pivot, shift and adapt to these changes as your companies evolve.
The course is highly focused on ensuring each team’s business evolves towards success criteria unique to their product and organization. Therefore, each team will build a Goals & Milestones plan as their first deliverable. The work to achieve these milestones will be a large percentage of the course grade. Session participation, including weekly peer-to-peer critiques, routine session deliverables, and a final reflection will make up the remaining elements of the individual grade. Light weekly readings, podcasts and films will be required in prep for each session. All readings and deliverables are designed to move student companies forward.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: Startup Operations Studio (SOS)
Course Number 6675
Two-hour sessions meet every other Tuesday from 3:10-5:10
Project
Application Only - Students enrolled in Field Course: Startup Operations in the fall term will be eligible to apply for enrollment in SOS
Career Focus
The Startup Operations Studio is for students who have successfully completed Startup Operations in the fall term as either founders or joiners. Auditors who attended at least 12 of the 14 sessions in the fall may also enroll. The course will continue to provide the structure and community offered in Startup Operations to ensure each student/team is focused on key milestones tailored to their particular venture. Through course sessions, students will continue to build practical skills to lead and operate their entrepreneurial venture.
Students may enroll as individuals or as a team. Team members who did not complete Startup Operations, but who are HBS students (or qualified cross-registrants) may apply as long as one team member who completed Startup Operations also applies for enrollment in the course.
Educational Objectives & Course Content
This course meets every other week and is designed to continue the hands-on guidance through the early stages of building your venture. Session content will be via the critique (or “crits”) format used in Startup Operations. Crits are essentially live case scenarios brought into the classroom by the students enrolled in the course. These scenarios are based on real-time challenges students are facing while building their ventures. These scenarios both allow students to help each other through their own experiences and networks, but also insight potential challenges they may face in the near future.
Other course features include an engaging community slack group with both current students and alumni, community events such as coffees, lunches and dinners to foster community and ongoing peer support/mentorship with the instructor. We will also offer small group sessions for students sharing specific challenges - for example, supply-chain management or pitch practice sessions for various contests. These special sessions will be scheduled and facilitated by the instructor.
Course Deliverables
The course is specifically focused on ensuring each student/team’s venture evolves towards goals unique to their product and organization. Therefore, each student/team will set 2-3 venture goals for the term and meeting these goals will be a large percentage of the course grade. Session participation, including
peer-to-peer critiques, attending four student/team check-ins with the instructor throughout the term and a final deliverable demonstrating goal achievement will make up the remaining elements of the individual grade.
Eligible students enrolled in the course will receive a modest grant.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: Transforming Health Care Delivery
Course Number 6215
Project
(Requires Q3 course 2195: Transforming Health Care Delivery as prerequisite)
At the root of the transformation occurring in the health care industry—both in the United States and internationally—is the fundamental challenge of improving clinical outcomes while controlling costs. Addressing this challenge will require dramatic improvements in the processes by which care is delivered to patients. This, in turn, will involve novel technologies, fundamentally different approaches to care delivery, a rethinking of incentives, and new roles for individuals and organizations throughout the health care sector. This course will equip students with strategies and tools to help navigate the ever-changing landscape of the health care industry.
Career Focus
This course is appropriate for students interested in understanding the fundamental improvement challenges facing the health care sector and developing strategies for addressing them. Students may have career interests in organizations that provide health care (e.g., hospitals, medical groups, retail clinics) or in firms that partner with, supply, consult to, or invest in such organizations (e.g., payers, biopharmaceutical and device companies, health information technology, venture capital and private equity).
Educational Objectives
This course will help students develop the managerial skills required to identify and implement transformational change. It will draw upon a range of approaches for improving value in health care delivery, including continuous improvement, organizational redesign, population health management, precision medicine, patient engagement, digital health, payment reform, and the creation of appropriate incentives for value delivery and innovation. For each of these approaches, the course will emphasize the importance of identifying improvement opportunities, implementing relevant changes, and measuring their effects on performance.
Course Faculty
The course will be co-taught by Susanna Gallani and Robert Huckman.
Susanna Gallani is the Tai Family Associate Professor of Business Administration. Her research focuses on performance management systems in health care organizations and how these systems operate to align behaviors, measure, and reward performance. Themes that are central to her interests include the role that performance management systems play in improving health care value, enhancing health equity, and reducing workplace burnout.
Robert Huckman is Albert J. Weatherhead III Professor of Business Administration, the Howard Cox Faculty Chair of the HBS Health Care Initiative, and the Unit Head for Technology and Operations Management. He studies topics related to performance improvement, digital innovation, and consumer engagement in health care. He is a member of the Board of Trustees of Brigham and Women’s Hospital and serves as an advisor to several private health care companies.
Course Format and Grading
Transforming Health Care Delivery is composed of two half-courses: (1) a case-based course in Q3 and (2) a field course built around strategic projects with local Boston-area hospitals in Q4. The Q3 course is a prerequisite for the Q4 course. For additional information about the Q3 course, please see the description for 2195—Transforming Health Care Delivery.
Students will work in teams of 4-5 students on a field project with a local health care organization in the Boston area. Projects will be sourced by the faculty. Students will be assigned to projects based on preferences they submit early in the semester. Students will prepare a brief write-up summarizing their key learnings and reflections from the field project. Teams will present their projects at the end of the semester to their classmates and representatives of the sponsoring organizations. Evaluations will be based on the write-up, presentation, and participation during other teams’ presentations.
The Q4 course will meet for occasional check-ins during designated class time; for the most part, the course’s scheduled class time can thus be used at the team’s discretion for meetings or interviews with project sponsors. A required project poster session will be scheduled during one class session in the middle of Q4. In this session, teams will exchange feedback on outlines of their projects. The final 2-3 scheduled class sessions of the term will be required and reserved for team presentations.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: The United States and China: Challenges for your Business
Course Number 6575
Limited sessions
Group project: Business plan/case study
(3 credits total with Doing Business with China 2035 [1575])
This Q4 class focuses on the strategies of firms as they navigate an ever more challenging political and regulatory landscape in both China and the United States. The class is an optional continuation of Q3, designed for students, working individually or in groups, who wish to pursue an advanced project, under faculty guidance. It assists students who wish to pursue business opportunities in or with Greater China (the People’s Republic, Taiwan, and Hong Kong), or for Greater China-based businesses that seek to expand internationally, particularly in the United States. It presumes basic knowledge of the Chinese business, economic, and political scene, as taught in Doing Business with China.
Students are encouraged to research and write an HBS-like case on a company or sector that must deal with the political and business risks of today's geopolitics. The project may also take the form of a business plan for an enterprise in China, Hong Kong, or Taiwan; or of a Chinese firm in the United States. Students will work closely with faculty to identify a topic and relevant source materials.
Career Focus
Entrepreneurship, internationally (with focus on opportunities in Greater China and on Chinese businesses going international)
Educational Objectives
To integrate area-specific knowledge and risk factors (business, cultural, and political environments) with fundamental business planning.
Course Content and Organization
Faculty-guided independent research in groups; group presentations and critiques.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Field Course: Value Creation in Small and Medium Firms
Course Number 6453
12 2-hour Sessions
Paper
Overview:
VCSME is a field course focused on operating and creating value in small and medium firms. Most of the sessions and lessons are taught through the lens of Entrepreneurship through Acquistion (EtA), but the lessons learned can be applied to many career paths and jobs. While not a prerequisite, many students who take VCSME have taken Financial Management of Small Firms (FMFS) in the fall semester. Students often take VCSME together with the field course Entrepreneurship through Acquisition (EtA).
Career Focus:
This course is geared towards students interested in Entrepreneurship through Acquisition including Search Funds, Self Funded search, and other EtA models. While the course is taught through the lens of EtA, the operating, leadership, and value creation lessons can be applied to many different career paths in management and investing.
Educational Objectives:
The educational objectives are to experience practical and theoretical models of value creation in small and medium firms. While small firms differ in industry, size, and complexity, there are many common themes that entrepreneurs focus on to drive value creation. Class sessions include a combination of vignette (mini-case) discussions, class exercises, role playing, and heavy guest participation. The course concept is to “bring the field to the students”.
Course Content and Organization:
Selected course sessions:
1. First day speech role play and early actions post acquisition
2. Financial systems, accounting, and metrics
3. Difficult conversations: Demotion, termination, star performer feedback
4. Hiring, recruiting talent to small firms, leading “A” players
5. Sales and building sales organizations in small firms
6. Growth through acquisition
7. CEO prioritization and Culture
8. Capital allocation
9. Selling your company and life post exit
Grading / Course Administration:
Grading is 50% based on class participation, 25% of pre-class assignments, and 25% final project (individual or teams of two).
Field Course: Venture Capital Journey
Course Number 6728
Paper
Please see this video for more on this course.
The application is due August 19 at 5:00 PM ET.
Course Description
Taught by practitioner Jeff Bussgang (Flybridge co-founder and general partner), Field Course: Venture Capital Journey (VCJ) is designed for a group of EC students who are serious about pursuing a career in venture capital – most of our students will enter the course (1) with previous VC experience as pre-MBA analysts, summer associates, or VC interns/scouts; (2) actively pursuing a VC job post-graduation; (3) having already secured a VC job post-graduation; or (4) starting their own VC fund.
Note that one of the goals of the course is to expand access and inclusion to the field of venture capital. Thus, the selection of students in the course will be intentionally diverse and include both students who came from the field as well as those who are keenly interested in the field, having had exposure during their time at HBS through RC courses like TEM and Finance 101/102 and fall EC courses like VCPE.
The focus of the course is to provide students with frameworks, tools, a network, and hands on experience in preparation for a career in venture capital (VC), ranging from seed to growth stage. The course will help students more deeply understand the conceptual underpinnings of venture capital investing and startup company financing. In so doing, we aspire to prepare students for a career in venture capital, with a particular focus on their personal and professional growth and fulfillment. Further, we will provide a “systems thinking” lens to the industry and prepare them to positive actors in the global VC / startup ecosystem as future investors and entrepreneurs.
The course builds on eight years of running the popular Rock Venture Partners (RVP) program, which had been organized as a series of year-long independent projects for students. The RVP program and the collection of IPs associated with it will cease to exist and will be superseded by this course.
In VCJ, students will learn all aspects of the venture capital process, including:
- Deal sourcing
- Developing an investment thesis
- Conducting due diligence
- Investment decision making
- Determining valuation and negotiating terms
- Constructing and managing a portfolio
- Board work
- Managing a firm
Further, students will have the opportunity to step back and learn about:
- Navigating a career in VC, including how to select a firm to join (with particular considerations to firm size, sector, geography, corporate vs. institutional), negotiate compensation, get promoted, and build a career and life in the industry.
- Brand building, community/content creation, and the opportunities and risks of leveraging various social media channels.
- The VC “tech stack” and relevant tools of the trade (e.g., Affinity, Carta, CB Insights, Pitchbook)
- Fundraising with high net worth and institutional Limited Partners (LPs) and how funds evolve over time.
- Recent innovations, including the role of incubators and accelerators, investor/operator funds, rolling funds, the globalization of the industry, and specific investment trends and innovation waves (e.g., web3/NFTs, blockchain, creator economy, tough tech, CRISPR and personalized medicine, health tech, fintech, investing in emerging markets).
- Ethical considerations, biases, and the racial/gender capital gap in the VC ecosystem
The course will consist of three components:
- Classroom activities – classes will be a mix of case discussions, interactive workshops, and expert panel sessions.
- Projects – students will work on projects at VC firms (typically sourcing deals, developing investment theses, and/or assisting with due diligence) or at an early-stage startup where their primary role will be to assist the startup in raising VC or – under the supervision of a VC mentor or faculty member – independent, self-guided thesis development focused on a particular sector.
- Networking / Site Visits – students will meet in the field with VC partners and principals to get a sense of the different strategies that different firms employ as well as to build their individual networks, with a particular focus on deeper exposure to the Boston and NYC startup ecosystems (in person) as well as Miami and SF (virtually).
The class will meet for 90 minutes once a week during the fall term (Q1 and Q2) and require a project as described above.
The course will be capped at 30 students and will be application-based.
Grading will be as follows:
- 30% class participation
- 30% projects/independent research (based on bi-weekly summaries of activities, learnings, and reflections)
- 20% writing assignments (e.g., investment memo, industry reflections)
- 20% final paper (e.g., sector analysis, personal reflection)
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Financial Management of Smaller Firms
Course Number 1452
28 Sessions
Exam
Career Focus
This course is suitable for anyone who is interested in owning, managing or investing in smaller businesses.
Educational Objectives
The course focuses on how to manage smaller businesses with an emphasis on the financial aspects of buying and growing these businesses. The cases are designed to give students practical knowledge that will be immediately helpful if they plan to own or manage a small business, provide consulting or financial services to these businesses, or invest in smaller businesses. These smaller businesses are privately owned, are typically led by a CEO/entrepreneur supported by a very small management team, produce a service or product for which a current profitable business model exists (as distinct from many VC-backed developmental businesses), and frequently the businesses are of a scale that they can be acquired and owned by individuals instead of institutions or families. The managerial and financial challenges for these firms are different from those of larger, public firms and often require a different approach because of their small scale, lack of liquidity and the difficulty of attracting and deploying capital. The careers of small business entrepreneurs are also very different from the employees of larger firms, and we explore those differences through numerous guests and a few cases that focus on the advantages and disadvantages of the career choice.
Click on this link to see comments of former HBS students who discuss why they chose a career in entrepreneurship through acquisition: https://courseware.hbs.edu/video/?v=0_cteitfd6
Course Content and Organization
The course first focuses on how to buy a small business. We begin with the case of two HBS MBAs who chose to purchase a small business using a search fund instead of pursuing a more traditional career path. The case tracks their search process and highlights the challenges encountered when acquiring a small business. We then learn about different ways to fund a search through five other acquisitions by HBS graduates. We then focus on the market for smaller firms including cases about private equity firms that operates in the small business market.
We then focus on how to successfully manage the financial aspects of smaller firms. We explore the difficulty of growing these firms and explore which business models are more likely to succeed. And, of course, we explore how these businesses finance themselves as they grow. These smaller firms, unlike bigger firms, often face tradeoffs between liquidity and profitability, and a common feature of successful firms seems to be a willingness to sacrifice profitability for liquidity. These tradeoffs are particularly relevant to acquisitions made by recent MBA graduates as they navigated through the Great Recession and COVID. We discuss four recent acquisitions that faced significant financial hurdles.
We study capital investment decisions made by smaller businesses, decisions that emphasize financial capacity and lifestyle choices instead of maximizing market value. We study alternative growth strategies including approaches to sales force management in the context of a smaller firm. We also learn about the special problems that confront smaller business such as customer concentration and conflicts between outside investors and managers.
We conclude the course with integrative cases that follow the experience of entrepreneurs as they search for a smaller company, acquire it and grow it successfully, and then confront the decision of when to sell the business so that they can realize the benefits of their entrepreneurial venture.
The course is a prerequisite for the EC field course, Entrepreneurship through Acquisition, which is offered in the spring term.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
The Founder Mindset
Course Number 1676
28 Sessions
Paper/Project
Course Description
Almost all human endeavors start with a Founder—a person who is willing to challenge the status quo, question prevailing wisdom on what is possible, and change our world. Founders notice problems and can see a potential solution that improves the lives of those around them. It’s an extraordinarily attractive proposition to so many, yet so few people are successful in accomplishing this goal.
A founder needs to make difficult decisions in the face of great uncertainty and massively imperfect information. How does one, often with relatively little experience, develop and exercise the judgement to make these decisions? This course will lead a discussion around The Founder Mindset and the characteristics that enables one to build businesses of significance and make a meaningful difference in the world.
Why Learn About The Founder Mindset?
The course examines the choices all founders make when starting and building a venture, and provides helpful frameworks and practical tips and tools for building, scaling, and eventually exiting the business. How do you assemble, motivate and lead a team when you have big ambitions, limited resources, and a compass instead of a map? The course will walk you through practical actions, such as selecting a team, choosing a business model, and what to consider when choosing a co-founder and writing a founders’ agreement. You’ll learn tactics for dealing with difficult situations, like firing an employee, pivoting your business model, or selling/closing the business. The course supplements case studies and discussions with simulations and role-plays, where you will be faced with challenging situations and forced to make difficult decisions. You will gain a sense of the intense pressures, difficult decisions, and extremes—highs and lows—that every founder confronts in some way.
We analyze certain pivotal choices made by over 20 founders who set out to change the world in small and big ways. We meet a Lebanese young woman who spent 10 years making the perfect swimming goggle, and we look at the journeys of people who want to save human civilization by moving to Mars or reversing climate change. We see the strange twists of fate that resulted in iconic companies like Tinder, Tesla, and Pandora. We will try to tease apart the business model and financing choices that contributed to the outcome. In most cases, the pivotal choices these founders made have their roots in “people decisions.” Yet most founders (and VCs) pay less attention to the "people" choices that are critical to success.
In this course, you will think about: How should teams be structured? How can a founder see his or her own blind spots? Can you augment a founder’s weaknesses by hiring a complimentary team? When should a CEO be replaced?
We observe how both successes and failures have common antecedents. We look at the journeys of people who have succeeded because of the way they handled their failures. We will discuss the importance of exercising judgment and making consequential decisions, all with imperfect information and insufficient resources. We will also explore the power of commitment. Despite different outcomes, each founder has made a difference that others can build on. And, by pushing their intellectual and emotional limits, founders usually emerge stronger and more resilient. The Founder Mindset is a course about this human journey to make a difference in the world.
Who Should Take This Course?
The course provides a strong conceptual foundation and practical tools for addressing common situations in entrepreneurship. In particular, this course should appeal to anyone interested in being a founder and creating something of significance. In addition, anyone interested in being involved with high-growth ventures, working with entrepreneurs as investors or advisors, working in entrepreneurial environments that are dynamic, complex and changing, or even just cultivating your own Founder Mindset can benefit from this course.
Course Structure
The course is structured into five modules that represent roughly five critical decisions that together form The Founder Mindset: Idea Generation & Commitment, Founding Team, Raising Money, Difficult Decisions, and Equity Value Creation. Each module addresses specific issues—such as choosing co-founders, negotiating equity, hiring, firing, working with your board, and building your team—that occur primarily in that stage.
- IDEA GENERATION & COMMITMENT focuses on early critical decisions a founder makes regarding idea selection and commitment. It examines the stress of maintaining outward positivity in the face of constant adversity and uncertainty, and how important it is to display commitment.
- FOUNDING TEAM explores the importance of hiring right, building a strong team, and establishing trust in your co-founder relationship.
- RAISING MONEY widens the perspective to consider how a founder should approach raising financing and how the organization should be structured so that it can deliver a product or service reliably.
- DIFFICULT DECISIONS addresses many of the perennial questions of entrepreneurship: “Should I persist, pivot, or perish (close the business)”? “How do I fire employees?” What does it mean to “fail well?”
- EQUITY VALUE CREATION addresses the cases where founders are challenged with the growth of their firms and the requirement to deliver financially, answering questions like where should the CEO focus, what metrics matter, are your actions value accretive or destructive, do you grow or exit, and is all value-creation monetary?
Course Requirements
Classes include case discussions, workshops, and team exercises that require your active participation. In addition to case discussions, you will be asked to deliver a pitch, conduct peer interviews, and reflect on your learning. There is no final exam, but instead a final project in which you will either deliver a comprehensive pitch or share how The Founder Mindset will help you achieve a greater impact.
Required Materials
You should come to class having already completed the assignment due for that day. That may entail reading cases or other required readings, watching videos, and/or participating in an activity.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Generative AI for Business Leaders
Course Number 1301
Project
Course Overview
Generative AI (GenAI) stands at the forefront of a technological revolution, poised to redefine how businesses operate and deliver value. This course delves into critical questions at the heart of this transformation: How will GenAI reshape modern enterprise? What strategies should businesses adopt to integrate this technology effectively? How can existing data be leveraged to unlock new opportunities? What are the ethical and regulatory issues to consider?
These questions are pivotal whether you aspire to be a corporate innovator driving AI initiatives or a startup founder focused on the burgeoning GenAI market. Understanding the complexities of GenAI goes beyond using ChatGPT-type applications and prompt engineering. It requires immersive engagement in building with the technology, putting oneself in the decision-maker's shoes, and grappling with how GenAI can solve business challenges and opportunities.
This course offers an active learning environment where you will explore these questions through hands-on experience, directly linking conceptual understanding to business use cases. Whether you are a GenAI novice or possess some technical knowledge, this course is designed to enrich your understanding and prepare you for leadership in the GenAI-driven business landscape. You don’t need to know coding to take this class.
Educational Objectives
Our goal in this course is to deep dive into how Generative AI technology is driving rapid change across industries, companies, and business functions. We will examine this in a few different ways:
- Gain a good understanding of the technology and how it works. You'll do this by build a production scale Gen AI application using a no code platform. The HBS digital transformation (DTX) team will assist in the delivery fot he project.
- Learn about the basic foundations of the technology as well as the latest developments such as agentic applications, etc.
- A strategic focus on how Gen AI has the potential to disrupt business models. How can businesses improve productivity and efficiency using Gen AI? How can businesses innovate using gen AI?
- How are business functions changing because of Gen AI? We'll focus on marketing, consulting, R&D, etc.
- Gen AI is influencing a wide range of industries. We'll identify drivers of change across a range of industries (e.g., professional services, news media, education, advertising, software, and healthcare).
- Governance of Gen AI, risk management, responsible and ethical AI issues.
- Implications for Start-Ups and early stage investors. How to build and scale a Gen AI start-up and how to develop an investment thesis (whether as a VC or as a founder) for an early stage company.
- Emerging trends, ecosystems, and shifts poised to shape the next era of generative AI.
- The cases and protagonists are selected to highlight how organizations are using Gen-AI to boost efficiency, personalization, and innovation. These include large companies and start-ups.
Hands-on Projects
You will do a project designed to give you hands-on practice in learning how the technology works and how to build applications. The project is geared to proving you the capabilities to become an effective Gen AI product manager. You'll also do assignments geared to giving you the tools to do any professional work better and faster using the latest Gen AI tools. The final course project will allow you to apply the learnings from the course in a comprehensive setting to analyze the impact of Gen AI for a company or business function.
You will have access to HBS Enterprise GPT account and no code Gen AI builder tools for the course project.
Classroom Conduct and Grading Guidelines
- I expect full attendance by all students in all sessions. We only have 12 sessions for a packed agenda of content.
- The grading distribution is as follows:
Grading:
- 50% class participation
- 50% project
- The use of generative AI is not just encouraged but required for class preparation and all class assignments.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Global Trade, Capital and National Institutions
Course Number 1565
14 Sessions
Exam
Course Overview
This course addresses the opportunities created by the emergence of a global economy and proposes strategies for managing the risks associated with globalization. The course focuses on the opportunities and threats created by the flow of goods, services, and international capital across countries. International trade and capital flows can significantly affect the countries’ development efforts and provide clear investment opportunities for businesses. This course examines the determinants of competitiveness and economic development and challenges students to understand the role of micro and macro policies.
During the 1990s and early 2000s, the world witnessed an explosion in trade and capital flows at the global level. This explosive growth, especially in emerging markets, has been fueled by changes in world politics (e.g., the end of the Cold War, the collapse of the Soviet Union, the shifting political climate in China, and political changes in Latin America and Asia) falling restrictions and advances in technology. The resulting ability to retain or outsource various subsets of production stages within firm and country boundaries fueled the fragmentation of production and the emergence of global value chains. A key driver of this phenomenon is the cross-border production, investment, and trade in final and intermediate goods led by Multinational Corporations (MNCs). Foreign direct investment (FDI) became the dominant source of foreign private capital for many emerging markets, promising additional productivity gains for recipient countries.
Gains from globalization and technology, more generally, can have different allocations and distributive effects. Indeed, rising inequality, the weak labor market performance for workers at the lower end of the skill spectrum, the Global Financial Crisis of 2008-2009, the COVID pandemic, wars, terrorist’ attacks, and security concerns have come together to foster growing concern against globalization in certain segments of the population in various countries. After decades of increasing global economic integration, the world faces the risk of fragmentation. The reevaluation of global value chains intertwines deeply with a broader backlash against globalization in numerous developed nations. Recent policies, including tariffs, trade restrictions, and domestic subsidies, have been justified as a way to reduce risks by reshoring and “friendshoring” supply chains. The cases in the module study how changes in the economic, social, and political environments can challenge previously institutional structures creating new opportunities and risks. More generally, gains from globalization and technology can have different allocations and distributive effects. The cases in the module study how changes in the economic, social, and political environments can challenge previously institutional structures, creating new opportunities and risks.
The course emphasizes both the economic consequences of policies and the political and institutional context in which they are established and implemented. The material thus bridges a gap between firm- and household-level behavior, which is typically well understood by a managerial audience, and aggregate phenomena, which are often less understood by this audience.
Career Focus: The course is intended for students who expect to have careers influenced by international trends.
Educational Objectives
The course has been designed to give students an appreciation of the critical role of institutions and policies in affecting patterns of international trade, services, and capital flows and the government's abilities to manage them effectively. The course is tied together by two broad themes: (1) the determinants and effects of globalization and (2) policy-makers management of the effects of globalization. The cases approach these themes by exposing students to key recent events that have shaped how economists think about these subjects. The events covered have a clear global perspective as the cases are set worldwide.
The course also covers events from the last three decades, as they affect today’s business environment and reveal the cyclical nature of international capital flows.
The course pushes students to critically examine whether the main challenges for the future of globalization are institutional and political in nature or technology by studying the process of globalization in recent decades. The strategies of firms, the vitality of clusters, and the quality of the business environment in which competition occurs are important to determine a nation’s or region’s productivity. The course encourages students to consider fundamental characteristics of international trade and financial system: effects of trade, capital flows, why cycles in international capital flows recur, and how sovereign debt and domestic debt differ from each other in their contracts, explicit and implicit, and their enforcement.
The course also teaches students key insights from the field of international economics. First, economists have conventionally viewed trade policy preferences as being driven by whether openness to trade aligns with one’s economic self-interest, by concerns about the impact of trade on broader society, or by one’s socio-political identity. Second, trade in goods differs from trade in financial assets: a financial transaction inherently involves a commitment to pay at a later date. Financial transactions are, therefore, fundamentally affected by problems of asymmetric information and the risk that the contract will not be enforced, and both problems are exacerbated at the international level. Third, International financial flows are affected by two additional macroeconomic risks that are absent within countries: sovereign risk and the use of different currencies. International capital flows imply additional policy challenges for countries as policy-makers face a difficult trade-off among three objectives: monetary policy autonomy, and stable fixed makers face a difficult trade-off among three objectives: monetary policy autonomy, a stable fixed exchange rate, and free capital mobility. Research has demonstrated that local conditions- political objectives, financial markets, firms, and institutions for effective- decisively influence the operation of these basic macroeconomic logics in actual practice. As a whole, the course emphasizes the importance of domestic institutions for effective macroeconomic policy-making, capacious regulations, credible policy commitment, and attracting and using foreign direct investment efficiently.
In modern international competition, the roles of key stakeholders, including companies, governments, NGOs, and multilateral agencies, have shifted and expanded, and the traditional separation between them works against successful economic development. Additionally, the ability to mount and sustain a competitive strategy for a nation or region is a daunting challenge. The cases pay particular attention to the role of globalization, trade, and capital flows in shaping economic outcomes. The course will explore not only theory and policy but also the practical implications for all stakeholders.
Course Content and Organization
Global Trade, Capital, and National Institutions focuses on the costs and benefits of international capital and the policies utilized to make it work. The course is composed of three intellectual segments.
- The module Determinants and Effects of Globalization studies both potentially positive and negative effects in host economies of opening up. In particular, the cases analyze the effects of trade and capital flows in the development efforts of countries, with an emphasis on global value chains and FDI (which has become the main source of private flows to emerging markets) and the policies to attract and maximize FDI’s benefits. In addition, the cases in this first segment explore the effects of international capital flows in the context of financial crises.
- The second segment of the course, Policies and Strategies for Harnessing the Benefits of Financial Globalization, focuses on strategies to harness the benefits of financial globalization and minimize potential risks. The cases cover policies regarding the management of trade using trade agreements and capital inflows using capital controls, the choice of exchange rate regimes, and policies associated with the management of sovereign defaults. The module ends with a discussion of the effects of transfers of capital and debt relief between rich and poor countries.
- The last segment of the course, Global Challenges Ahead, studies the cases of the largest economies in the world. Because of their economic importance and political power, the policy options available to these countries and their effects are in many ways different from the standard “small open economy” cases analyzed in the course.
Administration
Grading: based on class participation (50%) and a final (50%).
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Globalization and Emerging Markets
Course Number 1151
27 Sessions
Final Exam
Career Focus
Globalization and Emerging Markets is designed for students who will be investing, managing a business or nonprofit, or working for a government in an emerging or frontier market, as well as for those who wish to acquire a richer conceptual understanding of the nature of capitalism, globalization, and economic development worldwide. The unit of analysis of the course ranges from the international system as a whole through individual countries, alone and in comparative perspective, to multinational and domestic companies operating in emerging markets. Students are asked to adopt the perspective of different decision-makers, such as politicians, technocrats, investors, and managers. For instance, students may have to take the perspective of a large-cap mining firm in Mongolia, a domestic conglomerate in the Philippines, a muckraking foreign-run hedge fund in Russia, or the Prime Minister of Bhutan considering the development of a new hydropower project. Most of the cases are set beyond the so-called BRICs of Brazil, Russia, India, and China, in today’s “frontier” markets that are only beginning to attract the attention of mainstream investors, and some are purposefully historical in order to give insight into the evolution of the world economy and the strategies once pursued by states and companies in currently developed countries when they first emerged. The course should, in short, appeal to anyone considering spending part of their career working, investing, or thinking outside of the major developed markets.
Educational Objectives
The majority of economic growth is now occurring in countries that are not historically wealthy high-income democracies, and where many of the textbook assumptions regarding how markets function—such as the enforcement of contracts, anti-trust laws, universally low or absent tariffs, governments acting as referees rather than players—often do not hold. These trends and characteristics provide a unique set of opportunities for entrepreneurs and investors in the developed world and within emerging markets themselves, as well as for politicians and stakeholders searching for paths to development. But they also introduce significant risk for those doing business in the developing world. GEM provides frameworks to understand the processes of economic growth and development; to develop contextual intelligence regarding emerging markets; to manage within a weaker or less formalized institutional environment; and to think globally and dynamically about capitalism.
Course Organization
GEM consists of three interrelated modules that consider growth and business opportunities in emerging markets from complementary perspectives. First, we work through a framework to understand the process of economic growth and development, and in so doing develop the ability to analyze an emerging market at the level of the country. Second, we examine companies that need to understand this macro view in order to make cross-industry investment decisions as well as navigate the unique contexts of emerging market. The final module looks at the relationship between states and markets in globalization and between the developed and developing parts of the world economy. The course uses a variety of country and company cases from more than 20 different emerging and frontier markets to accomplish these objectives. The cases range from country cases on some of the fastest-growing economies in the world to cases on mining, gas, banking, infrastructure, retail, technology, tourism, private equity, and hedge fund companies operating in emerging markets.
Other EC courses that complement this course:
Energy, MITI, IMaGE, and BBOP.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
IFC: Europe; Decarbonization and Sustainable Production
Course Number 6078
Fall On-Campus Course Sessions: Thursday sessions; September 12, September 19, October 10, November 14, November 21, and December 5; 3:10 PM - 5:10 PM plus two office hour check-in meetings
Travel Dates: Arrive: Sunday, January 5, 2025 and Depart Wednesday, January 15
Course Fee: $3,500
Immersive Field Courses: IFCs require a firm commitment and carry a financial obligation. Financial aid is available in the form of a student loan, a need-based HBS scholarship, or a combination of both depending on your individual circumstances. The Add/Drop process at the start of the term is the mechanism for any IFC enrollment changes, and, after that point, the course fee is non-refundable. Refer to the GEO website for full details on IFCs and be sure you understand the Course Policies and Course Fee & Financial Aid. Visit IFC Financial Aid for a quick assessment to determine your eligibility and process or contact finaid@hbs.edu for more information.
Enrollment: Limited to 45 MBA students (due to the nature of IFCs, auditing is not permitted)
Career Focus
Decarbonization and sustainability are becoming an essential part of business agendas, and some companies and organizations in Europe lead the world in experimentation and implementation of green technologies. Our focus will span four important sectors: energy, transport, agriculture, and materials. Our objective is to curate visits that help us develop the most insight into critical issues around decarbonization. In prior years this IFC has focused on Demark and Netherlands, but for 2025 we are planning to add sites in Belgium.
The Netherlands is a global leader in horticulture and food system sustainability. While it only has 5% of the population of the U.S., it is the second largest food exporter in the world, trailing only the U.S. It is recognized for its track record of innovation and productivity growth, increasing outputs while reducing inputs like pesticides. We will explore environmental sustainability aspects, innovations that can be extended to other global contexts, and examine some of the challenges currently facing the sector.
The materials sector includes things like cement and steelmaking, two large contributors to greenhouse gas (GHG) emissions. We are trying to arrange visits to pilot projects in Belgium. We are also going to visit sites to examine ocean borne shipping, a hard to decarbonize sector.
This EC Field Course offering a unique educational experience, where students will get to observe and interact with business leaders engaged in decarbonization including renewable energy production and storage, and sustainable production of industrial and consumer goods.
Group presentations on core topics and visit site briefings will be required during the Fall to enable everyone to be well prepared for the visits, which allows students to fully focus on the visits during January. In January, we will ask for short daily reflections.
Educational Objectives
Students will gain insight into the opportunities and challenges associated with designing, producing, distributing, and storing renewable energy, as well as developing and implementing sustainable production technologies in industries ranging from consumer goods to food and horticulture. We will visit firms and projects that have pioneered or are experimenting with sustainable technologies.
Course Content and Organization
Fall class sessions will be discussions—based on cases, readings, and student presentations—designed to establish a grounding in basic technologies. We may also engage with guests brought in remotely.
The January 2025 trip will includes visits to a wide range of unique sites that will illustrate the breadth of opportunities. This 3:10 video will give you a taste for 2024 visits. While we plan to visit some of the sites shown here, we plan to incorporate changes for 2025 as we explore new areas.
Paper Preparation and Presentation
Students will be asked to work in small teams to prepare a presentation and paper on a topic related to our visits chosen from a list of options.
Course Credit and Fees
Students will receive 3 credits upon successful completion of this course.
HBS will provide logistical support for the immersion (including accommodations, select meals, and local travel arrangements). Students will be charged a course fee towards defraying a portion of these costs. Students are responsible for booking and paying for their own round-trip air travel and any costs associated with required visa documentation and immunizations. Students should ensure adequate processing time for all visas, as travel fees are not refundable if a student does not secure visas on time.
For detailed information about what the course program fee includes and excludes, as well as information about student accommodations, please visit the GEO website or email geo@hbs.edu.
GEO continuously evaluates the safety and logistical feasibility of running Immersive Field Courses in each location. Please be aware that IFCs can be canceled at any time due to changes in global health and safety or other unforeseen circumstances. Students will not be redistributed into another IFC, nor will a new course be developed. Course fees will be refunded.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
IFC: Ghana; Africa Rising
Course Number 6057
Fall On-Campus Course Sessions: Thursday sessions: October 31, November 7, November 14, November 21, and December 5 from 3:10PM-5:10PM.
Travel Dates: Arrive Sunday, January 5 and Depart Wednesday, January 15
Course Fee: $4,000
Immersive Field Courses: IFCs require a firm commitment and carry a financial obligation. Financial aid is available in the form of a student loan, a need-based HBS scholarship, or a combination of both depending on your individual circumstances. The Add/Drop process at the start of the term is the mechanism for any IFC enrollment changes, and, after that point, the course fee is non-refundable. Refer to the GEO website for full details on IFCs and be sure you understand the Course Policies and Course Fee & Financial Aid. Visit IFC Financial Aid for a quick assessment to determine your eligibility and process or contact finaid@hbs.edu for more information.
Enrollment: Limited to 45 MBA students (due to the nature of IFCs, auditing is not permitted)
Course Overview
The continent of Africa is often misunderstood, and the opportunity for both impact and profit are underappreciated. The Africa IFC will highlight the many opportunities and potential challenges for students interested in business on the continent. Students will visit and work with companies in Ghana and gain firsthand experience of business in Africa, by meeting and working with other young Africans. We will reflect on a changing international environment marked by COVID, the decline of globalization, an oncoming global recession and a new Cold war ignited by the Ukrainian crisis. How are these factors affecting Africa, how are countries reacting to these challenges. How are these events impacting companies and how are companies reacting to these new difficulties. For students it will provide an opportunity to see and be part of problem solving and crisis management within an African corporate setting.
Our sessions will begin with a look at the major political, economic and social trends that are dominating the continent. We will then examine the business environment and look at the peculiar features of business on the African continent as well as the impact of technology. How business is conducted in a continent where infrastructure is often poor, data absent, and capital constrained. Many of the lessons in this IFC are applicable to Global Emerging Markets, especially those in Asia and Latin America..
While in Ghana and while on campus, students will have the unique opportunity of meeting with and learning from leaders in politics and business from across Africa. In Ghana there will also be opportunities to discover the social and cultural landscape of Africa, including the changing role of women in the society and how the issues of ethnic diversity and inclusion are tackled on the continent.
I graduated from Harvard business school in 1980 and have worked on the continent for the last 42 years in both business and government. I hope to share with students the perspectives, network and experiences that I have gained over the decades. And with the network I have developed over those decades, I seek to place students within companies and projects where they can experience Africa first hand in both its difficulties and challenges, side by side its excitement and newness and its unique possibilities ...
The main deliverables will be:
a) report at the end of the time in Ghana to be submitted to the company.
b) a piece of written work to done in Boston which looks at the main themes covered in the classes and in the readings
Course Credit and Fees
Students will receive 3 credits upon successful completion of this course.
HBS will provide logistical support for the immersion (including accommodations, select meals, and local travel arrangements). Students will be charged a course fee towards defraying a portion of these costs. Students are responsible for booking and paying for their own round-trip air travel and any costs associated with required visa documentation and immunizations. Students should ensure adequate processing time for all visas, as travel fees are not refundable if a student does not secure visas on time.
For detailed information about what the course program fee includes and excludes, as well as information about student accommodations, please visit the GEO website or email geo@hbs.edu.
GEO continuously evaluates the safety and logistical feasibility of running Immersive Field Courses in each location. Please be aware that IFCs can be canceled at any time due to changes in global health and safety or other unforeseen circumstances. Students will not be redistributed into another IFC, nor will a new course be developed. Course fees will be refunded.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
IFC: India; Development While Decarbonizing - India’s Path to Net Zero
Course Number 6066
Fall On-Campus Course Sessions: Thursday sessions: 3:10-5:10pm October 10 November 7, November 14, December 5
Note extended three-hour required meeting at the final fall session on December 5
Travel Dates: Arrive: Sunday, January 5 and depart on Thursday, January 16, 2025. (Mumbai and Bangalore)
Course Fee: $3,500
Immersive Field Courses: IFCs require a firm commitment and carry a financial obligation. Financial aid is available in the form of a student loan, a need-based HBS scholarship, or a combination of both depending on your individual circumstances. The Add/Drop process at the start of the term is the mechanism for any IFC enrollment changes, and, after that point, the course fee is non-refundable. Refer to the GEO website for full details on IFCs and be sure you understand the Course Policies and Course Fee & Financial Aid. Visit IFC Financial Aid for a quick assessment to determine your eligibility and process or contact finaid@hbs.edu for more information.
Enrollment: Limited to 44 MBA students (due to the nature of IFCs, auditing is not permitted)
Course Overview
The global race to eliminate greenhouse gases from the atmosphere has started in full earnest. The stakes are high; emissions released by human activities are taking a catastrophic toll on the planet, prompting potentially an irreversible climate crisis. As a result, countries and companies have committed to decarbonization initiatives and announced net zero targets. While there are significant climate-related problems that are common across the world, there are some unique challenges and opportunities that are faced by developing economies. IFC India presents an opportunity for students to advance their knowledge of sustainability efforts, decarbonization and net zero in the context of a broader development agenda. The course will address and unpack the fundamentals of decarbonization, the science and impact of net zero, and the need and ways to build a sustainable future. Students will explore the balance of maintaining basic development goals, such as improving infrastructure, reducing poverty, energy access, housing, transport services, water, food security, education, and healthcare —while prioritizing decarbonization and net zero initiatives. This course will integrate learning across BGIE, finance, general management, technology, LCA, FGI and more!
This is a research-based course consisting of case and research-based learning in Boston and field research in India. Students will work in teams of 4, focused on a particular research work stream. Potential work streams include energy generation (renewables, cleaner fossil fuels, biomass, and green hydrogen), mobility, clean-tech, agriculture including dairy, urban resilience and adaptation, hard to abate sectors (steel, cement) ,carbon sequestering, waste management and real estate. Students will be able to select which research work stream they work on and form their own 4 person team. In Fall 2024, students will address the opportunities and challenges presented by these work streams during four class sessions. These sessions will include cases, guests, and collaborative student assignments. In January 2024, students will visit 10-12 organizations (including their operating facilities) in Mumbai and Bangalore . These organizations include private companies and government entities such as Tata Power, JSW Steel, Godrej Mangroves, Unilever, Mumbai Municipal Corporation, SELCO Foundation, Ather Mobility and startups such as Waycool, Pixxel Ohmium, and Log9. The schedule during the Immersion is expected to be intense with quite a bit of road travel so please be prepared for that.
I have been doing business in India for over 30 years. This course will leverage my knowledge of the country and my network with business, government, non-profits, and development agencies to deliver a unique experience for students who not only what to learn more about climate related issues but also want to get a general understanding of doing business in India.
The final product is for each student team to produce a research paper on their work stream based on their research in Boston and the site visits in India.
Course Credit and Fees
Students will receive 3 credits upon successful completion of this course.
HBS will provide logistical support for the immersion (including accommodations, select meals, and local travel arrangements). Students will be charged a course fee towards defraying a portion of these costs. Students are responsible for booking and paying for their own round-trip air travel and any costs associated with required visa documentation and immunizations. Students should ensure adequate processing time for all visas, as travel fees are not refundable if a student does not secure visas on time.
For detailed information about what the course program fee includes and excludes, as well as information about student accommodations, please visit the GEO website or email geo@hbs.edu.
GEO continuously evaluates the safety and logistical feasibility of running Immersive Field Courses in each location. Please be aware that IFCs can be canceled at any time due to changes in global health and safety or other unforeseen circumstances. Students will not be redistributed into another IFC, nor will a new course be developed. Course fees will be refunded.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
IFC: Italy; Tradition and Innovation
Course Number 6052
Fall On-Campus Course Sessions: Thursday sessions: September 12, September 19, October 10, November 14, November 21; 3:10PM-5:10PM.
Travel Dates: Arrive, Monday, January 6; Depart Friday, January 17
Course Fee: $3,500
Immersive Field Courses: IFCs require a firm commitment and carry a financial obligation. Financial aid is available in the form of a student loan, a need-based HBS scholarship, or a combination of both depending on your individual circumstances. The Add/Drop process at the start of the term is the mechanism for any IFC enrollment changes, and, after that point, the course fee is non-refundable. Refer to the GEO website for full details on IFCs and be sure you understand the Course Policies and Course Fee & Financial Aid. Visit IFC Financial Aid for a quick assessment to determine your eligibility and process or contact finaid@hbs.edu for more information.
Enrollment: Limited to 45 MBA students (due to the nature of IFCs, auditing is not permitted)
Educational Objectives
This is a research-based course. Our objective is to provide students with perspectives and insight into the eighth largest economy in the world. Although it is dominated by SMEs (companies with annual revenues of below €50m make up 82% of the employed population, and account for 92% of the active companies in the national economy), Italy is the second largest manufacturer and the second largest European exporter. Students will learn how Italy’s companies – that include some iconic brands that leverage the powerful “Made in Italy” label - have found a way to compete in a global marketplace through innovation, design, openness to trade, quality, as well as internationalization, and strategic flexibility. Italy’s family capitalism has shown it can evolve and adjust to a changing world. Students will analyze how it has done so even against longstanding structural, macroeconomic, political, and governance issues that have slowed economic growth, especially since the GFC. Having suffered heavily from COVID-19 in part because of its large elderly population (Italy has one of the highest life expectancies in Europe), the country will be the largest recipient of funds from the novel €795bn Next Generation EU recovery package that will allow unprecedented investment in digitalization, the green economy, education, and health.
Ranked first in cultural heritage in most rankings and endowed with historical cities, world-renowned cuisine, and geographic beauty, it is one of the top three most visited countries in Europe year in year out, with tourism making up 13% of GDP. Amid such rich cultural heritage lay the foundations of the birth and development of modern capitalism to which Italy has made unique contributions. This course will give a unique and fascinating opportunity to understand and see these first-hand.
Course Content
Classroom Sessions: The course will meet for six on-campus sessions during the fall semester, which will include case discussions and interactive lectures. The goals of the classroom sessions are to (1) provide an overview of the historical evolution and the present business, economic and political situation in Italy, (2) explore examples of how Italian companies innovate and compete, (3) gain an understanding of the structure of the Italian industrial landscape setting, (4) analyze the opportunities and issues of investing in the country and (5) understand the role of Italy in the birth of modern capitalism, including the history of double accounting, banking and its impact on trade and the arts. While on campus, we will visit Baker Library’s Medici Collection, comprising more than 150 ledgers and other manuscript volumes from the late 14th to the early 18th century that shed extraordinary light on the business and personal activities of six generations of one branch of Florence’s Medici family.
Immersion in Italy in January: The immersion will take us to Turin, Parma, and Florence. We will be meeting with CEOs, entrepreneurs, investors, historians, economists, and HBS alumni for interactive sessions. We will tour selected companies, factories, museums, and retail outlets.
Deliverables: Students will work in small teams to prepare a group presentation that examines one of the aspects of the course content to be delivered to the entire group at the conclusion of the program. Teams should expect to submit a written paper. Each student will submit a one-page reflection paper within one week after returning to campus. Students will be graded on attendance and participation, field work, peer feedback, and all deliverables.
-Class participation, including on immersion, 50%
-Paper (15-20 pages) or Project for a company 50%
Course Credit and Fees
Students will receive 3 credits upon successful completion of this course.
HBS will provide logistical support for the immersion (including accommodations, select meals, and local travel arrangements). Students will be charged a course fee towards defraying a portion of these costs. Students are responsible for booking and paying for their own round-trip air travel and any costs associated with required visa documentation and immunizations. Students should ensure adequate processing time for all visas, as travel fees are not refundable if a student does not secure visas on time.
For detailed information about what the course program fee includes and excludes, as well as information about student accommodations, please visit the GEO website or email geo@hbs.edu.
GEO continuously evaluates the safety and logistical feasibility of running Immersive Field Courses in each location. Please be aware that IFCs can be canceled at any time due to changes in global health and safety or other unforeseen circumstances. Students will not be redistributed into another IFC, nor will a new course be developed. Course fees will be refunded.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
IFC: Japan; Exploring Japan's Innovation Ecosystem
Course Number 6062
Fall On-Campus Course Sessions: Thursday sessions: 3:10-5:10pm September 19, October 17, November 14, and December 5.
Travel dates: Arrive Sunday, January 5 and Depart Thursday, January 16
Course Fee: $3,500
Immersive Field Courses: IFCs require a firm commitment and carry a financial obligation. Financial aid is available in the form of a student loan, a need-based HBS scholarship, or a combination of both depending on your individual circumstances. The Add/Drop process at the start of the term is the mechanism for any IFC enrollment changes, and, after that point, the course fee is non-refundable. Refer to the GEO website for full details on IFCs and be sure you understand the Course Policies and Course Fee & Financial Aid. Visit IFC Financial Aid for a quick assessment to determine your eligibility and process or contact finaid@hbs.edu for more information.
Enrollment: Limited to 45 MBA students (due to the nature of IFCs, auditing is not permitted)
Career Focus
This course will expose students to Japan as a nurturing ground for both developing as well as enhancing the uptake of innovative products, services, and business strategies. This course will appeal to students who wish to acquire an understanding of alternative leadership styles and business models aimed at simultaneously creating economic and societal value. Through project work with a diverse range of business partners, from established corporations to burgeoning startups, students will have an opportunity to gain practical insights into Japan’s unique business ecosystem. This hands-on experience is invaluable for students aspiring to become leaders adept at navigating and leveraging diverse business landscapes for societal and economic benefit.
Educational Objectives
From cutting-edge robotics to technological art, from big data to nano-devices, Japan has become a hub for innovative projects that, despite their seemingly unconventional nature, have achieved considerable success. This course will expose students to a diverse range of pioneering organizations and business models, with the aim of achieving four learning objectives.
Firstly, the course provides students with firsthand experiences and insights into the distinctive challenges and opportunities of conducting business and introducing innovation in Japan. Secondly, it demonstrates how innovation can emerge and diffuse by combining novel business models and marketing strategies. Thirdly, students will have the opportunity to learn from social entrepreneurs and intrapreneurs who have developed innovations with a social purpose. Finally, the course will expose students to Japanese culture and traditions, allowing them to gain a deeper appreciation of a unique society.
Course Content and Model
Overview and Introduction: Students enrolled in the Immersive Field Course: Japan will work in small teams to undertake a project with an organization based in the Tokyo area. The course will meet for four on-campus sessions to (1) provide students with a basic understanding of the Japanese innovation ecosystem, (2) highlight some of the challenges and opportunities faced by businesses trying to bring innovation to market in Japan, including entrepreneurs and VCs, (3) discuss how some emerging business models and marketing strategies lend themselves to new forms of organizing, and (4) allow time for student teams to work together, engage with their project partners to define and scope the projects that will take place in January, and to prepare for travel.
Projects: By the start of the course, project partners will have submitted a brief description of the business problem they would like students to address during the immersion. Before the second on-campus session, student teams will be formed. We will do our best to allocate students to their preferred project partners. In the period from October to December, student teams will engage in conversations and early work with project partners (scope the project, request/receive additional information, conduct telephone or Zoom interviews, develop early hypotheses, develop a work plan, etc.) in preparation for the field work that will take place in Japan. While in Japan, student teams will visit and work closely with their project partners in Tokyo. Students have the opportunity to assess the market/organizational environment by talking to customers, suppliers, government officials, and related organizations, as needed. Project teams will develop a set of recommendations before the last day of the immersion.
Deliverables: Student teams will present their recommendations to the project partners. In addition, each student will present their personal take-aways at a Capstone event. Final grades will consider: (i) participation and attendance during the four class sessions in the Fall semester, as well as in Japan; (ii) engagement with project partners; (iii) on-site activities in Tokyo and Tohoku; (iv) feedback from partner organizations and peers on project work; and (v) a final report.
Tours: Students will have the opportunity to take part in company visits as well as various cultural activities in Tokyo and the Tohoku region throughout their stay in Japan. Students will come to appreciate unique business protocols practiced in Japanese companies - e.g., exchange of name cards, silence in elevators, empathy to co-workers, being on time, etc. - that contribute to Japan’s unique approach to entrepreneurship.
Accommodations and Activities: Students will experience two different types of accommodations. In Tokyo, where the majority of overnights will take place, students will stay at a modern hotel in Central Tokyo. Students will take the bullet-train (Shinkansen) to the Tohoku region, where they will stay at a traditional Japanese ryokan. They will soak in hot spring baths (Onsen) and eat dinner wearing a yukata. Students will engage in volunteer work during their stay in Tohoku, as well as advise local social entrepreneurs and NPOs. Students will also have opportunities for other cultural activities in Tokyo, such as visiting live practice of sumo wrestlers.
Course Credit and Fees
Students will receive 3 credits upon successful completion of this course.
HBS will provide logistical support for the immersion (including accommodations, select meals, and local travel arrangements). Students will be charged a course fee towards defraying a portion of these costs. Students are responsible for booking and paying for their own round-trip air travel and any costs associated with required visa documentation and immunizations. Students should ensure adequate processing time for all visas, as travel fees are not refundable if a student does not secure visas on time.
For detailed information about what the course program fee includes and excludes, as well as information about student accommodations, please visit the GEO website or email geo@hbs.edu.
GEO continuously evaluates the safety and logistical feasibility of running Immersive Field Courses in each location. Please be aware that IFCs can be canceled at any time due to changes in global health and safety or other unforeseen circumstances. Students will not be redistributed into another IFC, nor will a new course be developed. Course fees will be refunded.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
IFC: Saudi Arabia; Economic Diversification
Course Number 6060
Fall On-Campus Course Sessions: Thursdays 3:10 – 5:10 pm: September 26th, October 24th, November 21st, and December 5th.
Travel Dates: Arrival on Monday, January 6, 2025. Departure on Wednesday, January 15, 2025.
Course Fee: $3,500
Immersive Field Courses: IFCs require a firm commitment and carry a financial obligation. Financial aid is available in the form of a student loan, a need-based HBS scholarship, or a combination of both depending on your individual circumstances. The Add/Drop process at the start of the term is the mechanism for any IFC enrollment changes, and, after that point, the course fee is non-refundable. Refer to the GEO website for full details on IFCs and be sure you understand the Course Policies and Course Fee & Financial Aid. Visit IFC Financial Aid for a quick assessment to determine your eligibility and process or contact finaid@hbs.edu for more information.
Enrollment: Limited to 45 MBA students (due to the nature of IFCs, auditing is not permitted)
Educational Objectives
Saudi Arabia, the largest economy in the Middle East, is implementing ambitious measures aimed at diversifying its economy away from oil dependency as part of its Vision 2030 initiative. This transition marks a significant shift for the country. The society has been seen through a set of limited lenses in the West. Yet, like any other, it is multifaceted and should be understood through diverse lenses.
Over the past few years, the country has poured enormous resources towards diversifying sources of economic growth away from petrochemicals. Societal change has been rapid in some dimensions – exhilarating and sometimes disconcerting – and on others has been glacially slow. This has triggered new entrepreneurial opportunities as well as identified some vulnerabilities for entrepreneurs, incumbent enterprises, and financiers.
Emerging sectors such as tourism, media, hospitality, entertainment, mining, metals, finance, and digital technologies, including fintech, AI, and clean energy, are gaining prominence, and this diversification opens doors for innovation and investment.
This Immersive Field Course presents a unique opportunity for students to explore first-hand some nuances of Saudi Arabia's economic transformation. Through interactive discussions, on-site visits, and interactions with alumni, companies and business leaders, students will gain insights into the Kingdom's opportunities and challenges.
Course Focus and Format
Four sessions will be held on campus in the fall. These will provide students with case materials, readings, and video materials to acquaint students with working in Saudi Arabia. Materials to conceptually introduce students to frameworks that help think about the broader institutional context will be a key part of the preparatory learning for the trip. Students will grapple with the extent to which lessons from their RC courses can either transfer over to the Middle East or be modified appropriately. My work on Contextual Intelligence will be a central part of these discussions.
While In Saudi Arabia, teams of 5-6 students each will be immersed in a host company, assigned a topic for the duration of their visit, and ultimately be tasked with sharing insights from their experience. The idea of affiliating with a company is to provide a point of anchor to explore the chosen themes, rather than to do a ‘project’ within the company. Students will travel to Riyadh for this work.
The entire cohort will likely travel to one other location during the immersion to continue to explore the themes of the IFC. Location is TBD.
Relation to Research
My work for three decades at HBS and Harvard has been purely about economic development in emerging markets, typically through an entrepreneurial lens. An article I wrote in HBR in 2014, Contextual Intelligence, is used as part of the preparation for RC students in FGI, and I expect will be one of the conceptual anchors for this IFC. Similarly, frameworks that I have developed for competing in emerging markets, some with Krishna Palepu and then with dozens of PhD students over the years will be used in the Fall preparatory sessions for this IFC.
Grading
20% - Fall interim presentation
20% - January pre-trip submission
60% - Final submission and presentation to company
Course Credit and Fees
Students will receive 3 credits upon successful completion of this course.
HBS will provide logistical support for the immersion (including hotel accommodations, select meals, and local travel arrangements). Students will be charged a course fee to help defray a portion of these costs. Students are responsible for booking and paying for their own round-trip air travel and any costs associated with required visa documentation and immunizations. Students should ensure adequate processing time for all visas, as travel fees are not refundable if a student does not secure visas on time.
For detailed information about what the course program fee includes and excludes, as well as information about student accommodations, please visit the GEO website or email geo@hbs.edu.
GEO continuously evaluates the safety and logistical feasibility of running Immersive Field Courses in each location. Please be aware that IFCs can be canceled at any time due to changes in global health and safety or other unforeseen circumstances. Students will not be redistributed into another IFC, nor will a new course be developed. Course fees will be refunded.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
IFC: Silicon Valley; Disrupting Silicon Valley with AI
Course Number 6094
Fall On-Campus Course Sessions: Thursday sessions, 3:10PM-5:10PM; September 12, September 26, October 17, November 7, and December 5.
January Immersion Dates: Arrive Sunday, January 5; Depart Saturday, January 11
Course Fee: $1,500 (see note on Financial Aid)
Immersive Field Courses: IFCs require a firm commitment and carry a financial obligation. Financial aid is available in the form of a student loan, a need-based HBS scholarship, or a combination of both depending on your individual circumstances. The Add/Drop process at the start of the term is the mechanism for any IFC enrollment changes, and, after that point, the course fee is non-refundable. Refer to the GEO website for full details on IFCs and be sure you understand the Course Policies and Course Fee & Financial Aid. Visit IFC Financial Aid for a quick assessment to determine your eligibility and process or contact finaid@hbs.edu for more information.
Enrollment Capacity: Limited to 45 MBA students (due to the nature of IFCs, auditing is not permitted)
Twenty-five years ago, the Internet changed the landscape of the tech sector. Nearly every category incumbent across B2B and B2C was disrupted by Internet-first startups that dominate today’s “most valuable companies” list. Will history repeat itself as we enter the age of AI? Will a new cohort of native AI startups reshape the tech sector? Or will the incumbents maintain their leadership positions?
In this course, “Disrupting Silicon Valley with Artificial Intelligence”, we will explore these questions. During the Fall, students will be assembled into teams of 6-8 and assigned to a tech category. Three categories will be in the B2B segment (product development, hiring/recruiting, go-to-market) and three in the B2C sector (social media, search, transportation). Students will meet regularly throughout the fall with Professor Roberge to discuss research findings and brainstorm potential implications. In each category, students will research the following questions:
- How are the large incumbents evolving their strategies to embrace AI? How are the native AI startups positioned?
- What hypotheses do entrepreneurs and thought leaders have on how AI will reshape the category?
- Are the incumbents or native AI-startups better positioned to capture market share? How can each party improve its positioning?
We will conclude the research phase of the course in early January and travel to Silicon Valley to present our findings to executives from these companies and meet with AI thought leaders in the region. Past versions of the course were focused on product-led growth rather than AI. Therefore, we anticipate a refreshed set of guest participants. However, to give the students a sense of the caliber of people involved, past guests include:
- Dylan Field (Founder/CEO of Figma)
- Drew Houston (Founder/CEO of Dropbox)
- Aliisa Rosenthal (Head of Sales at OpenAI)
- John Zimmer (Co-founder, President of Lyft)
- John Doerr (Chairman, Kleiner Perkins)
- Dan Shapero (COO, LinkedIn)
- Frederick Kerrest (co-founder of Okta)
- Sid Sidbrandij (Founder, CEO of GitLab)
- Selina Tobaccowala (Co-founder of eVite, former President of SurveyMonkey)
- Dick Costolo (Former CEO of Twitter)
- Dan Springer (Former CEO of Docusign)
- Jay Simons (Founding President of Atlassian)
- Brian Halligan (Co-founder/Former CEO of HubSpot)
Course credit and fees
Students will receive 3 credits upon successful completion of this course.
HBS will provide logistical support for the immersion (including accommodations, select meals, and local travel arrangements). Students will be charged a course fee. GEO will input fee towards defraying a portion of these costs. Students are responsible for booking and paying for their own round-trip air travel and any costs associated with required visa documentation and immunizations. Students should ensure adequate processing time for all visas, as travel fees are not refundable if a student does not secure visas on time.
For detailed information about what the course program fee includes and excludes, as well as information about student accommodations, please visit the GEO website or email geo@hbs.edu.
GEO continuously evaluates the safety and logistical feasibility of running Immersive Field Courses in each location. Please be aware that IFCs can be canceled at any time due to changes in global health and safety or other unforeseen circumstances. Students will not be redistributed into another IFC, nor will a new course be developed. Course fees will be refunded.
*Note: Students can enroll in this IFC and Professor Roberge’s Entrepreneurial Sales 101 course. The course meeting times do not conflict.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Innovating at Scale
Course Number 1185
Overview:
Innovating inside established organizations is no easy feat. It is difficult to do something new when it breaks with traditional ways of working, potentially cannibalizes existing sources of revenue or involves risky and uncertain investments. History is littered with established companies (Blockbuster, Kodak, etc) that failed to meet these challenges and innovate.
This course centers on how to innovate within established organizations. The goal is to enhance students’ understanding of when, how and with whom to innovate following a generalizable roadmap. Through the semester, we will couple learning foundational concepts and principles about innovating at scale with frameworks that will helps students build their careers within established organizations.
Classes will mix case discussion, expert panels, and exercises (exercises will focus on developing a vision for innovation and persuading others to support innovative ideas)
Career Focus:
This course is tailored towards students looking to work (1) in established organizations within general management, strategy, corporate venture and innovation groups; (2) as strategy consults who will serve clients in these roles; (3) in private equity portfolio companies, as an operator. This class is also geared towards students who are interested in building skills that will help them persuade others of their innovative ideas.
Educational Objectives: This course has three overarching learning objectives. Students will learn:
- When to be a first mover and innovate and when to strategically imitate and follow others in the market
- How to build capabilities to innovate inside established organizations across varying types of innovation (product, process and business model)
- How to partner with others through alliances, CVCs, strategic partnerships, to foster innovation
Course Content and Organization: This course will have three modules that support the key learning objectives of the class:
Module 1: When to innovate
Class 1: The power of strategic imitation
Class 2: Dominant design and 2nd mover advantages
Class 3: First mover advantage
Class 4: Exercise on crafting your vision for innovation by asking the right questions
Module 2: How to innovate
Class 5: Managing creative and innovative teams
Class 6: Developing innovative capabilities
Class 7: Geographic footprints and the location of innovative capabilities
Class 8: Buy vs. build decisions
Class 9: Exercise on persuasion and how to convince others in your company to support your idea
Module 3: Who to innovate with
Class 10: Assessing the benefits and disadvantages of alliances
Class 11: How to develop and run a corporate venture capital fund
Class 12: When and how to partner with startups
Class 13: When and how to partner with customers
Class 14: Summary and panel on careers
Scope: Spans multiple industries including the following: beauty, gaming, sports, climate and energy, industrials, finance, military, technology, health and scientific fields, creative industries.
Grading / Course Administration:
Grading will be based on participation and a take home final (50/50)
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Innovating in Health Care
Course Number 2185
Paper/project
Overview and Requirements
Problems with health care quality, access, and costs bedevil all countries. The health care sector—inefficient, erratic in quality and access, ripe for massive technological and consumer-facing innovations—is one of the largest sectors that can be transformed with innovation.
The purpose of this course is to leverage the students in creating these innovations by focusing on how to make them happen. The students—with diverse backgrounds, or none—in the field typically form a lifelong network.
The course follows a “how to” framework for the following four organizational stages of three types of health care innovations: technology-commercializing, cost-controlling, and consumer-facing.
- Evaluating
- Starting
- Scaling
- Exiting
It is entirely taught through current field-based cases in all aspects of health care—digital, technological, service, and insurance. The CEOs of the firms depicted in the case studies typically attend the class. It is supplemented with optional pedagogical videos (e.g., reimbursement).
Course Requirements
Students prepare a business plan, which uses the framework of this course, for an organization that is a technology-commercializing, consumer- facing, or cost-controlling innovation.
The course offers advisers from other HU schools—HMS, SEAS, KSG, SPH, CS; established health care firms; legal/regulatory/reimbursement experts; and VC/PE investors.
Career Focus
For students interested in careers in managing, consulting, and investing in innovative health care/life sciences firms or creating innovative health care services, health insurance, health IT, digital health, consumer-based innovations, or medical technology.
Educational Objectives
Innovating in Health Care (IHC) enables students to create successful innovative health care ventures that respond to the massive opportunities created by the escalating cost and uneven quality and access of health care systems globally.
Innovating in Health Care (IHC) enables students to:
- Identify the one primary purpose of the innovation—technology-commercializing, consumer-facing, or cost-controlling.
- Learn the differing organizational, financing, accountability, technology, and consumer characteristics of virtually every major kind of health care organization.
- Understand how to align the innovation with the Six Factors that critically influence this kind of innovation—structure (the status quo), financing (who pays for what and why), technology, consumers, accountability, and public policy.
- Create business models that respond appropriately to any Six Factors misalignments and that feature the strategy, financing, management, and organizational structure appropriate for that kind of innovation.
- Learn the key factors in the four stages of growth of innovative health care ventures: evaluation of initial idea; starting up; scaling up; and exiting.
The field-based cases in Innovating in Health Care cover every part of the health care sector, including bricks and mortar primary care centers, insurance, bricks and mortar and virtual health care services, AI, digital health, medical devices, biopharma, diagnostics, payment and delivery intermediaries, telemedicine, DTC and PBM pharmaceutical delivery, and SaMD. The course has a global focus with case studies set in Africa and the U.S. Its cases discuss startups, firms that are scaling up, established firms that are recreating themselves, and firms that are contemplating exits.
The CEO of the firm described in the case study typically attends the session.
Content and Organization
The course is organized into four modules, taught through field-based cases and summary notes by Prof. Herzlinger.
The first module, Innovating in Health Care, discusses the opportunities and risks for health care innovations and introduces students to the analytic framework of the Six Factors that critically shape innovative health care ventures and their impact on business models for three different kinds of health care innovations: consumer-focused, technology-commercializing, and cost-controllers. Students present their ideas for innovative health care business models for feedback from their classmates.The second module discusses case studies of health care startups. A panel on payment elucidates the process of coverage, coding, and payment in the U.S. and the varieties of cost effectiveness analyses used in many other developed countries to determine the price.
The third module contains cases of innovative healthcare firms that are scaling up in medical technology, health insurance and delivery, digital health, and associated intermediaries.
The fourth module contains cases of firms contemplating various forms of exit. Students present their business plans for feedback.
Prof. Herzlinger has founded a number of successful, entrepreneurial health care firms that have saved hundreds of thousands of lives; served on the Boards of directors of many large, public health care firms; written a number of best-selling books on health care entrepreneurialism and the health care plan of a U.S. presidential candidate; and often testified in the U.S. Congress.
Business Plan Requirements
Students prepare a business plan, which employs the IHC Framework, to create an entrepreneurial opportunity in health care.
Some ideas for projects are posted on the course platform, but you can devise your own project, as well, after Prof. Herzlinger approves it. Students frequently form teams with fellow MBAs and cross registrants, a significant number of which continue as ongoing businesses (for example, the Phreesia (PHR) case study: https://www.hbs.edu/faculty/Pages/item.aspx?num=38231).
For an optional catered session, you will prepare a 5-minute presentation of your business plan idea for a health care innovation. Those presenting will email the presentation materials the day before your presentation.
Your business plan should cover the following topics:
- The type of opportunity
- Six Factors alignment
- The business model
- Next steps
Grading
Students are reminded of the Class Absence and Remote Attendance Policy.
Class participation and the business plan will account for a significant percentage of the grade.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Institutions, Macroeconomics, and the Global Economy
Course Number 1180
27 Sessions
Exam
Course Overview
This is a course about exploiting the opportunities created by the emergence of a global economy and managing the risks that globalization entails. All managers now face a business environment where international, macroeconomic, and political phenomena matter. Understanding the genesis of financial and currency crises, stock market booms and busts, social and labor unrest, the rise of populism, and major swings in politics and policies is a crucial aspect in taking informed managerial decisions. Adverse macroeconomic and political phenomena can have a catastrophic impact on firm performance: witness the strong companies destroyed by the Mexican tequila crisis and those damaged by recent protests around the globe. Yet, such episodes also create business opportunities – and not just for the hedge funds and speculators that profit from them. Managers that have and use a coherent framework for understanding and analyzing these phenomena will enjoy a competitive advantage.
Career Focus
Internationally oriented careers; careers in global financial management; senior executive jobs; careers in policy-making.
Educational Objectives
The educational objectives of the IMaGE course are threefold.
First, the course aims to provide participants with a basic understanding of how contemporary macroeconomics explains dramatic events in the international economy, such as recurrent banking and financial crises in several countries. Much of this explanation focuses on the role of confidence, expectations, and crowd psychology. These factors result in aggregate behavior - e.g., demand in the U.S. economy as a whole - behaving in a different manner than would be suggested by simply summing individual behavior. This, in turn, justifies the establishment of macroeconomics as a separate discipline, distinct from microeconomics with its focus on individual firm and household decisions.
Second, the course discusses how institutions can be developed which focus the uncoordinated actions of individual households and firms as well as voters and politicians on good, rather than bad, overall outcomes. Such institutions are key determinants of macroeconomic and political outcomes. In some countries, legal, political, and economic institutions are able to coordinate private decisions on stable and productive paths. Where institutional development is weak - as seems to be the case in much of the developing world - private actions are poorly coordinated and the result is greater macroeconomic volatility, higher political risk, and slower growth. Understanding what constitute good institutions and how institutions influence economic and political behavior is therefore crucial.
Finally, the course is intended to develop a simple framework linking institutional design and macroeconomic performance. This framework can be used to evaluate how globalization is likely to change the performance of specific markets and thus assess the associated risks and opportunities.
Course Content and Organization
Most of the cases and class discussions focus on the country level, although several cases look at specific sectors (e.g., the retail industry in Chile, or the startup sector in Israel) or particular policies (inflation targeting in Brazil), and others span multiple countries (Chinese investments in Africa, or climate change). The course itself consists of four modules.
The first module ("Macroeconomic and Financial Dynamics") uses the experience of a famous economist (John Maynard Keynes) and several countries which have suffered through tremendous economic dislocation to identify and develop the issues of communication, confidence, coordination, and institutional development that are central to the remainder of the course. It investigates the mechanisms underlying recent macroeconomic and financial crises and explores their institutional underpinnings as well as their economic and political consequences. Representative cases include the Mexico Tequila crisis of 1994-95; Populism, banking crises, and exchange rate crises in Argentina; and Uganda and the Washington Consensus.
The second module ("Competing Institutional Models") studies how the U.S. and other rich countries have developed institutional structures permitting the coordination of individual business decisions on good economic outcomes, as well as their influences on macroeconomic policy design and performance. Moreover, it demonstrates how institutional differences across countries ultimately rest in differences in norms and beliefs, and explores how changes in the environment can render previously successful institutional structures outmoded, thereby creating both opportunities and risks for firms and households. Representative cases include Margaret Thatcher and the Blair wealth project; Latvia navigating the strait of Messina; Eliot Spitzer pushing Wall Street to reform; and Israel between the oligarchs and the startup nation.
The third module (“Politics: Influence and Unrest”) studies the dynamics leading to the creation and fissuring of political consensus on institutions, broad policy orientations, and specific policies. It gives special attention to the role of information influencing politicians’ choice of policy and the people’s preferences, as well as factors generating information bias. It explores the interactions between all stakeholders influencing policy-making (ruling elites, companies, media, and the people) and their impact on business. Representative cases include Lobbying in the chemical industry in the U.S.; Unrest in Chile, Looting at Walmart International; and Populism, fake news, and elite betrayal in the Trump era.
The fourth module ("The Future of Globalization") uses the macroeconomic and political economy tools and insights built in the previous modules to study the latest trends in globalization and their effects. It discusses how the increasing integration of international trade and of the global capital markets can affect the economic performance and generate political turmoil within previously successful and stable nations by undermining the internal coherence of the institutional structures on which their economic performance rested and the policy options available to them. Representative cases include the Trans-Pacific Partnership; Goodbye IMF conditions, hello Chinese capital: Zambia’s copper industry and Africa’s break with its colonial past; the 2012 Spanish labor reform; and Climate change: Paris, and the road ahead.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Investment Management and Capital Markets
Course Number 1446
IMCM is suitable for all students interested in gaining a broad perspective on investing and the asset management business. This includes both those targeting careers in asset management and those interested in learning how to manage effectively their personal wealth, current and future. This course aims at de-mystifying the world of investing as a black box full of incomprehensive complexity. While talent has a nature component, it also has an important nurture component. Investing is within the reach of any creative, motivated, well-trained individual – every student in the school.
The course has an eminently practice-oriented focus. Its main objective is to develop a framework for investing through the evaluation of specific investment decisions and opportunities across a wide array of public and private markets. Students learn how to evaluate any investment opportunity and, just as importantly, how to enhance value and how to build a deal flow, while developing the specific analytical tools that apply in each market and type of situation.
Students get a broad understanding of capital markets, assets classes, investing styles, and instruments (equity markets, bond markets, credit markets, real estate, privates, active and index investing, value and growth investing, activism, ESG investing, tail risk hedging, futures and swaps, etc.).
Students also explore investing from the asset owner perspective, learning modern practices in portfolio construction for personal and institutional investors (family offices, endowments, pension funds, and sovereign wealth funds). They examine portfolio construction and risk management, identification of investment talent and skill, investment vehicles, and costs (types of fees, taxes, etc.).
This course makes special emphasis on being current and on hearing directly from investors. The average age of each case in this course is short and sessions on capital markets and asset classes are updated every year. Classes often feature guest speakers to help students develop an up-close perspective on the issues raised in the case discussion and enhance students’ skills in investment decision making.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Investment Strategies
Course Number 1425
13 Sessions
Exam
Career Focus
Global capital markets are vast and dynamic, with over $100 trillion in listed public equities and more than $300 trillion in sovereign and corporate bonds outstanding. Every day, public markets set prices for CEOs and CFOs, financial institutions, and investors, all seeking to raise and invest money in a way that drives the economy forward. A public exit - whether through an initial public offering of common stock or a stock-financed merger with an already public acquirer - remains a critical step in corporate transformation by private equity investors and innovation by venture capitalists. Because public capital markets play such a key role in the global economy, government regulators and policy makers continually monitor their health and pay heed to the signals they are sending.
Investment Strategies is most directly applicable to students interested in pursuing careers in finance including mutual funds, hedge funds, pension funds, endowments, wealth management, financial consulting, marketing and client service, sales and trading, investment banking, private equity, venture capital, and corporate finance. However, many students have found that a thorough understanding of public capital markets and the business of investment management is valuable in a wider set of careers outside of finance and in managing their personal wealth.
The focus of Investment Strategies is financial markets, principally equity markets, taking the perspective of an institutional portfolio manager and considering the efficacy of value investing, arbitrage, and other active investment strategies. Professor Malcolm Baker will co-teach one session.
Educational Objectives
The goal of this course is for you to develop an investment philosophy, a set of guiding principles that shape your approach to understanding and investing in public capital markets. While this philosophy is directly applicable to professional investment management, it is also relevant for corporate finance, investment banking, and personal finance. A cornerstone of any investment philosophy is a view on the efficiency of markets.
An efficient market is one where prices reflect true fundamental values. In an efficient market, there is little value in the selection of individual securities. Higher returns come only from bearing greater risk. Investing in efficient markets means minimizing transaction costs and choosing maximally diversified portfolios that deliver an optimal tradeoff between risk and return.
An inefficient market, by contrast, is one where prices differ - sometimes substantially - from fundamental values. These deviations from fundamental value create opportunities and risks for sophisticated investors in both security selection and asset allocation.
Content and Organization
The course is organized into two parts. The first part develops a conceptual framework for the functioning of markets, spread over three topics:
- Introduction to Public Market Investing
- Market Efficiency and Arbitrage
- Trade Execution
The second part puts these ideas into practice, examining specific investment philosophies and strategies such as:
- Value Investing
- Distressed Situations
- Asset Value Investing
- Short Selling
- Activism
The materials consist of cases, class polls, and a textbook. A number of classes are built around visits from successful and well-known money managers.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Launch Lab/Capstone 1
Course Number 5241
November kickoff (9am – 5pm)
January dates to be announced
Location to be announced
Enrollment: Limited to EC students in the SEAS/HBS joint degree program
Also listed as ENG-SCI 292A
The MS/MBA Capstone is an intensive project that requires teams of students to apply and integrate the skills they have learned across core disciplines developed in the program curriculum. Specifically, teams will be expected to design, build and launch a new technology-based product/service venture, and thereby to demonstrate mastery with respect to three areas of knowledge: Design Knowledge: The use of human-centered design methods to understand users, identify solutions to their needs, and gather feedback via rapid, iterative prototyping. Technical Knowledge: The use of rigorous system engineering methods to plan, design, develop, build, and test a complex technology-based product/service, integrating knowledge across multiple engineering disciplines. Business Knowledge: The use of business model analysis and lean experimentation methods to develop and test a set of hypotheses that capture how the new product/service will create value, including business model design, pricing, sales and marketing, operating model and profit formula.
The Capstone is divided into two parts, the first of which is an immersive course completed during the January term of the G2 year (Capstone I). The subsequent spring course (Capstone II) follows on from and builds upon work completed in January. Given students prior coursework, a working knowledge of human-centered design methods, systems engineering techniques, and business modeling and lean experimentation is assumed. Launch Lab therefore focuses on the practical application of these skills to team projects, supplemented by content in three areas: i) seminars on advanced methods and techniques, ii) workshops that demonstrate how to put these skills and tools into practice, and iii) guest speakers who share their experience in the areas of design, technology and business.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Launch Lab/Capstone 2
Course Number 5242
Location to be announced
Enrollment: Limited to EC students in the SEAS/HBS joint degree program
Also listed as ENG-SCI 292B
The MS/MBA Capstone is an intensive project that requires teams of students to apply and integrate the skills they have learned across core disciplines developed in the program curriculum. Specifically, teams will be expected to design, build and launch a new technology-based product/service venture, and thereby to demonstrate mastery with respect to three areas of knowledge: Design Knowledge: The use of human-centered design methods to understand users, identify solutions to their needs, and gather feedback via rapid, iterative prototyping. Technical Knowledge: The use of rigorous system engineering methods to plan, design, develop, build, and test a complex technology-based product/service, integrating knowledge across multiple engineering disciplines. Business Knowledge: The use of business model analysis and lean experimentation methods to develop and test a set of hypotheses that capture how the new product/service will create value, including business model design, pricing, sales and marketing, operating model and profit formula.
The Capstone is divided into two parts, the first of which is an immersive course completed during the January term of the G2 year (Capstone I). The subsequent spring course (Capstone II) follows on from and builds upon work completed in January. Given students prior coursework, a working knowledge of human-centered design methods, systems engineering techniques, and business modeling and lean experimentation is assumed. Launch Lab therefore focuses on the practical application of these skills to team projects, supplemented by content in three areas: i) seminars on advanced methods and techniques, ii) workshops that demonstrate how to put these skills and tools into practice, and iii) guest speakers who share their experience in the areas of design, technology and business.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Launching Tech Ventures
Course Number 1757
28 Sessions
Paper/Project
27 Sessions
Paper/Project
View this video, walking through the course overview
Career Focus
Launching Technology Ventures (LTV) is designed for four types of students:
- Those who will start their own companies.
- Those who will join early-stage startups (typically in a product manager, business development, sales, marketing, or growth role).
- Those who will work at growth stage technology firms (in a similar range of roles) that try to maintain a similar, nimble operating model as a startup.
- Those who are interested in investing in startups.
The class focus is on pre-product-market fit technology-based ventures in a range of information technology-based sectors. Business models covered range from SaaS to freemium to e-commerce to transaction-based to tough tech. There is a heavy focus on Artificial Intelligence (AI) throughout the cases and coursework.
Educational Objectives
The course takes the perspective of founders struggling to achieve product market fit in their early-stage startups. Our cases focus on founder decisions during this search and discovery phase, both in the experiments that they design and run as well as the organizations they build.
LTV has a tactical, implementation bias rather than a strategic one. There is a modest overlap with Product Management and Entrepreneurial Sales, but LTV is solely focused on pre-product-market fit startups and takes the perspective of the founder. LTV is complementary to Scaling Tech Ventures (STV), which focuses more on post product-market fit startups, and Founder Mindset, which focuses more on human issues and a founder’s psychology.
LTV helps students learn the playbook for finding product-market fit while learning to design more attractive, enduring business models, answering the question why some startups are valued at only 2x revenue while others are valued at 20x and why some startups struggle to attract venture funding while others raise hundreds of millions of dollars.
Course Content
Through a series of case studies and intimate conversations with startup founders, LTV students examine management challenges in early-stage startups and the range of experiments that are conducted during this phase of development. Taking the perspective that a startup is an experimentation machine and that those experiments should cover all facets of the startup’s business model, we will explore six modules:
1. Ideation and Customer Value Proposition Experiments. What are the best methods to develop and test startup ideas early in the development process? What are the right analytical techniques to derive insight into the power of a value proposition, conduct customer discovery, and determine whether a startup has achieved product-market fit?
2. Go to Market Experiments. What is the right mix of direct and indirect selling efforts and at what phase in the startup's lifecycle should each be employed? How can founders themselves be the most effective sales engine for an early-stage company, even though it clearly does not scale as a go to market approach? What is the optimal mix of different customer acquisition methods, such as growth hacking, SEO, SEM, email, and affiliate programs? How should a startup think about working with channel partners or other gatekeepers in the face of asymmetric bargaining power and potentially divergent interests? What are the best practices for attracting and managing developers who can leverage a platform's API?
3. Business Model Experiments. When is the best time to trigger monetization experiments and how should a freemium model be best executed? What are the different pricing and business model approaches that a startup can take, particularly when trying to deploy an innovative model and drive adoption in the context of a network effect-based business opportunity? How does one evaluate the quality of the startup business model and appreciate the relative pros and cons of business model choices?
4. The Startup Organization and Hiring. What is the best design for a startup organization intended to effectively execute on running startup experiments? When should a seed stage startup recruit its first sales professional and what hiring criteria should they use? The first marketing hire? How can a growth organization be created and how should it interact with the other functions, particularly product and marketing? When is the right time to build a community team? How can modern, flexible product development techniques, such as agile and continuous deployment, be utilized to enhance the rate of experimentation and thus the chances that product-market fit can be achieved?
5. Ecosystem and Ethics. What are the important ethical considerations that a startup founder needs to consider, particularly as they face key moments such as financing and exit opportunities? How are a founder’s obligations to stakeholders challenged under pressure and uncertainty? More broadly, why does the startup ecosystem contain so many market failures that lead to biases and inequities – particularly in terms of access to capital for female entrepreneurs and entrepreneurs of color?
6. Financing and Exits. What is the best way to align financing needs with a startup’s operating plan, considering the key milestones and valuation inflection points ahead? If things are going well, or (all too frequently) not well, how should a founder consider and navigate exit options?
The course has 24 cases, 3 exercises, and a wrap-up session. The three exercises are: (1) startup business model deconstruction using current student’s startups; (2) startup pitch workshop; and (3) startup hiring workshop. In nearly all of the cases, the case protagonist will be a class guest. Case protagonists are 50% female, 50% male, and racially diverse. In addition to meeting the case protagonists in class, coffees and lunches are arranged to allow for more intimate exposure to a wide range of startup founders and investors, helping students build a strong network in startupland.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Law, Management and Entrepreneurship
Course Number 1540
Exam
Exam
Career Focus:
Every MBA should understand how law affects business. In addition to serving as a Senior Lecturer at HBS, I am a retired Securities Litigation Partner at WilmerHale in Boston. I draw upon examples from my practice and have designed the course to develop legal literacy by honing instincts that will help business leaders avoid legal pitfalls, attain a competitive edge and promote long-term success. Expanding well beyond the basic legal concepts introduced in LCA, the course will refine students’ understanding of how law affects all aspects of business, and develop a deeper appreciation of how legal systems operate and how to operate within the boundaries of legal systems. In response to increased student interest in private equity, a module of the course focuses on contracts and understanding legal documentation relating to private equity transactions. The course will also explore legal issues involved in starting, joining or investing in start-ups and decision making from the time an entrepreneur conceives, starts to build and obtains financing through development of exit strategies. The course has a global perspective and should be of interest to both U.S. and non-U.S. students.
No prior legal training is assumed. Class discussion will be based on both business school cases and other materials including excerpts from judicial opinions, statutes, news reports and analysis, and actual deal documentation. Most of the classes will run the usual 80 minutes although a few sessions may be merged for deep dives into selected topics and interaction with class guests who will appear by Zoom or in the classroom.
Educational Objectives:
The course has four objectives:
- Explore the global legal environment, develop an approach to managing and maximizing the value of the corporate legal function, and analyze the dynamic nature of law;
- Develop literacy in: basic agency, contracts, legal documentation, torts, and the dynamics of litigation; explore intellectual property (IP), mergers and acquisitions (M&A), and the basics of bankruptcy; and examine contemporary issues in securities law, private equity transactions and regulatory responses to complex financial instruments;
- Enhance understanding of the legal life cycle of a start-up including structuring and financing issues, tax considerations, founder/investor conflicts, liquidity and exit issues; and
- Consider what’s customary and fair in various transactions and the communication challenges of translating legal advice and analysis into decision-ready advice managers can use.
Course Content and Organization:
- Day 1: Overview of the Course
Module 1: Contracts -- Basic & Complex
- Day 2: Contract Basics
- Day 3: What Does the Contract Say? What Does it Mean?
- Day 4: Complex Contracts: PE – Part I
- Day 5: Complex Contracts: PE – Part II
- Day 6: Contracts – Earnout Provisions
Module 2: Additional Building Blocks
- Day 7: Torts and Toxic Torts
- Day 8: IP – Patents and Patent Licenses
- Day 9: IP – Copyrights
- Day 10: Litigation and Litigation Strategy
- Day 11: Bankruptcy
- Day 12: Securities Law – What is a Security
- Day 13: Securities Law – Operating in the Securities Markets
- Day 14: Regulation of the Securities Market
Module 3: Starting & Growing Businesses
- Day 15: Breaking Away – Covenants not to Compete
- Day 16: Coming Together – Forming a Business
- Day 17: Choice of Organization
- Day 18: Financing a Start-up Company
- Day 19: Employers and Employees
- Day 20: Employment – Compensation
- Day 21: Break All The Rules? Uber/Airbnb
- Day 22: Break-down/Wash-outs: Downrounds
- Day 23: The Power of Contract: Downrounds Part II
- Day 24: The Start-up vs. The Incumbent
Module 4: Succession & Liquidity
- Day 25: Exit Strategies or Not
- Day 26: PE Exits
- Day 27: IPOs – Old and New
- Day 28: Fulfilling the Promise – Dealing with Lawyers and Course Wrap
The Legal Environment of Business: introduces the concept of law as incorporated in the legal systems of various countries, highlights differences among the major types of legal systems, develops approaches to managing the legal function and maximizing its utility; introduces the concepts of jurisdiction and the basics of litigation.
Contracts and Private Equity Documentation: Introduces contract law and builds on that introduction to develop an understanding of private equity deal documentation and the essential elements of the contracts underlying private equity transactions, including mergers.
Liability: Torts, Crimes, and Litigation over Major Transactions: explores the various types of liability and litigation encountered by businesses including basic torts and tort litigation, Merger and Acquisition litigation, IP lawsuits, antitrust suits, bankruptcy litigation, and criminal prosecution in the context of securities regulation and international white collar crime.
The Legal Environment for Entrepreneurship and Exit Strategies: explores the role of the legal systems in creating and sustaining a climate that facilitates entrepreneurial activity and the role of counsel in helping to launch, grow and protect new businesses. It considers the following stages in the life cycle of a start-up: Formation (pre-formation issues, different forms of business organization, NDAs, contractual arrangements and other legal protections for corporate assets and opportunities, and governance and control under VCs); Employment Relationships (certain legal aspects of developing, rewarding and retaining employees, including non-competition agreements, assignments of rights, and employment litigation); and Growth and Exits (strategies for maximizing the value of intellectual property, founder/VC disputes , wash-outs, and legal aspects of exit strategies, including PE exits and IPOs).
Grading:
50% of the final grade will be based on class participation and 50% on a self-scheduled final exam.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Leadership Execution and Action Planning (LEAP)
Course Number 2031
27 Sessions
Exam
Leadership Execution and Action Planning (LEAP) focuses on the tenacity, tactics, and grit required to influence action across a wide range of organizational challenges. While traditional leadership courses contemplate “what” is leadership, LEAP focuses on “how” leaders must take action at critical moments to shape their organizations and their careers. The course helps students transition from a classroom understanding of leadership to the often-messy reality of rolling up one's sleeves and getting things done. It takes the point of view of a leader who: (1) is new to a situation, (2) must take action, and (3) is asked to operate within a system that she or he may not fully control or has not designed.
New leaders often stumble when tasked with closing the gap between a desired end-state and executing an action plan. LEAP is designed to give students pattern recognition and practice in developing action plans across a variety of challenges they are likely to face immediately after graduation, including: transactions (mergers), turnarounds, crisis management, scaling, reinvention, and career action planning.
The course will develop skills in diagnosing, designing, and executing complex actions. It forces students to contemplate the managerial tradeoffs and constraints they will face when tasked with achieving results.
An additional underlying theme of the course is on personal failure, highlighting the major missteps and early career challenges that leaders fall into. The course asks students to evaluate their own blind spots and shortcomings regarding leadership style, execution management, and career development. Through the lens of case protagonists at various stages of their careers, LEAP gives students the opportunity to practice identifying common execution traps and missteps.
LEAP is an integrated leadership course, building on concepts from organizational behavior, strategy, and general management. It brings these themes together in case discussions and exercises that focus on the personal decisions managers face in high-performance, high-stakes, and career-defining moments. Students will examine leaders in private and publicly owned companies, family businesses, and non-profits. The course will analyze the successes and setbacks of protagonists in each case, nearly half of whom will be present in class to discuss their views and, in some class sessions, to solicit student feedback about their ongoing execution challenges.
Course Objectives
LEAP has the following key learning objectives:
- To enable students to get things done successfully.
- To understand the risks, trade-offs, and constraints leaders face when tasked with achieving results under conditions where they have limited skills, time, and resources available.
- To develop the leadership capabilities and interpersonal skills required to become an effective “implementer /operator.”
Underlying Themes and Goals
The industry, organization, and protagonist settings in the course are highly diverse. Cases will focus on protagonist perspectives ranging from the CEO to initial-entry positions (i.e., of the type that many students may experience soon after graduation). It offers a manager’s perspective on how to drive program execution.
This course will develop implementation and project management skills. A critical skill required of program managers is triage – developing and assigning priorities based on their urgency and importance. Successful execution also requires making tradeoffs given constraints of time, capital, talent, and political capital. LEAP will introduce students to several general tactics, common traps, and tools related to execution.
This course will focus on execution. The course focuses on the alignment of tactics required to drive performance across a range of business activities. Case Students will develop implementation approaches for existing business problems in each module. The course will illustrate how difficult projects get done, how policies and procedures get carried out, and how improvements are delivered.
This course provides frameworks to guide the process of developing and implementing action. LEAP demonstrates “how” to lead implementation efforts – from diagnosis to design to execution. It presents several frameworks to help students with various action-planning challenges:
- How to determine whether the “agreed upon” goal is actually an “achievable” goal.
- How to evaluate tradeoffs among resources.
- How to manage stakeholders in positions of power, both formal and informal.
- How to create alignment among the culture, formal organization, people, and critical tasks.
This course will emphasize learning from failure. A running theme throughout the course is overcoming adversity and learning from personal failure. Students are challenged to grapple with their own prior failures while analyzing management teams that have experienced major setbacks. Each module includes at least one business case where the leadership team failed to achieve their goals. Students will discuss how to manage failure, seek feedback, and make mid-course corrections. The intent is to develop the student’s ability to learn from failure and discuss how to overcome early setbacks in a career. Frequent protagonist participation will also provide students with access to seasoned executives who will discuss their biggest execution failures.
Course Module Structure
The course is organized into six modules that illustrate execution challenges where leaders may have a sound strategy, but “getting things done” is difficult and results may fall short of desired outcomes. While there is some overlap among modules on the course frameworks for action planning, the distinct lessons of each segment of the course are outlined below:
Module 1: Transactions Business transactions, particularly post-merger integration, are among the most difficult of leadership challenges business managers face in their careers. Even seasoned merger experts make catastrophic (and career-sabotaging) mistakes while leading through these complex periods of change. The transactions module discusses the common leadership pitfalls of merger integration, highlights management styles that seem relevant in successful merger leaders, and it offers approaches that can serve as a starting point for leading a merger process. Other topics include:
- Rigorously designing and executing integration.
- Choosing the right leadership team.
- Addressing conflicting organizational culture issues and retaining key talent.
Module 2: Turnarounds in For-Profit and Non-Profit Organizations Turnarounds represent a high-risk execution challenge for leaders. Leaders must make decisions about what to cut, who to cut, what to keep, and how fast it all must happen. This module focuses on the common mistakes, management styles of successful turnaround leaders, and action plans that can serve as the starting point for a leader tasked with managing a turnaround. Other topics include:
- Evaluating the conditions for change.
- Creating and communicating a turnaround narrative.
- Protecting the base business while changing direction and creating forward movement.
Module 3: Crisis Building on the turnaround module, here we examine how the added elements of restricted time and lack of information combine to create unique challenges for companies in crisis situations. Unlike a turnaround, a crisis can be a catastrophic event, or a series of seemingly small events, that often surprise leaders. Most organizations are not designed to prevent or manage crises; it is not a question of if a crisis will happen, but when, and what kind. Other topics include:
- Examining tradeoffs between taking immediate action and acting with an untested approach.
- The challenge of leading in situations where confusion and chaos often exist.
Module 4: Scaling Expansion is inherently risky to an incumbent organization’s existing architecture. Scaling a business, particularly into new geographical markets or product categories, involves addressing cultural, administrative, and economic tradeoffs. Successful leadership in these scenarios requires managers who are capable of action planning for growth, as well as exerting control and influence across cultural, political, and economic divides. Other topics include:
- Developing an organizational architecture that supports the expansion into new product-classes, market categories, and geographic regions.
- Maintaining an organization’s culture and values while attempting to professionalize and create formal systems and structures.
Module 5: Reinvention Reinvention is a process whereby established organizations respond to external environmental shifts that threaten to upend their core business model, technologies, cultural values, and/or operational norms. Reinvention represents a managerial paradox: executives must both preserve and change aspects of the business that once made them successful but could render the organization obsolete in the near future. This module will examine several mature businesses that faced a near collapse and how their leaders attempted to redefine the organization to attract new consumers and markets. Other topics include:
- How innovations affect mature organizations and how to respond to technological shocks.
- How firms both preserve and change elements of “what we do” (their strategy) and “who we are” (their organizational identity).
- How to attract new talent and infuse confidence back into a workforce that has suffered a significant downfall.
Module 6: Action Planning Your Career The career module focuses on analyzing career paths, tradeoffs between personal ethics and success, and, importantly, navigating failure. The module provides students an opportunity to contemplate their career objectives. It provides students with examples of overzealous life planning and the unforeseen interpersonal dilemmas that can derail a career plan. Additional key topics are:
- The tradeoffs between mapping career goals and maintaining work-life balance.
- Career resiliency and overcoming early failures after graduation.
- Individual action plans related to career transitions that students will face in the next 5-10 years.
Grading and Evaluation
Course grades are based on three components: class participation, written action-planning exercises, and a final exam.
- Class participation comprises 45% of the grade. Participation will be evaluated for both frequency and quality. As part of the participation grade, students will also submit a short written analysis of a failure they experienced in their professional endeavors prior (or during) their time at HBS. The essay will describe a significant failure, discuss lessons learned from the failure, and how the student dealt with the aftermath. Several individuals (4-5) per section will be chosen to present their failures and the lessons learned to the rest of the class at the end of the semester.
- A midterm written exercise that outlines an action plan, along with short action planning write-ups throughout the semester, offer opportunities to practice and apply course frameworks. The midterm and write-ups comprise 20% of the grade.
- A written final exam will be scheduled during the exam period following the last day of class. It will mirror the format of the midterm written exercise. Students are not required to be on campus to take the exam. The final comprises 35% of the grade.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Leadership and Happiness
Course Number 1885
14 Sessions
Overview:
According to the best research available (which we will read in this class), to be a successful leader, you need to understand happiness and manage to it—yours and others’. Unfortunately, most leaders have to learn this fact by hard experience. Furthermore, they are never exposed to the expanding science of happiness, which contains a wealth of information on how to be happier as a leader and make others happier as well.
Career Focus:
Leadership & Happiness is meant for anyone aspiring to be a leader—whether in business, or even as head of a family. As you rise in the career ladder post-HBS, you will face many pressures: Loneliness at the top, dislocation from old friends, 80+ hour work weeks, and (probably) wealth. This class will help you mitigate the bad, and better handle the good.
Educational Objectives:
Students will take the best surveys on happiness, read some of the most influential modern research on the topic, discuss the research in class, and apply their knowledge to leadership scenarios. They will leave after seven weeks prepared to use the material during the balance of their time at HBS and in the workforce. Not only will this give them a competitive advantage in the labor market; it will also help them enjoy their work and lives.
Course Content and Organization:
Leadership & Happiness is unique to HBS in that it is lecture-based, not case-based. Each week, you will be required to take one (or more) academically-validated happiness survey, which will chart how you manage emotions, your attachment to money, the extent to which you have meaning in life, and the extent to which you pursue (or avoid) romantic relationships—to name a few. Additionally, you will be required to read 3-5 academic journal articles each week pertaining to the week’s lectures. Across seven weeks, we will cover a range of topics to prepare you for your next eighty years: Happiness versus unhappiness, emotional self-management, the science of falling and staying in love, loneliness in leadership, managing worldly idols (such as money and prestige), and finding your meaning in life.
Grading / Course Administration: Grading in the class will run as follows:
- Midterm take-home memo (a short essay/memo that discusses your insights from the surveys you have taken to date): 20%
- Final take-home memo or project (a short essay/memo, or a recorded lecture of you teaching friends or family more than one key topic of the course): 40%
- In-class participation: 20%
- Timely completion of surveys: 10%
- Attendance: 10%
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Leading a Family Business (LFB)
Course Number 1895
Overview:
Family businesses dominate the economies of most countries. According to research by McKinsey, businesses owned by families account for more than 70% of global GDP and 60% of global employment. They range in size from the corner store to the conglomerate, and include industry leaders in many sectors. Most family businesses begin as decisions made by founders to continue the legacy of what they have built by passing ownership down to their children. For those embarking on an entrepreneurial journey, it may turn into a family business at some point.
Leading a family business is a unique opportunity and challenge. It requires a mix of skills, many of which you have already learned at HBS but need to be tailored or adapted to a different environment. Through this course you will build those skills, learning from the experiences of those who have successfully navigated the risks and rewards of being a family business leader.
Career Focus:
The course will be relevant if you plan to:
- Work for a business that is owned by your family
- Be an owner of a family business, even if you don’t intend to work there
- Serve as a board member of a family business
- Explore the option of being the non-family leader of a family business
- Plan to start a business that you may decide to keep rather than sell
While the emphasis of the course will be on operating companies, there will be relevant takeaways for those planning to take a leadership role in a family office or family foundation.
Educational Objectives:
The objective of the course is to prepare you for the unique challenges and opportunities that accompany running a family business. It will address the following core questions:
- What is unique about family businesses compared to other kinds of companies? Are they more vulnerable to failure?
- What are the main types of family businesses and how does leadership vary across them?
- What kind of governance (family, corporate, etc.) is required to make effective decisions in a family business?
- How do you define success in a family business that goes beyond maximizing shareholder returns?
- How do you build and sustain competitive advantage?
- How do you plan for effective succession and transition of leadership?
- What are the key strategies for managing conflict?
- How do you create a career path as a family member or non-family member?
- How do you expand a family business beyond its original core?
- How do you turn around a once-successful family business that is struggling?
- When is the right time to sell the family business? How do you navigate that process?
- What are the danger zones and warning signs that leaders need to pay attention to?
Course Content and Organization:
The course will be divided into two main modules. The first module will focus on building the core leadership toolkit across topics such as strategy, governance, and succession. The second module will emphasize specific opportunities and challenges that leaders will likely encounter, such as how to navigate the career progression or turnaround a family business that has fallen on challenging circumstances.
Each session will involve a case discussion. Some of the cases will be of the standard variety and some will be “live cases” where the leaders from family businesses will be integrated throughout the session. Most cases will include a guest speaker who will share their leadership experiences and answer questions. Cases, subject to change/addition, include:
- 99 Ranch – Alice Chen, CEO, 2nd generation family member
- Ayala Corporation (speaker TBD)
- Carvajal S.A. (speaker TBD)
- COFRA/C&A – Jens Brenninkmeyer, Managing Director at Bregal Investments, 6th generation family member, HBS grad
- J.M. Huber – Molly Heaney, Board Director, 5th generation family member
- Market Basket (speaker TBD)
- Milo’s Tea – Tricia Wallwork, CEO, 3rd generation family member
- Pentland Brands – Andy Rubin, Chairman, 3rd generation family member, HBS grad
- White Castle – Lisa Ingram, CEO, 4th generation family member
The core text for the course will be Harvard Business Review’s Family Business Handbook, written by Josh Baron and Rob Lachenauer.
Grading / Course Administration:
Students will be graded on a mixture of engagement in class and a final paper. For the final paper, you will draw on your learnings from the course to develop a leadership plan. That plan will synthesize your views on what makes leadership of a family business similar and different from a non-family business, what type of leadership roles you might explore in a family business, a personal assessment on what skills you need to develop to succeed in that role(s), and an action plan to build those skills.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Making Difficult Decisions: The General Manager’s Job (MDD)
Course Number 1556
27 Sessions
Exam
(Previously: Becoming a General Manager)
Course Overview
Making decisions is integral to every manager’s job. Making Difficult Decisions: The General Manager’s Role (MDD) explores the kinds of decisions made by general managers (GMs) and how context influences both the nature of the choices to be made and the effectiveness of the decisions taken. The course views management as a crucial activity for enabling coordinated action in pursuit of organizational performance. Our emphasis is on how GMs get things done through making and guiding both larger and smaller decisions. We show how to use decision-making processes to achieve results and to move an organization forward.
The course defines context broadly. The principal focus is on the context surrounding the human group involved. We examine cognitive, interpersonal, and organizational factors that thwart effective decision making and introduce techniques for diagnosing and overcoming predictable pitfalls. Decisions are particularly challenging for general managers because they must rely on others – principally subordinates – to provide important input and data that inform decisions and to implement the choices made. The major constraint facing most managers is not the extent of their vision, but the resources available to them. Therefore, the essence of general management is to understand and fully harness the capabilities of the human resources available. Decision making goes far beyond merely knowing what one wants to accomplish. It requires developing a vision based on a clear-eyed evaluation of the capability of those around you, communicating that to them, gathering and considering their feedback, overseeing implementation and responding to the unexpected.
Making Difficult Decisions places particular emphasis on frameworks that help managers make, communicate, and implement decisions well. These practical management skills include how to craft and interpret dialogue, how to diagnose one's own propensities to reduce the likelihood of error, and how to diagnose group dynamics. The role of incentives – formal and informal, real and imagined – in driving behavior will also be examined. We discuss decision making as a process and describe the major considerations involved in designing such processes. The course does not address decision making tools such as data analytics, game theory, and simulations.
Possessing greater aptitude in and understanding of these issues positions managers to influence the design, direction, and functioning of organizational processes. The aim of MDD is to develop students' understanding of highly relevant, practical skills, and how to use them in day-to-day activities to make better decisions and to improve their own and their team's performance in decision making generally. Throughout, our focus is on high-level processes that are of interest to general managers; for this reason, case protagonists are typically division presidents or higher.
Course Content
A distinctive feature of the course is its variety of teaching materials, including experiential exercises, role-plays, multimedia cases, and visits from case protagonists, in addition to the usual HBS written case studies. Settings are varied as well. They include a wide variety of businesses and industries, ranging from startups to large multinationals and from software development to financial services, life sciences, and manufacturing. MDD also features many non-business protagonists and situations, including presidential taskforces, mountaineering expeditions, hospital administrators, and engineers involved in the space program.
MDD uses three types of sessions, interspersed throughout the semester, to teach a set of related ideas and frameworks.
Session Type I: MDD has 10 HBS Case Study classes – spanning sectors, industries, and organization size. In each, GMs face one or more important decisions, and wrestle with multiple challenges. These cases include traditional paper and multimedia formats. As in any HBS classroom, students are expected to participate regularly and actively in these discussions. Good contributions offer clear, rigorous argument, present detailed substantive recommendations, describe a coherent, internally consistent perspective or point of view, move the discussion forward by posing questions or drawing links between others’ comments, present relevant examples from personal experience or constructively critique positions, sharpen the class’s understanding of issues, or deepen an ongoing debate.
Session Type II: MDD includes 8 “lab sessions” that allow students to practice management skills in realistic simulated conversations. These will come in two forms. In 4 sessions, they will take place in class. Short vignettes will be distributed at the beginning of class, each based on a disguised real-life situation. They present a single situation in an organizational context, with a protagonist who must figure out what to do. Students will experiment, receive real-time feedback from instructors and/or each other, and observe others, all in an effort to develop practical management skills. In 4 other sessions, we conduct in depth role-play exercises in which students work in small groups. These sessions will take place in Batten. Practice and repetition are used to help students understand how to put into action concepts introduced in case discussions and lectures.
Session Type III: The course also includes 8 Dialogues, or conversations with successful GMs, who share their experiences and engage in conversations driven by student questions. We currently anticipate welcoming 10 guests to class, including 8 case protagonists and 2 full session guest dialogues. All will join us in the latter half of the course, when our discussion will turn to means for structuring decision making and the ways in which individual executives approached career-defining decisions.
The principal purpose of the course is to improve students’ ability to make and implement better decisions in the context of often complex interdependencies with others (subordinates, superiors, and even members of other groups or organizations). The course design reflects the following assumptions:
- This ability is relevant to all students and is not strictly the province of general managers.
- Everyone has distinct behavioral and attitudinal ‘footprints’ that shape how we make decisions.
- Being aware of one’s footprint and developing the self-awareness to make better decisions and implement them with more fidelity is a valuable skill for any manager/leader.
Assignments & Grading
The work for MDD includes case preparation, participation in case discussions, and participation in lab sessions; 40% of a student’s grade will be allocated based on participation in class discussions (including dialogue sessions with guests); 20% based on participation in lab sessions, and 40% based on a final written submission. In lieu of a final exam or paper, students are asked to prepare a written self-diagnosis reflecting on – and applying – the frameworks and competencies that they are developing throughout the semester. These submissions, which reflect work done throughout the semester and are not expected to require extensive time after classes end, should address:
- Reflecting on your current decision-making approach and/or behavioral footprint (mindsets and behavioral habits that shape your effectiveness in difficult moments) by reflecting on your previous experiences, or your motivations for taking the course.
- Reacting to situations presented in the 10 HBS case studies—what are the principal lessons you drew from a case or cases? How do you think you would have reacted in the protagonists’ shoes?
- Describing insights taken from lab sessions and experiences trying to apply course frameworks or competencies, such as those of Chris Argyris and David Kantor.
- Developing a personalized "self-awareness" plan of action to use after graduation. Such a plan should include, but not be limited to, reflections on your footprint and identification of "watch outs" or "trigger points" that threaten your ability to be a more effective decision maker, a list of tools and techniques to use in managing decision making processes and in managing difficult conversations and for diagnosing group dynamics.
These foci will constitute the body of submission, which should be developed over the course of the semester. This self-diagnosis will build on and return to notes/ideas produced early in the semester, and reflect on what’s changed, while building a compendium of ideas for how check less productive instincts and overcome shortcomings or weaknesses in interpersonal and other management skills in the months and years ahead.
The purpose of the course is thus to help launch a lifelong learning journey to support ongoing personal and professional development as a manager.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Managing Customers for Growth
Course Number 1965
14 Sessions
Project
Introduction
Without customers, there is no business!
This course focuses on how firms design and implement customer management activities to achieve sustainable customer growth. We will delve into the fundamentals of customer value, analyze strategies for customer acquisition, retention, and development, and apply customer analytics tools and technologies that enable a data-driven approach to customer management.
Course Objectives
· Provide frameworks, insights, and tools to successfully acquire, develop, and retain customers.
· Understand the dynamics of customer value, which are critical for firm valuation and growth assessment.
· Explore technologies that empower firms to adopt a data-driven approach to customer management activities.
Course Format
· Case Discussions: Engaging case discussions will be the primary format, complemented by workshops where we will analyze customer data.
· Important: No technical skills are required; a data scientist will be present in class to assist with any technical aspects
Career Focus
This course is ideal if you plan to:
· Grow your own business (e.g., CEO, CMO, Chief Growth Officer, Chief Customer Officer).
· Assist others in growing their businesses (e.g., consulting).
· Evaluate business growth trajectories (e.g., investors).
Assessment
Assessment type |
Weight |
Class participation |
40% |
3 short quizzes (throughout the course) |
20% |
Final Project (either individually or in pairs) |
40% |
Copyright © 2022 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Managing Human Capital
Course Number 2060
28 Sessions
Paper
Career Focus
The Managing Human Capital course has been specifically designed to teach practical skills for the future general manager (not just the human resource practitioner) who seeks to manage both other people and their own career with optimal effectiveness. As such, at its core, this course is intended to sharpen three capabilities: people development; people management; and career management. We will explore, at a more advanced level than was possible in LEAD, those people-related issues and challenges that any good general manager should understand to be effective.
The term human capital implies that people have the capacity to drive organizational performance. The basic premise of this course is that how one manages and develops others can be the source of sustainable competitive advantage for organizations and for individual leaders within them. Any and all students who believe they will need to effectively manage other people to produce superior business results (revenues, profits, growth) while also creating a unique place to work (such that superior business results are sustainable) should take this course.
Educational Objectives
The objective of Managing Human Capital can be captured in a simple question: How can I create places where talented people will gather, produce, develop, and thrive?
While the question is simple in concept, it is remarkably difficult to execute—proven most recently by the Great Resignation. Future graduates of HBS, like the population at large, will have more and more choices about how to work and how to manage work, especially given advances in “big data,” AI, and other workplace technologies. They, and their companies--from the great global enterprises of the 21st century to the smallest entrepreneurial venture--will struggle with common questions and concerns about the people who work in their organizations, such as:
- Module 1 (Hiring): What kind of people do I need, and how do I hire them?
- Module 2 (Socialization): How do I effectively on-board them, setting them up for success?
- Module 3 (Performance Management): How do I keep them fully engaged and productive?
- Module 4 (Compensation and Rewards): How do I make sure they are properly incented to do what the organization needs them to do?
- Module 5 (Coaching Effective Managers and Talent Development): How do I develop them over time, so they are prepared to take on bigger roles down the road? How do I let go those who are not contributing?
- Module 6 (Structure): How do I architect my group, team, division, or organization to make the management of human capital easier, not harder? And, as we enter an age in which technology has made the boundaries within organizations far more fluid, how do I make sure the “organizational” or “workplace” structures upon which organizations have traditionally relied actually yield the “collaboration structures” we need to get work done?
In each module, we will intentionally discuss cases that frame both traditional and bleeding-edge “Future of Work” approaches to each human capital challenge. The ‘answer’ will often lie somewhere in-between the extremes but will, with regularity, come back to a set of guiding criteria that connect how human capital is managed with the goal of organizational performance. We will also aim to collectively answer the question: how can I be ready for the way human capital will be managed when I come back for my 10th or 20th reunion--and what experiments should I conduct in my teams and organizations the interim to stay on the leading edge (without accidentally reinventing the wheel and rediscovering things we already knew)?
In each module, and indeed within almost every session, we will explore these topics through three lenses: managing others, being managed by others, and managing our own human capital.
Course Content and Organization
We are all in the class to learn new ways to manage human capital. But we all learn differently. As a result, this course will draw on a range of different ways to learn.
Cases. A majority of classes will be case-based, using materials that highlight and illustrate issues in the management of human capital.
Workshops. Learning can sometimes be best done in exercises designed to apply and practice what I teach about the management of human capital. I have carefully selected (and, in some cases, designed) workshop exercises that relate to most modules of the course.
Research and Technical Knowledge. An article or chapter that discusses good practice for each of the levers discussed in the course will accompany most case discussions.
The Class. This is a discussion-based class, where we learn from each other. With these topics, there will be ample opportunity for people to wrestle with the best way to manage. As always, our best conversations will be when we choose to find both areas of difference and areas of agreement.
The Instructor. My career, both prior to academia and now as an academic, has been focused on exploring how to run organizations such that they make their people more effective, not less. I hope to share my own perspectives, as well as those from more general research, during our classes.
Guests. We will have a wide range of guests in our class. We will have guests who are protagonists in a case, subject matter experts, and successful C-Suite executives. My goal with these guests will be to understand their perspective on the core issues of the class.
Brief “Live Case” Assignment. I believe we learn best when we are engaged directly with organizations and the people leading them. The brief “live case” assignment will be an opportunity for you to talk directly with a small handful of the 2700+ alumni of the MHC course about their experiences, including the most and least successful ways in which their human capital has been managed by others (bosses, mentors, etc.) over their careers to date. (Think of this as a chance to hear both their best and worst stories and then make sense of those stories using the lessons of the MHC course.) We will devote one session, facilitated by an expert, to teach us how to effectively conduct such a discussion about a person’s development and career path. The final deliverable will be a short, written “live case”: a short memo that ties the alumni experiences back to aspects of the course. My hope is that seeing these concepts in action will help you understand what works well and what doesn't. (Note: The alumni interviews will be conducted by groups of students, but the memo will be written individually.)
The final grade will be determined 50% on class participation, 50% on written work.
Because of the nature of the exercises, workshops, simulations, and conversations in MHC, each section will be limited to 86 students. As a result, cross-registrants are rarely accepted but may submit a request via this link.
Please email professor Ethan Bernstein (ebernstein@hbs.edu) directly with any questions.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Managing International Trade and Investment
Course Number 1166
28 Sessions
Exam
Course Overview
The course approaches globalization from the perspective of firms, asking students to consider the choices that managers face as they participate in and shape cross-border trade and investment.
Career Focus
This course should interest any student who plans to work for a firm with transnational interests or investments or students with significant interests in the global and domestic politics that affect trade and capital flows.
Educational Objectives
The course aims to equip students with a deeper understanding of globalization and international business by focusing on three broad themes. First, we will consider the variety of domestic institutions and the relationships between institutions, markets, and competitive advantage. We will consider how various organizations of labor markets, financial markets, and regulatory regimes, for example, create opportunities and barriers for multinational firms. Second, we will focus on the more informal domestic “rules” that shape international openness and, therefore, the strategic environment for transnational business. These informal rules and bargains include the political coalitions that sustain globalization and the dynamics of international business in different contexts of economic and political inequalities. Lastly, we will consider transnational firms as political actors, creating and shaping domestic and international politics rather than simply reacting to the decisions of policy-makers.
Course Content
The course will be divided into three modules. The first covers the multilateral and domestic institutional contexts for international trade and capital flows. The cases will allow us to consider how firms succeed and fail by understanding, or failing to understand, the political and social arrangements, in addition to economic conditions, that surround international openness. We will also consider the fragility of globalization itself by emphasizing openness to trade and capital flows as political choices that are subject to change. Students will understand and evaluate, for example, the rise of the WTO and how China’s entry into the WTO affected international trade. The second module looks at varieties of capitalisms, meaning the profound differences in market organization in different countries and regions. We will focus on cases in which an understanding of domestic rules, formal and informal, creates opportunities and constraints for transnational firms, for example examining Shell in 1990s-2000s Russia, Google in Europe, battles between financial firms and states in sovereign debt markets, and Chinese firms on the “belt and road.” The final module looks at firms in contexts of change and uncertainty. Here, we consider the profound changes to the global business landscape accompanying the rise of illiberal populisms and competition, even confrontation, between the US and China, and the interdependence of technology and digital markets. We will look at how firms confront markets and politics in technological innovation and competition (data access and management, financial technology, semiconductors), in frontier markets (platform e-commerce in Iran and free trade zones in North Korea), and amid global hostilities (the US vs. Huawei in 5G).
Copyright © 2022 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Managing Service Operations
Course Number 2120
28 Sessions
Paper/Project
Service is the business of people helping people, and people are born to help one another. The survival of our species literally depends upon it. Yet, service organizations are often designed and managed in a way that prevents us from realizing our potential.
Service organizations are complex and diverse, and they continue to grow in prominence. They account for 63% of the global economy, 80% of the U.S. GDP, and 86% of the jobs taken by last year’s graduating class of Harvard Business School MBAs.
Managing Service Operations (MSO) teaches students how to effectively design, manage, and improve service organizations. Students will learn:
- How to create distinctive and sustainable service strategies,
- How to execute service models that enable customers, employees, and owners to simultaneously thrive, and;
- How to adapt to evolving customer needs and changing competitive landscapes.
A general management course, MSO resides at the intersection of leadership, strategy, marketing, and operations. It draws upon cutting-edge research and field examples from a broad array of industries, including financial services, government, healthcare, hospitality, professional services, restaurants, retail, and transportation. The course is useful for students planning to lead, work in, advise, or invest in service organizations.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Managing and Innovating in Financial Services
Course Number 1509
28 Sessions
Exam
Financial services firms play a critically important role in the global economy. They finance investment, facilitate payments, and help firms and households save and manage risk. These financial services are provided in an array of organizations and structures – from fintech startups to private credit funds to multi-trillion-dollar global banks and a lot more – in an industry that is always under the threat of disruption. There is no industry that has seen as much disruption – both good (innovation) and bad (crisis) – as financial services.
In Managing and Innovating in Financial Services, we examine the challenges and opportunities faced in financial services as incumbent firms and startups try to navigate and shape an environment in which competition, technology and regulation are constantly changing.
We will look at a variety of financial institutions and financial service providers including banks, nonbank financial intermediaries, and fintechs. We will examine decisions through the lens of these firms with government policy and regulation as an important factor that often shapes their decisions.
The course is divided into three modules. In the first module, we’ll study the business of banking. Banks are worth studying both because they are important credit providers and because of their unique role in the payment system: they are the only entities that can hold accounts at the Federal Reserve and are thus critical in money movement across the financial system. And you can’t really understand innovation and tech disruption without understanding the basics of banking. There are three reasons why. First, many of the problems innovators are trying to solve are focused on gaps in banking services. Yet, many of the challenges they face stem from the fact that they are not banks. Second, there are many opportunities to help banks get better. Third, many innovators depend on banks as their partners – either to provide credit to them or to facilitate their financial transactions, both lending and payments.
In this first module, we will seek to understand the drivers of value in banking. This will involve getting up to speed on understanding bank financial statements and valuation, which are likely unfamiliar to you even if you’ve worked in finance. We will develop a set of tools that will be valuable in evaluating banks, nonbank financial intermediaries, and fintechs. We will also examine when things go terribly wrong in banking by examining the Silicon Valley Bank crisis, the Global Financial Crisis, and the ongoing regulatory response to both.
In the second module, we study credit, focusing on the main types of credit: residential mortgages, small business loans, consumer credit, lending to larger firms, and commercial real estate loans. Our main focus will be on firms that are innovating in the way they provide these loans. Some of these firms are fintechs, but others are banks and yet others are nonbank financial intermediaries like business development companies and private credit funds. We will develop a framework for understanding how a credit intermediary creates value.
In the third module, we will look at the payments system and the innovations taking place in that sector. Much fintech activity in this area builds off the traditional payment rails. We will start with a review of interchange, discuss firms that are trying to bundle payments with credit and other services, and then examine international payments. The module ends with panel discussions of innovations in real time payments and stablecoins. We will also have a panel on application of GenAI in financial services, including in payments.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Managing the Future of Work
Course Number 1677
27 Sessions
Exam
Course Overview and Career Focus
More than ever, running a company is about managing people. This class focuses on several core themes around the future of work and people management: How will technology change work and the workforce? How can leaders harness new technologies for transformation of the people side of the business model? How do talent ecosystems matter for investment and productivity? How do different training and skilling models facilitate career development in the face of rapidly changing skill requirements? How will demographic or workforce composition issues impact labor supply? What actions should leaders take in light of the future workforce?
Students in almost any career track will touch upon these issues. Consultants or bankers will themselves see their roles change inside professional services firms and many will also sell services like workforce transformation advisory to clients. Future entrepreneurs or tech leaders may seek to develop automation technology, Ed tech, HR tech, or other businesses that build off future of work trends. Public sector leaders will confront these issues through educational or government institutions.
Course Content and Organization
The course covers the following main themes:
Technology and the future of jobs. Will automation, AI, and robotics lead to net job displacement, and if so, when? We begin by building frameworks for different paths of technology adoption and what these scenarios mean for firms and workers.
Labor markets and good jobs. What defines a good job? Where are good jobs across different industries, occupations, and geographies? What is the role of leaders in investing in good jobs that improve worker wellbeing? What role do ecosystems and local/regional economic development initiatives play?
Demographics. How will companies and labor market institutions need to accommodate demographic changes, and can firms gain a competitive edge by getting out in front of these trends?
New labor models. Will remote work and the gig economy lead to fragmentation of the employment relationship? Will it change the geography of firms? We will consider firms managing the choice between contractors and W2 employees, platforms trying to sell flexible work solutions to enterprises, and adoption of different work arrangements.
Training, reskilling, and transformation. How should firms manage workforce transformation in light of new technologies? Should leaders invest in reskilling or upskilling their workforce instead of buying talent on the market? What makes talent development or training models successful?
Public policy. How should labor market or safety net policy change under different future of work scenarios?
Grading
Grading is based on class participation, a final exam, and a short exercise.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Market Perspectives (previously Finance and Capitalism)
Course Number 1457
Course Overview
This case-based course applies market perspectives and economic analysis to contemporary issues. The cases explore concrete situations that highlight the challenges and tradeoffs of decision-makers. Issues explored include: education, urban development, illegal drugs, rent control, housing, drug pricing, racial references, corporate political action, social media, sea level rise, employment of people with disabilities, and the like. We explore situations in which businesses’ pursuit of profits both positively and negatively affect their communities, including their employees, local physical and social environments.
We use a collection of basic economic concepts including supply and demand, externalities, incentives, property rights, agency conflicts, and information asymmetries. We develop these tools and then apply them to contemporary issues, which enables the discussions to go beyond the generalities of headlines to grapple with practical solutions to specific problems. For example, instead of discussing general environmental challenges, we focus on how a small island community deals with the impact of sea level rise and related concerns, highlighting costs and benefits, property rights and the complexity of decision-making.
The course doesn’t push a political philosophy. Rather, it encourages students to discuss their own approaches using the tools that are frequently applied to business decisions. What to optimize, how to optimize, and who benefits or loses, are frequent concerns in our case discussions. There are rarely right or wrong answers but using the tools of business analysis can help frame the discussion productively so that we can gain a better understanding of our own perspectives, and the perspectives of those who favor a different approach.
Course Structure
The course is taught using case method, with traditional and multimedia cases along with occasional supplementary readings. 19 class sessions plus a paper. Classes meet on the Wednesdays and Thursdays of the Y-schedule (no Fridays).
Grading
50% based on class participation and polls
50% based on a paper
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Mastering Consulting and Advisory Skills
Course Number 2043
Paper
Each year, hundreds of HBS students walk across the Commencement stage anticipating a near-term career in management consulting. In addition, many more also prepare to enter other careers where their roles will be more advisory than operational. Often with only limited work experience as analysts or, in most cases, no background whatsoever, these students face a daunting set of challenges. Never has a career in consulting been more competitive or uncertain: a down market has led firms to curtail hiring and lower the threshold for termination, developments in AI raise questions about the fundamental value of the individual consultant. Bright students who could once rely on introductory firm training and apprenticeship learning to transition to a role as a skilled advisor to executives have much less opportunity to differentiate themselves from the pack. This course thus aims to bring these students one step closer to mastering the skills they will need to navigate their successful post-MBA roles as advisors and counselors in the face of challenging headwinds.
After a successful inaugural semester as a full-term course, Mastering Consulting and Advisory Skills (MCAS) is transitioning to a half-term structure to maximize effectiveness. Based on alumni feedback, a half-term structure will better MCAS to distill key learnings and address target skills to take students interested in a consulting career to the next level. The course will be offered in both the Fall and Spring to address two target groups within the EC: in the Fall, amidst recruiting, prospective consultants; in the Spring, once offers have been made, students intending to go into advisory and consulting roles.
This course was developed as part of an independent project by three HBS students in partnership with Senior Lecturer David Fubini. Professor Fubini spent 34 years at McKinsey & Company, ultimately establishing and heading the firm’s Boston office, as well as leading a number of critical organizational and strategic practices. With his guidance, the student group generated a list of topics they wanted to master and questions they yearned to answer, all in the service of doing high-quality work that was impactful and meaningful not only for their clients and firms, but also for themselves. This list became the structure for the course themes, topics, and cases, which was further refined in partnership with members from the inaugural 2023 cohort. The course design also builds on the historically successful EC course Professional Firm Management, and leverages learning from the Leading Professional Services Firm Executive Education course. The outcome is a course curated by and for aspiring-consultant students and taught by a deeply experienced practitioner.
MCAS seeks to help students gain a comprehensive knowledge of the tools, skills, frameworks, and mindsets required to be successful across all facets of their advisory/consultative roles. While many consulting firms’ initial training programs highlight the skills required to complete key tasks—performing analyses, building models, crafting presentations—they are, by necessity, short and introductory only. This course goes deeper. Grounded in the understanding that relationships are paramount to success as an advisor, this course priorities the client relationship, in addition to how to manage teams, partners, firm politics, and the consultant’s life and career. Understanding the complexities of the role, this course will present students with complex and difficult situations to develop strategies for dealing with pressing, industry-specific dilemmas. The course covers this material through a mix of cases, workshops, discussions, and a final paper.
This course serves to provide students with a pragmatic lens to consulting in order to create a comprehensive toolkit they can use to bring differentiated value to their firms. Importantly, it does so in a foundational way that will build on summer internships and other consulting experiences while still remaining accessible to interested newcomers. With this course, students can start their careers with a meaningful set of skills they can apply before formalized training even begins. Put simply, this course will help students master consulting and advisory skills.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Modern Corporate Strategy: Revitalizing the Corporation
Course Number 1231
14 Sessions
Paper/Project
14 Sessions
Paper/Project
Overview
In a VUCA world (Volatile, Uncertain, Complex, Ambiguous), far more value is created by companies like Amazon, Meta, and Alphabet that develop entirely novel business models than by entrenched incumbents, such as P&G or Ford, which struggle to eke out market share gains. However, many of the most valuable new ventures, like Tesla and Netflix, are also among the most shorted stocks as investors struggle to see their long-term potential.
To understand why and how this might occur, the overarching framework applied throughout this course covers “The Complete Strategy Landscape”[1]. This illustrates that companies must not just be concerned with the value captured by the one-time formulation of a beautifully aligned competitive strategy, which was the focus of the RC Strategy course, but by the value potential of their business model and with its value realization through effective implementation over time.
Within this landscape, the Corporate Strategy course addresses three questions that challenge every modern corporation. The first and most fundamental is, "How do companies create shareholder value across multiple markets?" in the midst of radical technological and social change. The second, whose identification won Ronald Coase the Nobel Prize in Economics[2] and which, unless we believe that one company will take over the world, is the logical corollary of the first, asks, "What is the limit to the scope of the firm?" The third question addresses the administrative issue of "How can we effectively manage a multi-business corporation?" to engender entrepreneurship and adaptability while maintaining control and realizing economies. All companies, whether large, diversified multinationals or small entrepreneurial startups, wrestle with these issues, and their appropriate resolution enormously impacts performance.
Course Content and Organization
The course is structured into four modules:
1. Business Models and The Complete Strategy Landscape
How can firms create enormous entrepreneurial value by developing new business models? The module focuses on understanding how novel business models – the combination of "job to be done," assets required to deliver that service, and monetization method – create value. We will examine WhatsApp (worth $22b?...) and Walmart in its competition with Amazon. The module also studies how firms transform their activities to the evolving external opportunity set. We will examine the transformation of the FBI after the 9/11 attacks, Komatsu's introduction of "SmartConstruction," and the digital transformation of a large bank in Latin America (Davivienda), among others, to understand how to evaluate the potential in new ways of doing business.
2. Resources and the Continuum of Effective Corporate Strategy
The course identifies valuable resources (and capabilities) that can function as the "Mickey Mouse" that adds value to the corporate portfolio. By studying strategies at firms as different as Danaher and Clorox, it introduces a continuum of effective corporate strategy, ranging from conglomerates and private equity firms to tightly related corporate entities and startups. It demonstrates that the same "better off" and "ownership" tests apply to every effective corporate strategy. This logic can be captured in a company's objective, scope, and corporate advantage statement.
3. Scope: Businesses and Portfolio Transformation
Defining the boundaries of the firm - the limit to its scope - is critical to crafting the corporate portfolio. At the extreme, this determines which businesses to enter and exit, as well as the extent of vertical integration and geographic expansion of the firm. More generally, this requires developing a portfolio that is robust to changes in the external environment and has to address the choice between internal development of new businesses and corporate M&A. This module delves into scope choices in various settings, from a narrow (Zoom) versus a broad (Microsoft) Scope or large global organizations (Cadbury) to startups (Foodology).
4. Organization and the Role of Corporate Headquarters
To justify ownership of any business a corporation must have the appropriate structures, systems, and policies to actually realize value. This module examines these design choices, focusing on the role of corporate headquarters in shaping and controlling business unit strategy and performance, building centers of competence, and sharing activities. It covers specific tools corporate executives use, including delegation of authority, approaches to resource allocation, and corporate initiatives. The module concludes with cases on corporate transformation, highlighting the challenge of realigning resources, organizational structure, and scope to face a constantly evolving competitive landscape.
Career Focus
The perspective adopted throughout the course is that of the CEO and the pragmatic challenges they face in crafting a strategy that successfully exploits available opportunities while confronting the realities of competition in the 21st century. As a result, the course should be of value to anyone interested in managing, consulting, financing, or investing in a company that operates in multiple businesses, geographies, or activities.
[1] See D. Collis, “Wy do so Many Strategies Fail??” Harvard Business Review July/August 2021 pp 82-93.
[2] R. Coase “The Nature of the Firm,“ Economica: 1937.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
The Moral Leader
Course Number 1562
Weekly 2-hour seminar sessions
Paper
Overview
This course uses works of literature, primarily novels, in place of case studies. Its aim, as a former student put it, is to show "how people develop the skills, courage, and perseverance to use power, money, and influence in constructive ways."
The course readings for this course come from many countries, they include novels, short stories, plays, and excerpts from classic works of moral philosophy. The readings also span many centuries, ranging from ancient Greek plays to Shakespeare to contemporary works.
Educational Objectives
Literature provides a distinctive and important perspective on leadership. First, it offers a strong dose of realism. None of the novels in the course is a simple, inspiring tale of moral heroism or sainthood. This authenticity provides a valuable learning opportunity: it is easier to learn from people who are like most of humanity - complicated and flawed - than from a gallery of heroes and villains. Realism also reveals leaders' struggles and failures and displays the blind spots, assumptions, and behavior that can derail leaders.
In addition, fiction lets students see leaders from the inside. In real life, people in charge rarely give complete, unvarnished accounts of their thinking. In contrast, fiction lets us watch leaders reflect, worry, scheme, hesitate, commit, exult, and regret. As one former student put it, "To enter the mindset of the characters, to be them, to feel what they feel...This is the privilege of the fiction reader."
Finally, leaders have to make hard decisions, and this course draws literature and on classic works of moral philosophy to provide a practical framework for making these decisions. The course is organized around this framework. The first part focuses on accountability, the second on character, and the last on pragmatism.
Format
The course meets in the afternoon block for two hours. Enrollment is limited to 60 students in order to foster in-depth discussion and wide participation.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Motivation and Incentives
Course Number 1816
27 Sessions
Exam
Career Focus
This course gives students frameworks and tools for (i) understanding what motivates people and (ii) designing incentive systems, broadly defined, that motivate employees and others associated with an organization to engage in behaviors that further the organization’s value-creating purpose. The course is useful for students in all career tracks and with any industry focus.
Educational Objectives
By the end of the course, students will:
- Understand the wide range of motivational factors that drive human behavior in an organizational context, including pay, perquisites, promotions, opportunities for skill development, social approval, fairness, stress, emotional states, autonomy, self-identity, and values
- Have the skills to build and manage effective incentive systems, whether based on monetary compensation or based on other forms of rewards, that tap into people’s underlying motivations and promote value-creating behavior
- Understand how an organization’s incentive systems shape the mix of individuals who are attracted to, promoted within, and retained by the organization
- Know how to design organizational processes, such as hiring procedures and training programs, in ways that complement the organization’s formal incentive systems
- Have the analytical tools to connect an organization’s motivational strategy to the precise mechanisms by which the organization creates value
Course Content and Organization
The course takes an interdisciplinary perspective overall and draws heavily from behavioral economics, the field that combines insights from economics and psychology to understand human decision making.
In order to establish a baseline from which the rest of the course builds, Module 1 explores the classical economic approach to analyzing organizational incentive systems. Using an extremely simple view of motivation, the economic approach provides a large number of useful insights. The key observation is that it is impossible to perfectly measure and therefore impossible to directly reward the value that is created by an individual on behalf of an organization. When contending with this challenge, the designer of an incentive system faces an important tradeoff between inducing high levels of motivation and inducing the right types of behavior. All incentive systems represent different strategies for managing this tradeoff.
Module 2 challenges and expands the classical economic approach by considering a much richer perspective on what motivates people. Relying primarily on a psychological lens, this module examines how the design of incentive systems should account for the relevance of non-monetary rewards, the social nature of the workplace, the emotions experienced in a work environment, and the role of meaning and purpose in shaping motivation. These factors can cause well-intentioned incentive systems to backfire, but these factors simultaneously represent an opportunity for a skilled manager to harness a powerful set of motivators for the purposes of value creation.
Module 3 synthesizes the ideas from earlier in the course and embeds them in the broader context of an organization’s overall strategy and operations. The module will analyze the interaction of formal incentive systems with other organizational processes that may undermine or reinforce value creating behavior. The module will also critically examine common assumptions regarding the sources of value creation. Finally, students will have the opportunity to reflect on how their own personal values should interface with their objectives and approach when designing incentive systems to shape others’ behavior.
Group Project and Evaluation
Students will work in groups of four or five to prepare a presentation on a frontier topic in the broad area of motivation in organizations. Examples: students might present a “mini-case” on a company that uses innovative incentive practices; students might report the results of a laboratory-style experiment exploring a novel source of motivation; or students might share a synthesis of lessons learned from a handful of interviews conducted with interesting thinkers in the field. The instructors will suggest a number of pre-approved topics from which students can choose, and students can also propose their own topics (subject to instructor approval and enough interest from other students to form a group). This project is not meant to be a full-fledged final course assignment, but instead a lighter-touch opportunity to explore an interesting idea in line with the course framework.
The components of the overall course grade are as follows: 50% based on class participation, 10% based on the group project, and 40% based on an exam at the end of the semester.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Navigating Your Worth: AI, Negotiations, and the Nature of Expertise
Course Number 1730
6 Sessions
Paper
Overview
In the last decade distributed applications have revolutionized the collection of data. The spread of generative AI has enabled companies and governments to train models on this data with the potential to create replicas of professional intelligence. How will this explosion of modeled intelligence influence the role and power of professional workers? Which jobs will be highly valued? How should you negotiate the rights to your intellectual capital when it can be codified into an infinitely scalable AI model?
This course teaches you how information and artificial intelligence affect what deals are most valuable, and the right frameworks for choosing your expertise, packaging your expertise and striking a successful deal. The lessons will be most useful to anyone entering today’s labor market, entrepreneurs starting new ventures, and investors. Students will develop their strategy through simulated negotiation exercises, experience from guest speakers, and practice in the field along-side experts.
Educational Objectives
To get a sense for the fundamental shift in negotiating today’s labor market, consider the following: in today’s environment, your expertise can be codified. Consider the new Tom Hank’s film Here, where an AI model of Tom’s acting expertise can be used to face-swap and de-age him. Using similar technology, the emails, presentations and digital trail of your judgement on-the-job can be transformed into a model of your expertise that is disembodied, scaled, recombined and sold. How should you manage, price and negotiate over the data generated by your work? What if instead, you find yourself the owner of data generated by people you employ? How should you use it to remain competitive? What are the ethical and social implications of the choices you make? We will use theory and evidence from economics, law, and psychology to understand what your best strategy is, and to anticipate how the labor market and economy will be transformed by these negotiations in aggregate.
Using the lessons and frameworks we develop from examining the development of AI and data technologies we will examine individual choices you will need to make in an AI enabled world. These could include how you should negotiate your employment contracts or other business agreements, how to consider choices in your personal life and how to rethink the power of collective action in securing these rights in a changing environment. We will examine how to value and negotiate privacy. We will assess how the movement for greater transparency changes who gets what. Throughout, students will develop a process for recognizing the elements that have, and have not, changed fundamentally in the era of information access and exploitation.
Career Focus and Faculty
This course is designed to help students consider how to develop and value their expertise in a world where cognitive skills that were exclusively human are increasingly being built into models that can be scaled and continue to learn. It is being taught by Professors Zoe Cullen and Shikhar Ghosh. Prof Cullen is a leading labor economist whose research covers the impact of information and AI for firms, employees, and entrepreneurs. Prof Ghosh has been teaching courses on entrepreneurship and technology. He has built leading companies in the transition to the mobile and Internet economies. More recently he has been studying the development of AI and its likely social and business implications. Professors Cullen and Ghosh have designed this course to explore the implications of data and AI on the job market and offer practical insights to students who are entering the work force.
Grading / Course Administration
Students will participate in simulated negotiations; participation in these exercises (including written reflections) will account for 50% of the grade. The remainder will reflect participation in class.
Negotiation
Course Number 2240
28 Sessions
Exam
Enrollment: Limited to 60 students per section
28 Sessions
Exam
Enrollment: Limited to 60 students per section
Career Focus & Educational Objectives
Managerial success requires the ability to negotiate. Whether you are forging an agreement with your suppliers, trying to ink a deal with potential customers, raising money from investors, managing a conflict inside your firm, or resolving a dispute that is headed towards litigation, your ability to negotiate will determine how well you perform.
Because others do not have the same interests, perspectives, and values as you, negotiation skill is critical-professionally and personally. This course will enable you to become a more effective negotiator by enhancing your abilities to:
- Identify (often-overlooked) value-creating potential in different situations;
- Design and execute agreements that unlock maximum value on a sustainable basis;
- End up with an appropriate share of the value that is negotiated;
- Understand the vital role of ethics in negotiation, even where the parties' ethical standards vary dramatically;
- Work with people whose backgrounds, expectations, perspectives, values, and ethical standards differ from your own; and
- Reflect on-and learn from-your experience.
This course will teach you how to analyze, prepare for, and execute negotiations at a sophisticated level-through actions both at and away from the bargaining table. It will give you the opportunity to enhance your strengths as a negotiator and to shore up your weaknesses.
Course Content
Moving from simple (two-party, one-shot, price deals) to complex (multiple parties and issues, internal divisions, long time-frames, cross-border deals), the course integrates three complementary perspectives: analytic, behavioral, and contextual. While we will analyze a number of traditional case studies, the heart of the course is a series of interactive negotiation exercises. These exercises will give you hands-on negotiating experience. You will learn first by actually negotiating, and then by stepping back to compare your approach and results with others. You will be able to test your analytic ability and tactical skill, and to experiment with new approaches.
The course is a laboratory in which you will be both experimenter and subject. Sometimes the most important learning comes from apparent "failure"-and so the course is designed to let you fail in the safe setting of a classroom, and thus help you avoid costly real mistakes.
All of the sections of EC Negotiation will cover the foregoing in considerable depth, though individual faculty members may vary in their emphases, case material, and sequencing.
Grading & Course Requirements
Grading will be based on class participation and the final exam (or paper if permitted by instructor). The exact weighting may vary from section to section. In all instances, however, diligent completion of the negotiation exercises is essential.
Please note this course is offered in both Fall and Spring terms.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Ownership (OWN): Define Success, Create Advantage, Build to Last, Engage Effectively
Course Number 1235
Exam
Overview:
This course explores the power of ownership in shaping company success. Most of the world’s companies are privately held rather than publicly traded. Or they are publicly traded but privately controlled. For example, in the US, around 50% of publicly traded companies are controlled by founders or their descendants. In all of these cases, a relatively small number of owners exercise significant influence. Within the constraints of what is legally allowed, these owners define the main parameters by which the company operates, for instance: what success means for the business, how decisions are made, and what strategic options are on/off the table. Owners can push the company to pursue strategies that are ethically driven (e.g., Patagonia), or the opposite (e.g., Purdue Pharma).
By understanding these dynamics, students will be able to build long-term, sustainable strategies that account for the strengths/weaknesses that are built into both their companies as well as those of their competitors. Many of you will work for companies that are not widely held by the public, and virtually all of you will compete against such companies. For those who plan to start a company and want it to last beyond your leadership, you will need to consider whose hands to leave it in after your departure.
Career Focus:
This course is designed to be broadly relevant to students, since ownership is a dimension that shows up in virtually every setting. A deeper understanding of ownership will help you make better decisions about your career as well as in your role as an organizational leader. It will have particular relevance for those who plan to be a company owner, as an entrepreneur, executive, and/or investor.
Educational Objectives:
The main objectives of the course are to:
- Increase exposure to the full range of ownership models and how they differ from each other, including: charity, cooperative/mutual, employee, family, founder, and government. We will also consider “hybrid” companies that are publicly traded but controlled by a founder, foundation, or family
- Learn how to analyze companies and industries through the lens of ownership
- Explore pros/cons of long-term private ownership models
The key questions we will explore are:
- In what ways does the ownership of a company affect how it competes?
- What are the strengths and weaknesses of different ownership models?
- When is it time to change a company’s ownership model (e.g., going from private to public or vice versa)?
- What does it take to be good at ownership (vs. management)?
Course Content and Organization:
The course is divided into four main modules:
- Defining success. The objectives of most companies are far more complex than a focus on maximizing shareholder value. Students will learn a methodology for assessing and articulating more complex owner goals.
- Creating advantage: Ownership shapes both the resources that companies have access to (human, financial, and social capital) as well as how they allocate those resources to create advantage. Ownership models can be seen as solutions to specific strategic problems, such as scaling a business or sustaining a culture. We will explore the competitive advantages and disadvantages of different ownership models, how companies can use ownership as a competitive weapon, and how to predict what companies will do based on who owns them.
- Building to last: Not all companies care about longevity – for some, it is a purely financial decision, for others the goal is to be acquired, or to serve a time-limited purpose. However, for many companies, longevity is a critical part of how they define success. We will examine why once-prosperous companies fail and the ways in which ownership influences corporate mortality.
- Engaging effectively: Ownership is a skill that can be learned and is distinct from management. Many students will be owners of a company at some points in their lives. We will investigate what it means to be effective at ownership, learning from the owners of sports teams. We will explore how a shift in ownership model (e.g., going from public to private) can be a tool for changing a company’s trajectory. We will also consider the “Founder’s Final Act,” which is the choice that a founder makes about where to locate ownership when they leave the business. That choice will have a profound impact on the company’s future path.
Each session will involve a case discussion. Some of the cases will be of the standard variety and some will be “live cases” where company leaders and/or owners will be integrated throughout the session. A number of cases will include guest speakers from the company. Cases, subject to change/addition, include:
- Dell Technologies. Guest Speaker: Steve Felice, Former President and Chief Commercial Officer of Dell
- John Lewis Partnership
- Land O’Lakes. Guest speaker: Teddy Bekele, Chief Technology Officer
- New Balance. Guest Speaker: Chris Davis, Chief Marketing Officer and 2nd generation family member
- Oakland Athletics. Guest Speaker: John Fisher, Principal Owner
- Rolex
- Tata
- The Hershey Company
- Tribal Councils Investment Group of Manitoba. Guest Speakers: Heather Berthelette, CEO, and Chief Dennis Meeches, President
- Vanguard
- Wegmans. Guest Speaker: Colleen Wegman, CEO, 4th generation family member
Grading / Course Administration:
Students will be graded based on engagement in class and a final exam. In the exam, students will apply the lessons from the course to a company, including the ways in which a company’s ownership has shaped its strategic choices, how ownership has been a source of competitive advantage/disadvantage, and what they see as the primary strategic issues/options for that company in the future.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Power and Influence
Course Number 2056
27 Sessions
Paper
Excludes enrollment in Power and Influence for Positive Impact (2055) in the fall term
Introduction
This is a course about understanding power and influence dynamics and learning to use them as effective tools for analyzing your surroundings and achieving your goals. It is a course about getting things done in the real world, where politics and personalities often seem to hinder rather than help you. Power and Influence is a course for those of you who want to make things happen, despite the obstacles that might stand in your way. This course is also intended to unearth your implicit theories and feelings about power and influence. These have a profound impact on how you perceive problems and opportunities, and subsequently, how you decide upon particular courses of action. To help you develop a realistic point of view, you will start from day one to become aware and to test your assumptions about power and influence.
Course Objectives
This course includes conceptual models, tactical approaches, self-assessment tools and simulation exercises to help you develop your own influence style and understand political dynamics as they unfold around you. By focusing on specific expressions of power and influence, this course provides you with the opportunity to observe effective and ineffective uses of power in different organizational contexts and career stages. It will also introduce difficult ethical questions associated with the use of power and influence. By design, this course will challenge you to define for yourself what will constitute the ethical exercise of power and influence in your life. The objectives of the course are to help you:
- Develop a conceptual framework for understanding power and influence. You should be able to define power and influence and begin to appreciate how essential they are for your own career. You will learn how to identify critical sources of political conflict, and how to use tools to assuage conflict or harness it to produce constructive outcomes.
- Practice diagnostic skills that will enable you to map out the political landscape, understand others' perspectives and power bases, and learn to predict and influence their actions.
- Assess your own power bases and influence style and consider strategies for expanding them.
- Begin to build a repertoire of influence tactics that will enable you to be effective in a variety of contexts and situations.
- Develop your own strategy for building and exercising power and influence ethically and responsibly.
Course Content
After introducing you to the volatile dynamics of power and influence at work, the course will help you develop a deeper understanding of political issues through three interrelated modules:
Power and influence in interpersonal relationships: How to influence others?
What is power? Where does it come from? In the first module, we begin to explore the nature of power and influence in interpersonal relationships. We will discuss personal, positional, and relational sources of power. In particular, we will analyze the importance of networks of relationships as sources of power. This module includes an exercise (Network Assessment Exercise) designed to help you assess your own network of relationships.
In this module, we will also consider how to leverage personal, positional, and relational power bases through influence tactics that fit individual and situational needs. We will learn how to understand our "influence targets," so as to tailor our approach accordingly. What motivates people to respond to influence attempts? How can you cater your influence approach to the different needs and preferences of those around you? How can you recognize when your influence attempts are not working, and how do you change approaches when this happens?
We will explore these questions through a series of cases about people in very different situations with different opportunities and constraints on the influence tactics they can use. We will also use two exercises. The first one is a coaching exercise that will enable you to get feedback on your communication skills. It is meant to help you better project both warmth and strength and address the particular challenges that you may face as a public communicator. The second exercise is the Influence Style Questionnaire (ISQ), which will provide you with personal feedback on how your influence style is perceived by co-workers and the extent to which you adapt your style to situational requirements.
Power and Influence in organizations: How to navigate organizational politics?
This module addresses the question of how power and influence manifest in organizations. To be successful in getting things done in organizations, it is critical that you be able to comprehend the patterns of interdependence among organizational participants and to diagnose their relative power. Our focus will be on learning to read and diagnose the political landscape in organizations. How do power and influence dynamics work in organizations? What are the key sources of power in organizations? Why do we see political conflict in organizations? How can political conflict be handled to serve constructive ends?
We will consider how to address these questions over the course of your career. We will map out typical political challenges at different career stages with an emphasis on early career issues. We will cover several topics including building credibility quickly, cultivating mentors and networks, and managing ethical dilemmas. We will consider strategies for acquiring power over time in an effective and ethical manner and explore common early career transitions with an eye towards crafting strategies for navigating inflection points successfully. In order to do so, we will use cases as well as a self-assessment exercise (Self-Monitoring Questionnaire), which is designed to help you understand how much you adapt your behavior to fit situations.
We will also discuss the challenges of change implementation in organizations. To implement planned organizational changes, you will need to overcome the potential resistance of other organizational members and persuade them to adopt new practices. Organizational change implementation is thus an exercise that requires the effective use of power and influence. How can you be an effective change agent in your organization? What are the factors that are likely to affect your success? We will address these questions through case discussions and through a simulation (Change Pro) that will give you the opportunity to practice change leadership in a team.
Finally, we will discuss the challenges and opportunities of co-leadership in organizations. Under what conditions can co-leadership be effective? What are the challenges associated with co-leadership? What are the potential benefits of co-leadership?
Power and Influence in society: The challenges of transforming your environment
In this final module, we will look at power within the context of society. We will think about the challenges of influencing your broader environment. Who are the powerful in society and how did they obtain their power? Can individuals affect the distribution of power within a larger system? How can power be used to produce great benefit or harm? Can the use of power be both self-enhancing and self-destructive? Why do even the most powerful fall? To address these questions, we will use cases that are meant to make you think about how to possibly influence your broader environment. We will also use a simulation (Star Power) in order to help us think about the challenges of changing existing power hierarchies in society. Reflecting on these issues is crucial for anyone who wants to make a difference in the world.
Course Pedagogy
The course relies on a mix of traditional case studies, biographical case studies of historical figures, exercises/simulations, films, and class visits by influential people. The exposure to the development and use of power in many different social settings and at various points in history allows a comprehensive analysis of power in action. Self-assessment tools are included throughout the course to help you assess your own bases of power and influence style. A number of readings, both required and recommended, supplement the case material.
Course Requirements
Grades will be based on two components (each accounting for 50% of the final grade): (1) class participation (including class attendance, contribution to class discussions and completion of the different exercises and simulations), and (2) final paper assignment. Below is a more detailed presentation of these different exercises, simulations and assignments. (Please note that some exercises and simulations may be added to this list over the course of the semester).
Network Assessment Exercise
The Network Assessment Exercise is designed to help you identify patterns in your networks of relationships.
Public Communication Coaching sessions
This individual coaching exercise is meant to help you better project both warmth and strength and address the particular challenges that you may face as a public communicator.
Influence Style Questionnaire
The Influence Style Questionnaire (ISQ) is designed to allow others to provide you feedback on your influence style. This information can help you identify the more and less productive methods you use to exert influence on others.
Self-Monitoring Questionnaire
The Self-Monitoring Questionnaire is designed to help you understand how much you adapt your behavior to fit situations.
Change Pro Simulation
This simulation gives you the opportunity to practice change leadership in teams.
StarPower Simulation
The StarPower simulation is an in-class face-to-face exercise designed to help you experience how people react to shifts in power over time.
Final Paper Assignment
The course ends with your final paper in which you apply the lessons of the course to your own situation. The final paper should be thought of as the last and the most important case study in the course. The final paper is designed to help you improve your power and influence skills in your own career. You have two options:
Option 1
You can analyze a political situation you experienced at work before you came to HBS or during the summer. Ideally, you will choose a situation in which you felt politically blind-sided, or felt that you came out in a disadvantaged position. Alternatively, you may simply analyze the politics of your last job. In addition, instead of focusing on your last job, you may also use experience you may have gained in another organizational setting, such as a political or volunteer organization, as the focus of your paper.
Option 2
If you have a job by the time you begin writing this paper or are choosing among alternatives, the final paper will give you an opportunity to apply the concepts and lessons of the course to your new position. In addition, instead of a new job, you may also use a new (or future) position in another organizational setting, such as a political or volunteer organization, as the focus of your paper.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Power and Influence for Positive Impact
Course Number 2055
Paper
Excludes enrollment in Power and Influence (2056) in the spring term
Course overview:
Designed for individuals at any stage of their career, this course is meant to debunk the fallacies that we have about power and to explore the fundamentals of power in interpersonal relationships, in organizations, and in society. In doing so, it will lift the veil on power, revealing to you what it really is, and how it works, ultimately unleashing your potential to build and use power to effect change at home, at work, and in society. It is meant for those who want to make things happen, despite the obstacles that might stand in your way. This course is also intended to prepare you to use power responsibly, resist its corruptive perils, and exercise it to make the world a better place. As such, it will equip you to leverage power and influence not for personal gain, but to challenge the status quo in order to address some of the most pressing social and environmental problems of our time, from fighting racism to reducing economic inequalities, saving the planet, and protecting democracy. The course introduces conceptual models, tactical approaches, and assessment tools to help you develop your own influence style and understand political dynamics as they unfold around you. By focusing on specific expressions of power and influence, this course will give you the opportunity to observe effective—and ineffective—uses of power in different contexts and stages of a person’s career. The subject matter will challenge you to define for yourself what constitutes the ethical exercise of power and influence in your life. The course will be held this fall at the Harvard Business School campus on the X schedule.
Educational Objectives:
After introducing the fundamentals of power that will enable you to understand power across contexts and levels of analysis, the course will help you develop a deeper understanding of political issues through five interrelated modules and corresponding key questions that we will cover over the course of our week together:
MODULE 1 – Understanding the Nature of Power: What must I understand about the nature of power to help me “see” power and influence my environment?
MODULE 2 – Assessing and Building Your Sources of Power: What sources of power can I draw upon and cultivate, and how can I accurately map my sources of power and that of others?
MODULE 3 – Earning Trust and Exercising Influence: What does it take to earn people’s trust? How can I evaluate and develop my own personal influence style?
MODULE 4 – Encountering Entrenched Power in Organizations & Society: Why does the status quo persist, and why is it so difficult to change?
MODULE 5 – Leading Change in Organizations and Society: What leadership roles must I assume if I want to participate in collective movements for change? And, how can I do so effectively?
Course Pedagogy:
The course will rely on a mix of traditional case studies, biographical case studies of historical figures, exercises, and class visits by guests who experienced different paths to and through power. The exposure to the development and uses of power in many different social settings including the private, public, social enterprise and non-for-profit sectors, and at various points in history will allow a comprehensive analysis of power in action. In addition, self-assessment tools will be included throughout the course to help you assess your own bases of power and influence style. As part of the course, you will also engage in two in-class simulations, as well as an individualized, personal coaching session, all of which will be debriefed in class.
A number of readings, both required and recommended, will supplement the case material and the various simulations and exercises described above. The course builds on the book “Power, For All: How It Really Works and Why It is Everyone’s Business” (Simon & Schuster, 2021) that I co-authored with Tiziana Casciaro. The chapters of the book will be assigned together with other readings throughout the course, but you do not need to have read the book before the beginning of class.
Grading:
Grading is based on class participation, including successful completion of the various exercises, simulations and assignments (50%), and the final project (50%).
The Power of DEI: Harnessing Talent and Opportunity for Enduring Success
Course Number 1845
14 sessions
Paper
Overview and Educational Objectives
This course examines the important focus on diversity, inclusion, and equity (DEI) in the 21st-century workplace. Using a variety of readings, including—but not limited to—cases, we will explore a fundamental discrepancy: talent is much more widely distributed than opportunity.
Where did this divergence come from? Why and how does it matter to success in all kinds of organizations? What role does confronting this discrepancy and thus working to align talent and opportunity more closely play in creating a more prosperous economy? In the larger quest to build a more just society? How do we parse out credible organizational commitments to diversity, inclusion, and equity from those that are more window-dressing than substance? Finally, what impact does real, practicable adherence to the values of DEI have on effective teamwork, individual satisfaction, and organizational performance?
These are the questions we will tackle in our course. As we do so, we have three principal educational objectives:
First, to understand the historical foundations of today’s emphasis on DEI. This emphasis is not a recent phenomenon. Instead, it grows out of a long struggle for equality, tolerance, and possibility for all people in the face of white supremacy, slavery, hatred, discrimination, and the denial of civil rights to millions of individuals. By looking succinctly at specific aspects of this struggle, with a focus on the United States, we will develop a much fuller sense of the divergence between talent and opportunity and of its historically enormous cost: economically, politically, socially, and morally.
Second, to think critically and strategically about the power of DEI in a range of organizations. In examining the relationship among diversity, equity, inclusion, and business performance, we will gain a greater understanding of the benefits of organizational commitment to such values, benefits that include better decision-making, increased creativity, enhanced employee satisfaction, and richer customer insights. We will also investigate the complexity and difficulties of creating a markedly more diverse, equitable, and inclusive organization. At the end of the course, |we will devote some attention to the relationship between DEI initiatives and larger movements for economic, political, and social justice.
Third, to consider specific examples of organizations that have closely aligned talent and opportunity for enduring success. We will learn from both historic examples and from a variety of executives and non-profit leaders who have extensive experience with DEI commitments. In analyzing different entities that have embraced such strategies, we will gain a more detailed appreciation of the linkages between these inspirational values and how people and systems interact to achieve collective ends and, in some cases, to make the impossible possible. Additionally, we will increase our knowledge of the critical role that courageous, resilient leadership plays in these companies and coalitions.
This course will be of particular interest to those interested in the critical role people play in company strategy and success. The Power of DEI will also be useful for individuals concerned with the larger role of business in society and with the alignment between individual and organizational purpose.
Grading is based on class participation (50%) and the final paper (50%).
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Pricing Strategy: Monetizing and Growing the Business
Course Number 1915
14 Sessions
Exam
Introduction
The purpose of any business is to add some value, in some way, to someone outside of itself. However, the business cannot survive—let alone thrive—unless it is also able to monetize some of that value – in order to generate sufficient funds to pursue future innovations, repay and reward investors, or support social and environmental initiatives.
Accordingly, Pricing Strategy: Monetizing and Growing the Business will help you understand how organizations of any shape, size, and industry affiliation should go about capitalizing on their efforts to stand out in the market and serve customers. In other words, the course studies the “back end” of a company’s relationship with its customers. It is exactly at this moment, when a company asks individuals or other businesses to trade good money for the products and services it offers, that ineffective pricing practices tend to creep in and value regrettably “leaks out” of the relationship—making both parties, and often also society, worse off.
The course goes well beyond the mechanics of setting prices, and pushes students to think critically about a company’s customer advantage in the marketplace and what monetization approach can most effectively capitalize on this advantage, thus helping the firm achieve its overarching goals.
Career Focus
Pricing Strategy is highly appropriate for students who see themselves in careers where they will be directly responsible for setting the revenue policies and top-line growth of a product or service, as well as for senior management roles that involve setting monetization direction and overseeing the pricing approach proposed. The course is also relevant for students who anticipate starting their own enterprise or seek a career as external consultants or investors, whereby the revenue or monetization model decision is critical for new venture success.
Educational Objectives
Unfortunately, many business leaders apply the wrong logic when thinking about prices and pricing. In particular, they often fail to think strategically about the challenge. Rather, one witnesses collections of tactics held together by questionable assumptions and crude heuristics that, by shunning customers and obsessing over just about everything else, put financial and brand health in jeopardy.
To counter this predicament, this course will equip you with concepts and frameworks to tackle contemporary pricing issues with confidence and to craft a sound monetization strategy. In particular, the course addresses questions such as:
- What is the right revenue model for our business? Should we link prices to our ability to deliver greater access or to outcomes that customers truly desire?
- Are we making the most of the customer and competitive advantage we worked so hard to establish?
- Which costs matter from a pricing standpoint? How should we use cost information to set our prices?
- How should we estimate and act on valuations and willingness to pay information?
- Are there opportunities to serve different prices to different customers? How can we do this without damaging our image or inciting backlash?
- Does it matter that our relationship with customers passes through an intermediary? What are the best price arrangements to align channel partners?
- What are best practices to act against competitors’ pricing moves?
- How do we stand our ground against customers who demand lower prices? Is it possible to discount our offerings without eroding the brand?
- What is the impact of our pricing decisions beyond the company-customer relationship? Is there anything we can do to improve our societal and environmental “footprint” through our pricing approach?
Content and Organization
Pricing Strategy: Monetizing and Growing the Business builds on the critical premise that a business cannot improve its ability to earn revenue from customers unless its decisions are guided by and for customers—what they value, why they value it, when and how they value it, and so on. This logic is intuitive, yet seldom put into practice. Many organizations tend to anchor their pricing decisions on an estimate of unit costs and a target margin or use competitors’ prices as the benchmark. They want to “keep things simple,” but in so doing forget or neglect that customers drive demand in a market, and demand ultimately marks the commercial opportunity. A business that sets prices with a poor grasp of the opportunity it faces is bound to make suboptimal, perhaps even dangerous decisions.
In comparison, a customer-centric approach to pricing starts by understanding “value” from the perspective of customers and, importantly, how this value flows to organizations in the form of income. The course takes you across the different steps in this sequence, identifying the most common problem areas and searching for practical and effective solutions.
A key takeaway is that decisions about prices are far more strategic and consequential than typically assumed, as they impact the way organizations relate with customers from as early as product or service design to beyond the moment of purchase. A second important message is that prices serve not only to allocate value among the different actors in a market (i.e., slicing the pie), but also to grow the overall value that is realized in an exchange (i.e., baking a bigger pie). We will spend most of our time understanding these two core functions of pricing.
From a practical standpoint, the 14 sessions of the course comprise case study discussions, exercises, interactive lectures, and contributions from guest speakers. The goal of the case discussions and exercises is to examine important concepts in different managerial settings, and to sample making decisions based on both qualitative and quantitative data. The interactive lectures and guest speakers complement this effort by presenting frameworks, analytical techniques, practical insights, and pertinent real-world examples.
Grading
Grading is based on class participation (50%) and a take home exam (50%). Interested students can request to substitute the exam with a project that reviews the pricing performance of an organization and formulates thoughtful recommendations for changing the monetization scheme.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Private Equity Finance
Course Number 1440
Career Focus
This is an advanced corporate finance course focused on private equity (PE) investing. The course offers a deep dive into growth equity and buyouts, also touching on closely related investing strategies such as distress and private debt. Students will examine a wide variety of investment settings: from lower middle market companies to mega-cap, from the United States to emerging markets, from buy-and- build situations to turnarounds to mature businesses, from “home-run” deals to troubled investments. (The course does not cover venture capital or real estate segments of PE.)
Through these case studies, the goal of the class is to understand when and how private equity firms consistently add value: what are the persistent and repeatable sources of risk-adjusted excess returns in the private equity space, what skills and institutional features enable that success, and what opportunities and challenges are presented by recent developments in the PE industry.
The students will gain exposure to a set of practical skills including deal assessment and due diligence, valuation, deal execution, capital structure, governance, change management, and setting incentives. In addition, a substantial part of the course will be spent on strategic elements of deal making.
The course is intended for students who are interested in working for a private equity firm, leading a private-equity owned operating company, investing in private equity as limited partners, or providing advisory services to private equity firms. This course is also appropriate for all students who are interested in a detailed and rigorous exploration of corporate finance, as many of the decisions taken by PE firms have a direct parallel to the strategic and financial decisions taken by companies more broadly and by other types of investors. The majority of cases will integrate these topics from a PE investor’s perspective. Guests will attend many of the classes.
Educational Objectives
This course has two objectives. First, it builds a rigorous approach and toolkit for sourcing, analyzing, negotiating, structuring and managing PE investments. The second goal of the course is to provide students with a deep understanding of the private equity industry in a broad sense: its common tools, strategies, impact, and factors that have been affecting its evolution.
Course Content and Organization
The course has 28 sessions, followed by a final exam. The course is organized into five modules.
- Module 1: Deal Sourcing and Valuation
This module will explore various strategies employed by private equity firms to identify and evaluate investment opportunities. Students will be expected to articulate clear, compelling and differentiated investment theses. Important tools for evaluating investments – including LBO investment return models, returns bridges, financial statement analysis, and broader due diligence questions – will be examined.
- Module 2: Deal Execution
This module highlights the critical levers utilized by private equity investors in structuring transactions, examining how funding choices enable or impede success, while increasing or mitigating risk. Capital structure, security choice, alignment of incentives, and broader capital markets issues will be central to the cases in this module. A detailed exploration of the structure and functioning of credit markets and their central role in private equity transactions will be highlighted.
- Module 3: Deal Management
This module explores the important choices that private equity firms make after closure of the transactions. In particular, the critical operational levers that drive value creation will be examined, as well as governance, board effectiveness and impact, and debt management. The interaction between investor and portfolio-company operating executives will be examined from multiple perspectives.
- Module 4: Realizations
This module examines timing of the exit and highlights the critical mechanisms for realizing value. A variety of realizations will be presented, including leveraged recapitalizations, strategic and financial sales of portfolio companies, initial public offerings, and secondary transactions.
- Module 5: Private Equity Firm Strategic and Management Issues
This final module takes a step back from deal-level analyses and looks at the organizational and strategic issues of private equity organizations. The goal is to understand why and which practices are likely to deliver sustained profitability in the future, and also to reflect on LPs pressures and needs.
Students are expected to be active participants in class discussion, offering a variety of quantitative and qualitative insights that contribute to the assessment of each day’s decision. Class participation and the final exam each count for 40% of the course grade. Some cases include assigned exercises/submissions, which count for 20% of the grade.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Product Management
Course Number 1765
Career Focus:
This half course provides an introduction to product management, focused primarily on improving and scaling existing products at technology companies. It is designed for three types of students:
- Those who aspire to be Product Managers, or are broadly interested in Product Management.
- Those who will join larger established technology companies.
- Aspiring founders that are interested in learning how to grow technology products after finding product-market fit.
Educational Objectives:
A Product Manager is obsessed with the problem their product tries to solve and works to both define the product’s functional requirements and lead cross-functional teams to develop, launch and improve their product over time. Taught by an experienced former Google product executive, this course aims to provide an introduction to product management and expose students to key product development and growth strategies so they can build, optimize and scale products following graduation.
Product examples cover a range of technology products but most are focused on consumer facing software products in the internet, mobile and marketplace sectors. In the 2024-2025 academic year, cases and exercises will be grounded in products from: Uber, Spotify, Ancestry, Amazon, YouTube, Netflix, Slack, Redfin, Xero, Duolingo, Peloton and more. No prior knowledge of Product Management, design, engineering, or computer science required. Those interested in career transitions are especially welcome.
The final deliverable for the course will be a 4 hour case-based take home exam.
Please note, this course is focused on improving and scaling existing products that have already achieved product market fit at technology companies. While the course also addresses how to generate new product ideas and how to find initial product market fit, these topics are not a primary focus.
This course is a natural companion to Launching Technology Ventures and Startup Operations, both of which focus on early stage ventures searching for initial product market fit. It also complements Scaling Technology Ventures, which has a cross-functional perspective and focuses on overall organization design.
Course Content
In this half course, students will take the perspective of a Product Manager at a technology company tasked with improving and growing a product. Through case studies, individual exercises, assigned readings, and conversations with product leaders, students will examine different management opportunities and challenges related to building and growing technology products and practice applying key product strategies to real current situations that PMs at leading technology companies face. We will explore three different modules:
- Improving Existing Product Functionality.
How to determine which user pain points should be fixed and fix them? How to attract new users to a core product? How to optimize a conversion funnel? How to winback churned customers? - Adding New Product Features.
How to prioritize new features? How to respond to the competition? How to price a new product feature? Which country to launch a new product in? How to reinvigorate a product with a new vision? - Pursuing Adjacent Products.
How to find a new product adjacency? How to develop a MVP for a new product adjacency? How to shut down a poor performing product and reallocate the team to a new growth opportunity?
Course Pedagogy
The PM class leverages two core pedagogies: (1) cases and (2) exercises. Usually there are two classes per week, one that is case-based and the other that is exercise-based. Cases you are familiar with. Exercises are formatted in a similar way to cases except they require students to submit their answers (1pg / roughly 2hrs of work) in advance of class for a grade. These exercises are modeled after PM in-person or take-home interview questions. These may require students to do work/research that extends beyond the information provided. Most importantly, they give students an opportunity to create a key PM artifact and get feedback on their submission. Class discussion of exercises mirrors a traditional case discussion, but also includes the characteristics and components of a good exercise answer. Examples of previous year’s exercises: wireframing, churn analysis, user interviews and drafting a PR/FAQ.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Public Entrepreneurship
Course Number 1623
28 Sessions
Exam
Career Focus
This course is designed for students who may found, join, or fund private startup companies that sell to (or around) governments to solve giant problems or who may want to become extreme innovators inside government at some point themselves. The cases feature a broad range of contemporary technology applications, and the course may be of particular interest to students curious about AI, autonomy, blockchain, sensors, crowdsourcing, platforms, and related topics. The course also tackles career questions for students who wonder how to spend time making a difference in both the private and public sectors.
Course Content and Organization
Four modules make up the bulk of the course.
Ideas. What should public entrepreneurs work on? We tackle “problem-finding” and “solution-finding”. We touch on customer discovery to understand needs of citizens and public workers. We meet entrepreneurs who used the tools of design thinking and explore how they can be adapted for public problems.
Risk. How can public leaders and their private partners take on riskier projects? And how do we navigate obstacles to that? We consider whether lean startup techniques can be applied to these efforts.
Opportunity. How can businesses bring new products and services to the public? We look at ways of choosing channels, customers, and modes of revenue-generation. We weigh selling to governments or selling around them. We also look at raising capital for these business models and investing in them.
Scale. We ask how do private and public leaders bring these efforts to transformative levels? We look at the idea of government as a platform and ways to leverage their network effects for growth.
We tackle these topics mostly through case discussion, and we spend time with many guests. Three-quarters of the cases include some private company angle. One third of the cases have a non-U.S. component.
Grading and Course Requirements
Grading is based on class participation and a final exam.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Real Estate Investing
Course Number 1475
Career Focus
This course provides students with the skills and knowledge essential for a career in managing, developing, or investing in real estate. Real estate is a multidisciplinary industry that requires strong analytical rigor as wells as broad strategic thinking.
Educational Objectives
Students will learn about the interplay of capital structures, building characteristics, stakeholders, and legal parameters. The class goals are to illustrate the process of sourcing, underwriting, and ultimately acquiring real estate investments.
Content and Organization
The course is organized into three modules.
Deal Making Fundamentals – The first module focuses the mechanics of real estate deal making and provides a foundation to understand the fundamentals of deal structuring, property types, negotiation and sourcing techniques.
Stakeholder Motivations – Students will learn to understand the various stakeholders’ economic incentives, legal constraints, moral and ethical motivations and fundamental human behavior. Negotiation games and role play will be an important part of this section.
Success and Failure The last module will reflect an investment committee style organization highlighting key decision-making characteristics that may lead to success or failure.
Pedagogical Mix
Real estate lends itself to case method teaching as virtually every subject requires quantitative and qualitative analysis, judgment calls, quick thinking and development of practical action plans. "Cold calling" and active participation are frequent and important components of class. We expect that students will be prepared as most classes will have the case protagonists or other industry leaders present.
Most homework assignments are required to be completed in groups. Additionally, polls will be used frequently and are considered an important aspect of class participation. The course will have a final exam.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Real Estate Private Equity
Course Number 1484
27 Sessions
Paper
Career Focus
This course is intended for any student interested in a career in private market investing. Specifically, we will cover topics pertaining to investing, managing, and developing investments in real estate and private asset backed companies. The course will be divided into three modules. The first module will focus on portfolio construction and understanding investment risks associated with private investments. The second module consists of the analysis of specific transactions with an emphasis on whether to pursue a specific transaction or not based on its investment merits. This section of the course will be run as an investment committee. We will focus on the attributes of both successful and many unsuccessful transactions. The final module consists of a focus on private investment firms, their compensation structures and how they impact behavior. For the final project students will be asked to develop an investment concept and present it via a paper and investment proposal. Industry leaders will judge the final presentations.
The course guests have historically included some of the leading private investors in the world, including Howard Marks, Barry Sternlicht, John Grayken, Ken Caplan, Mike Fascitelli, and Karsten Kellwig, among many others.
Educational Objectives
1. How to construct a private investment portfolio
2. How to assess the risks and returns in private investments and real estate portfolios
3. How to perform relative value analyses of differing investments
4. How to manage troubled investments (when to hold 'em and when to fold 'em)
5. How to understand how compensation issues affect performance
Course Content and Organization
Conceptual Framework: the course is divided into three parts with special emphasis on private equity financial analysis for transactions and portfolios. The course will analyze issues associated with both successful and troubled investments. We will address the issue of when to "double down" on an underperforming investment. We will incorporate a relative value approach in differentiating more attractive investments based upon their risk adjusted returns. The first module focuses on portfolio level issues, the second will review individual transactions and the third will look at the management and investment issues from the perspectives of both general partners and limited partners. The analysis will also include a study of firm economics and the resulting incentives from the 2/20 standard compensation model. Finally, students will prepare an investment proposal and present the investment concept.
Pedagogical Mix
Private equity real estate investments lend themselves to the case study method as virtually every subject requires both quantitative and qualitative analysis, judgment calls and development of a practical action plan. "Cold calling" is a frequent and important component of the class. Polling will be done frequently.
Textbook readings and technical notes supplement the cases, while additional optional books and articles are suggested for more exposure to theoretical concepts. A very significant component of the course will be presentations by case protagonists including leading industry figures. Senior executives from the industry will be in class to discuss the case and offer practical perspectives on lessons learned from the case. Out-of-class review sessions are offered by the professor to supplement concepts included in the case, particularly with regards to modeling certain concepts included in the given case. The workload and preparation are above average for the HBS EC courses.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Real Property
Course Number 1684
28 Sessions
Exam
Career Focus
This course is intended for any student serious about a career in managing, developing, or investing in real estate. Due to its rigor, it will be more than sufficient for those thinking about real estate as a hobby or for those considering real estate for limited personal investing.
Educational Objectives
The class goals are to show how real estate works, how to assess the risks, how to be a better deal maker, how to manage a project and how to be a leader in the industry.
Content and Organization
Conceptual Framework: The course is divided into five modules with additional exposure to international real estate.
The first module covers the analytic framework for real property development and investing, market analysis and basic financial analysis. Students will also gain an introduction to the general vocabulary of the business.
The second module examines each of the main property types (office, hotel, industrial, retail, multifamily, single family and senior living), including their general characteristics, market analyses and metrics used in evaluating and operating each of these asset types, and particular risks or opportunities with respect to these types of projects and buildings.
The third module reviews capital markets including private equity syndications and deal making, mortgages and real estate investment trusts (REITs). Examples illustrating the development process continue to be used throughout this and other modules to highlight both real estate development issues and choice of capital structure.
The fourth module consists in a project competition. The range of eligible projects is broad, both geographically and in terms of project asset class or objective.
The final module discusses important emerging trends in the industry including novel asset classes, Fintech, globalization and opportunities in emerging markets, sustainability and infrastructure.
Pedagogical Mix
Real estate lends itself to case method teaching as virtually every subject requires quantitative and qualitative analysis, judgment calls, thinking on one’s feet and development of practical action plans. "Cold calling" and active participation are frequent and important components of class.
There are at least two graded homework assignments and a final exam. Most homework assignments are required to be completed in groups. Additionally, polls will be used frequently and are considered an important aspect of class participation.
Textbook readings supplement the cases, while additional, optional books and readings are suggested for more exposure to theoretical concepts. Mini-lectures and a considerable number of technical notes are used throughout the course along with a tool-kit with materials for future use. The workload and preparation is above average for HBS EC courses. There will be several outside optional events covering building sites, career development, and meetings/luncheons with industry leaders.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Reimagining Capitalism: Business and Big Problems
Course Number 1524
28 Sessions
Exam
Free market Capitalism is one of the great achievements of mankind, bringing prosperity and economic freedom to billions of people and contributing to a flowering of individual freedom and possibility that would have been unimaginable to our ancestors. Today, however, increasing global crises are posing the greatest threat this economic system has faced.
Reimagining Capitalism (ReCap) examines the role that business does and can play in addressing big social and environmental challenges. Students will examine:
- The forces that are leading Capitalism to evolve to address these challenges,
- How to overcome impediments that hamper businesses’ efforts to profitably address these challenges,
- The skills that managers, entrepreneurs, and investors rely on to balance impact and profit, and
- How to scale solutions that address societal and environmental issues.
A general management course, ReCap resides at the intersection of strategy, entrepreneurship, leadership, finance, and accounting. To that end, we examine issues through the lenses of executives, entrepreneurs, investors, and younger employees. The course takes a forward-looking view of the role of business and is continually evolving, with more than 60% of the course material being created in the last five years. It is designed for students interested in management, investing, and entrepreneurship who strive to have societal impact in the for-profit sector.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Reweaving Ourselves and the World: New Perspectives on Climate Change
Course Number 1553
12 sessions
Paper
The course is jointly listed at the Harvard Kennedy School and will take place on the HKS campus.
In the last thirty years greenhouse gas emissions have almost doubled. It now seems unlikely that we will be able keep global heating below 2°C, suggesting that it is no longer a question of preventing dangerous heating but of living with it – even as we attempt to limit further damage.
How should we respond to such cataclysmic news? What does it mean to be alive and human right now? To what should we devote our lives? This course is for you if you are committed to grappling with the reality of global heating and largescale ecosystem destruction, but sometimes finding yourself falling into fear, rage and/or despair, wondering where to begin, and whether you can truly “make a difference”.
This class will pull together students from across Harvard’s professional schools to explore the possibility that this moment could be one not only of catastrophe but also of individual and collective transformation. Together we will open up space for imagining “what might go right” – unpacking how social movements are built, whether radical political change is necessary (or possible), what it might mean to rewrite the dominant narrative of our civilization, and the potential strengths of incremental change. It is often said that we need deep, systemic shifts – in this seminar we will explore what such shifts might look like and how they might be catalyzed.
Throughout the class we will also explore what all this might mean for you – for the way you experience yourself, for how you frame the meaning and purpose of your life, and for how you decide to engage with the world. My goal is to support you in learning from people (and ideas) that may seem deeply unfamiliar and possibly even dangerous and to combine skillful work in your professional identity with deep inner work and the ability to understand the world from multiple perspectives.
Class Structure
In addition to classical class discussion, most classes will include some kind of experiential practice and a guest. Our guests will not be experts who know the answer but rather amazing people who are grappling – like us – with what it means to respond effectively to all that is happening.
Participants will be asked to write a short reflection paper every other week and a short final paper developing your personal theory of change and action.
Admission is by application only, and applications are available from Fed Chavez, (Fchavez@hbs.edu). There will be TWO rounds of admissions to the class. First round applications are due by November 28th, with decisions forthcoming on December 1st. Second round applications will be due on January 7th; applicants will be notified by January 10th.
If you are interested in learning more, please request a copy of the syllabus from Fed Chavez at fchavez@hbs.edu. This course is open to Graduate Students only.
Risks, Opportunities, And Investments In The Era Of Climate Change (ROICC)
Course Number 1324
27 Sessions
Paper
Course Description
The MBA course on "Risks, Opportunities, and Investments in an Era of Climate Change" offers a unique and comprehensive curriculum aimed at preparing the next generation of entrepreneurs, leaders, and investors to succeed in a rapidly changing economic landscape. This course is ideal for students who aspire to become entrepreneurs by starting their own company or joining a start-up that is driving innovation and solving challenges posed by climate change. Additionally, the course will benefit those who wish to lead or advise firms on transitioning their operations and business models to become more sustainable and innovative. Finally, the course will be beneficial to students seeking to understand the full spectrum of climate opportunities pursuing a career in venture capital, private equity, or public markets investing.
For students interested in entrepreneurship, this course presents an opportunity to learn about the opportunities that lie ahead in the transition to a low-carbon economy. From understanding the creation of carbon markets and credits to exploring the potential for innovative solutions in agriculture and food production or battery manufacturing and the creation of circular economy business models driven by artificial intelligence and digitization, this course will arm students with the skills and knowledge needed to create and lead the next generation of climate solutions businesses.
For those interested in leading and advising companies, this course provides a learning experience, diving into the complexities of transitioning operations, supply chains, and strategies to a low-carbon future. Students will learn about the policies, regulations, and technologies driving the shift, and will gain practical skills in analyzing and responding to these changes. By understanding the challenges and opportunities presented by climate change, students will be better equipped to advise and lead companies through this transformative period.
For students interested in investing, this course covers investment opportunities across all sectors of the economy, including renewable energy, batteries, solar panels, electric vehicles, and advanced materials. The course provides a comprehensive and nuanced understanding of the risks and opportunities posed by climate change, enabling students to make informed investment decisions and pursue a career in venture capital, private equity, or public markets investing.
In conclusion, the MBA course on "Risks, Opportunities, and Investments in an Era of Climate Change" offers a comprehensive learning experience for students interested in entrepreneurship, leading and advising companies, and investing. With a focus on the challenges and opportunities posed by climate change, this course prepares students to succeed in a rapidly changing economic landscape and to make a positive impact on the world.
Grading Criteria
Your course grade will be comprised of 60% in-class participation and 40% performance on the group project.Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Road to the White House 2024, a Private Sector Perspective on Presidential Politics
Course Number 1705
14 Sessions
Paper
Overview
The majority of Americans are dissatisfied with their choice of political candidates. Harvard Business School graduates are in a unique position to help solve the problem - as candidates for elective office, as private sector leaders who actively contribute time and money to candidates with high integrity and sound policy, and/or as participants in electoral reform. To be effective in any of these roles, one needs to understand the complexities of the political arena, the rules of the road, and the potential threats to democracy.
During the first module of the course, we will develop a “campaign mindset” through a behind the scenes look at the strategies and tactics of successful political campaigns, focusing on the 2024 US presidential race. We will explore the major components of campaigns through the lens of a businessperson entering the world of politics. A “campaign mindset” is invaluable if you enter the world of politics as a candidate or close advisor to a friend, colleague, or family member. Guests will include nationally recognized journalists, political pundits, pollsters, and presidential campaign strategists and operatives. We will discuss the similarities between politics and the private sector (customer segmentation, product ~ market fit, positive branding, use of surrogates, structure experimentation, and staged financing). We will also enumerate the many differences that private sector leaders should understand to be most effective (opposition research including self-opposition research, paid vs earned media, debate prep, messaging, negative narratives, rapid response, and crisis communications). The goal is to provide the essential knowledge about campaigns that all private sector leaders should know to most effectively participate in the political arena – a “campaign mindset”.
In the second module, we will explore the myriad of structural election issues that threaten a vibrant democracy, and the role that private sector leaders can play in maintaining it. Specific topics will include election integrity, voter access/suppression, status of our democracy, dominance of the two-party political system, presidential transitions and governing in a polarized country, and participating in efforts to remedy structural barriers to fair elections and non-partisan politics. Guests will include HBS graduates who are first-time candidates for office in 2024, private sector leaders actively trying to reform structural election issues, and members of Congress.
The course is intended to engage students that have deep interest and backgrounds in politics as well as political novices. We will focus on critical thinking, strategy, and execution rather than ideology or partisan political philosophy in this hyper-polarized climate. Students will be asked to consider the following question throughout the course – “what can/should I do to actively participate in the political arena while still at HBS and post-graduation as a private sector leader who wants to make a positive difference in the world?” Although we will be focusing on the US elections, the concepts will be broadly applicable, and we welcome students from other countries. This course and all of its class sessions will be driven by the need for substantive and informed civil discourse, an increasingly rare concept that these critical times demand and all citizens deserve.
We will also have an optional session on election night (November 5th) to watch and analyze the election results together in real time.
Course Structure
This 1.5 credit course will meet for 14 classroom sessions during Q1 Fall 2024 and an optional session on Election Night (November 5th).
Assignments
Students will be assigned a case or relevant articles for each session. Many sessions will require short written submissions. In addition, student teams will be formed and assigned a swing state to analyze the local issues affecting the presidential election, each campaign’s strategy and tactics employed in that state, and predict the outcome.
Grading
Grading will be based on one-third class participation, one-third weekly short written submissions & team project, and one-third final paper.
Sessions
Module I: Developing a “Campaign Mindset”
1. US Presidential Nominating & Electoral Process
2. US Congressional & Down Ballot Races
3. Messaging – Voter Segmentation and Campaign Messaging
4. Campaign Finance & Money in Politics
5. Presidential Debates
6. Getting in the Arena: First Time Campaign - the Ultimate Start Up
Module II: Role of Private Sector Leaders
7. Status of our Democracy
8. Presidential Transition & Governing in Polarized America
9. Leadership Models Around the World
10. Election Issues – Election Integrity, Voter Suppression, Gerrymandering
11. Role of Business Leaders in Preserving and Strengthening Democracy
12. Breaking the US Two-Party System: No Labels and the Insurance Policy
13. Swing State Analysis & Predictions
14. Course Wrap
Optional Session:
· November 5th, 8p – Midnight, Election Return Viewing Session
The Role of Government in Market Economies
Course Number 1195
13 Sessions
Paper
Course Overview and Objectives
This course is about one question: What is the proper role of the government in the market economy? We study the role of government as it plays out in the real world, using vivid case studies from many countries, decades, and policy angles. At the same time, we align these cases with a rigorous theoretical framework that clarifies the circumstances under which government intervention in the market can improve outcomes.
The goal of this course is to deepen your insight into and influence on the debate over economic policy. Private-sector managers are better able to position their organizations, both defensively and offensively, if they understand why and how governments act. Moreover, exceptional private-sector leaders are now widely expected to provide informed, intelligent leadership on the policy issues at the heart of this course.
Career Focus
The course is designed for students who aim to lead private-sector institutions of systemic importance, influence public debates over government policy, or occupy policymaking positions at some point in their careers. The skills and knowledge it develops, however, are increasingly valuable to the broad range of businesses, non-profit organizations, and civil society institutions whose activities intersect with government policy.
Course Structure
The course opens with a case on why a hypothetical competitive market economy can be used as a starting point for analyzing what role government should play. Market economies are miraculous when at their best: flexible, decisive, and self-correcting.
But markets are not always at their best, and the first module of the course confronts major real-world departures from this hypothetical starting point. These departures mean that government policy can improve the efficiency of the economy, in principle making all individuals better off. Policy areas addressed here include antitrust regulation, environmental protection, education, health care, and fiscal and monetary policy.
We may want the government to do more than remove inefficiencies, so the second module tackles questions of economic justice and their implications for the government's role. In particular, in this module we study central debates over the taxation of individuals and firms, the provision of economic assistance, and the determination of the boundaries of policy.
As this summary shows, the cases we discuss take us step-by-step through a rigorous conceptual framework that provides the intellectual backbone for the course. At the same time, each case gives us a chance to examine an important policy area in some depth. Accompanying each case are a set of core concepts and suggested readings. The core concepts represent fundamental insights into the role of government, so an understanding of them can substantially increase one's ability to analyze a given policy decision. The suggested supplemental readings are starting points for pursuing areas of particular interest in greater detail. They include many foundational pieces of scholarship, as well as newer and less scholarly works that shed light on these issues.
Course Administration
Course grades will be based on class participation (50%) and a short paper (50%). For the paper, students will apply the tools and ideas from the course to prepare, with one or two partners if they wish, an analysis of a government policy problem of their choice. The course is designed so that the time required to prepare the paper is comparable to the time a student would devote to a final exam. Throughout the term, Professor Weinzierl will be available to meet with students by appointment. To arrange a meeting, please contact his assistant, Deannah Blemur, at dblemur@hbs.edu.
Copyright © 2022 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Scaling Technology Ventures
Course Number 1788
27 Sessions
Exam or Project
Career Focus
Scaling Technology Ventures (STV) is designed for students who aspire to found, join, or invest in growth-stage technology ventures. Students will learn how leadership teams address the challenges and opportunities ventures face after achieving product-market fit – and how to activate and manage exponential growth.
The course reflects the recent shift in market sentiment from “growth at all costs” to “find a path to profitability,” in placing particular emphasis on how ventures scale by achieving not just product-market fit, but profit-market fit.
Classes cover a diverse array of tech and tech-enabled businesses, including e-commerce, ed-tech, SaaS, HR-tech, mobile apps and gaming, marketplace platforms, mobility solutions, social media, two-sided platforms, robotics, and cybersecurity.
Educational Objectives
The course exists to address a gap in management scholarship between two fundamental stages of corporate development – exploration and exploitation. This model leaves out a critical phase connecting these two stages, which the course calls extrapolation – the period of dramatic top-line growth that occurs midway through a typical S-curve, after a venture has confirmed product-market fit and raised its first round of VC financing.
Adopting the perspective of a founder and CEO, a functional leader, or an investor, cases in the course frame many of the critical opportunities and challenges associated with activating exponential growth and managing through the extrapolation phase as a venture scales. Scaling situations are presented through a variety of functional lenses, including strategy, product management, sales and marketing, engineering and technology, talent, and operations.
In nearly every class, the course hosts case protagonists – founders, CEOs, and some VCs – as guests, mostly in person and on campus. Many guests also stay for roundtable lunches with students after classes.
Students have the opportunity to participate in several optional workshops with guests and outside experts. In past years, topics have included product management, performance marketing, venture capital, and diversity in tech.
Scaling Technology Ventures is a natural companion, and complement to, the EC course Launching Technology Ventures (LTV), though there is little if any overlap between the two courses.
Enrollment in STV is limited to 70 students per section.
Course Content
Through case discussions and dialogue with company founders, STV examines executive leadership and functional management challenges in scaling ventures after the "search and discovery" stage of startup evolution. Case companies have included Asana, BlaBlaCar, Catalant, Chegg, Chewy, Cobalt Robotics, Darktrace, FIGS, Mistral, Nextdoor, OhmConnect, Perch, Linden Lab, Supercell, Shopify, thredUP, TikTok, Wayfair, and Zoom, among others. The course also features an online computer-gaming simulation that enables students to compete against one another as rival SaaS firms vying for users, market position, and capital investment.
Case classes are organized into six modules that comprise the course’s Six S Scaling Framework. These variables represent external and internal enablers of successful scaling:
Activating Growth
Strategic Opportunity and Market: What does it take to “cross the chasm” to the early majority? How large is the serviceable addressable market, and will it support scaling? How scalable and repeatable is the business model?
Scope and Speed: How does a venture scale by expanding into new geographies, products, and markets? What does it take to manage multiple revenue streams? How fast should your expansion or diversification take place?
Solution: What constitutes a repeatable and scalable offer? How does the offer maintain sufficient homogeneity to address an extensible market, while establishing sufficient differentiation to fend off competitors?
Managing Growth
Structure: When and how should a rapidly scaling venture introduce more formal roles, systems, and processes? What organizational design choices favor scaling? What are the trade-offs between autonomy and control?
Senior Team: When should a venture replace its founder with a “professional” CEO? At what point should you recruit experienced executives into leadership positions? When should you start hiring specialists over generalists?
Spirit: How do scaling ventures design culture? How do they assimilate hires who are less mission-driven and more political than the first wave of recruits? How do ventures mitigate friction between the old guard and new talent?
Final Deliverable
Students have a choice between taking a final exam or completing a final project. The exam consists of a course-relevant case with assignment questions. The project invites students to apply course concepts to a scaling venture. For the project, students are encouraged to work in teams to address opportunities and/or challenges presented by their project sponsors and then prepare a report outlining their research, analyses, and recommendations.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Social Entrepreneurship and Systems Change
Course Number 1581
Career Focus
SESC is tailored for individuals aiming to pioneer and lead positive and lasting change within various sectors, including social enterprises, government, and the private sector. Whether you aspire to launch or lead a social enterprise, innovate within policymaking and philanthropy, catalyze systemic change, or drive corporate social responsibility initiatives, this course provides the critical insights, frameworks and tools needed. Graduates will be well-positioned for roles that demand a deep understanding of leading and scaling social enterprises and designing and implementing solutions that drive measurable systemic change.
Who should take the course and why?
- Aspiring social entrepreneurs (both for-profit and non-profit) who want to lead effective social enterprises that create impact and ultimately solve big social and environmental problems.
- Business leaders who seek to influence the systems that can generate positive social change.
- People whose work will be influenced by changing systems (e.g. climate, equality, healthcare, education), whether they are directly involved or not so they can better understand and make a positive contribution to the forces shaping their ecosystems.
- People who are involved in systems change through a governance or advisory capacity, such as serving on non-profit boards, as a major donor, or in consulting roles.
Educational Objectives
- Enhance your ability to critically analyze social enterprises and understand how to lead and scale them effectively.
- Learn how to design and implement strategies that effectively address systemic problems that lie beyond the capacity of any single social enterprise or organization.
- Gain insights into how different sectors can work together towards common goals, understanding the roles of policy, business, and non-profit organizations in driving systemic solutions.
- Cultivate leadership skills necessary for navigating the challenges of social entrepreneurship and systemic change, focusing on resilience, stakeholder engagement, and adaptive strategy.
- Create a community of students from across the university who are passionate about social and environmental change, and connect with over 500 alumni of the course, many of whom are building high growth social enterprises.
Course Overview
Social entrepreneurs don’t just build organizations, they change systems. This course will explore the frameworks, tools, mindsets, and best practices that successful social entrepreneurs use to maximize their impact. The course not only looks at social entrepreneurship through the lens of traditional entrepreneurship, but also asks how people motivated by disrupting entrenched and often inequitable systems differ from traditional entrepreneurs. We will look at differences in mindset and character; capacity for systems thinking; empathy in product/service design; and their ability to navigate diverse sources of capital to build either for-profit, nonprofit, or hybrid organizations. SESC take a deep dive into how social entrepreneurs can become systems entrepreneurs by developing a coherent systems strategy, collaborating with others, building power, and mobilizing change.
Since the skills required to sustain effective engagement with social systems can differ subtly from the organizational management skills often deployed by social enterprises, the course also discusses the distinct leadership capabilities needed to sustain multi-stakeholder systems change efforts. The course features a diverse group of protagonists in diverse contexts (issues, geographies, stages, organizational forms), but asks students to go deep on a single social entrepreneur of their choice over the semester, culminating with an integrative final assignment that through a peer review process can lead to the development of a new case study for the class.
Course Modules
- Introduction to Social Entrepreneurship and Systems Change: Overview of foundational concepts, mindsets of social entrepreneurs, and the importance of systems thinking as an intuitve lens to achieving long-lasting impact.
- Designing for Systems Change: The process of developing and testing effective solutions to enduring problems through the idea of being proximate, using design thinking to identify needs, and understanding the role of positive deviance in identifying workable solutions.
- Building and Scaling Social Enterprises: The steps to build social enterprises from identifying the right funding sources (venture philanthropy and impact investing), to developing strategies for direct scale and replication, to evaluation practices, to governing for excellence. The module concludes with cases that shift towards indirect approaches to scale via policy and mindset shifts.
- Understanding Complex Challenges & Implementing System Solutions: Tools and frameworks for analyzing complex problems: stakeholder mapping, identifying leverage points, and designing context-specific solutions. Exploring effective strategies for influencing systemic change, including collaboration, innovation, and narrative shifting.
- The Role of Business in Systems Change: Examines how business leaders can contribute to solving complex social issues in collaboration with government and nonprofit sectors.
- Leadership for Systems Change: Insights into the personal and professional journey of systems leaders, including skill development, risk management, and the cultivation of resilience.
Assessment
Grades will be based on class participation (50%), and a final project (50%). The final project is a paper written in several parts that profiles a social enterprise of one’s choosing and using the tools and frameworks of the course, assess the strengths and weaknesses of the organization, with a peer review process to learn from one another’s work and propose a new case study for future iterations of the course.
Why This Course
SESC provides a holistic approach to tackling social and environmental problems. This course offers a unique opportunity to learn from both leading academics and experienced practitioners, inspiring students to become effective agents of change in their communities and beyond. The faculty are both experienced social entrepreneurs and systems change agents, who bring a wealth of real-world experience and insights into the classroom. The course structure is further enriched by extensive contributions from expert guests, ensuring that most classes feature talks and interactive sessions with leaders from various sectors. These practitioners will share their experiences, challenges, and strategies, providing students with unparalleled exposure to contemporary issues and solutions in the field of social entrepreneurship and systems change.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Space, Public And Commercial Economics (SPACE)
Course Number 1175
14 sessions
Paper
Course Overview
Space is a place of unparalleled possibility for humanity, and it is in the midst of a revolution. In this course, we will learn about this revolution and the companies, such as SpaceX, Blue Origin, Axiom, Planet, and more that are driving in. We will be joined by leaders in the industry, including prominent HBS alumni, eager to help you join them in building a new space age with the private sector as its engine. We will learn about the history of civilian space agencies like NASA and of the military in space, and we will debate their role in the future. We will study the economics underlying the sector, where public-private linkages are deep and essential. And we will ask ourselves, and our guests, what animates our interest in space and justifies devoting time, effort, and resources to it.
The course consists of fourteen 80-minute sessions organized around Space to Grow: Unlocking the Final Economic Frontier, a book authored by Prof. Weinzierl and his former research associate (and this course’s inaugural teaching fellow) Brendan Rosseau. Each session will be devoted to a chapter of the book, and most will include guests who are leaders in today’s space industry. Supplementing the book are optional reading assignments.
Career Focus
“In the future, every business will be a space business.” A past guest of this course coined this phrase to capture an important truth: space is so intertwined in our everyday technologies, and our capabilities in space are expanding so rapidly, that every industry, every function, and every geography will depend on and utilize space to drive value. No matter your path after HBS, spending time learning about what’s happening in space will make you a smarter and more innovative leader.
If you’re already planning (and even coming from) a career in space, you know that HBS has staked out a leading position in the sector among our peer business schools. This course is the home base of the HBS space network, with hundreds of members from startup founders to senior executives at the largest NASA contractors and everyone in between. We want your expertise in our discussions, and we’re sure you’ll come away with a more holistic (and informed) perspective on all aspects of the sector.
Educational Objectives
- Develop an informed view on the history of and recent dramatic changes in how the space sector functions, including the evolving relationship between public and private actors.
- Consider and evaluate different forecasts for the further development of the space sector, including space-for-earth and space-for-space activities in LEO, cislunar, Mars, and other areas of operation.
- Identify feasible ways of regulating and governing decentralized space activities, including the establishment of property rights, through existing or new institutions.
- Understand one’s own vision for space and be able to explain why it is worth pursuing.
Course Outline
Part One: Establish the MarketClass session 1: The Inflection Point: Crisis into Opportunity
Class session 2: Blue Origin: Step by Step
Class session 3: SpaceX: Launching the Market
Class session 4: Planet: Supply and Demand
Class session 5: Stations: Destinations in Space
Class session 6: Capital: Booms and Busts, Stags and Hares
Class session 7: Artemis: The New Model Goes to the Moon
Class session 8: Special session with space entrepreneurs
Part Two: Refine the Market
Class session 9: Astroscale: The Tragedy of the Orbital Commons
Class session 10: Market Power: Preserving Competition and Innovation
Class session 11: Public funding and regulation panel
Part Three: Temper the Market
Class session 12: Planetary Resources: Property Rights in Space
Class session 13: National Security: The Military-Celestial Complex
Class session 14: Your vision for space
Grading
Grades are 50% engagement in class and 50% a final project.For the project, students will complete, either alone or in groups of no more than three, a written evaluation of a space company or space agency program. Students may work in teams of 1 to 3 students, but all students in a team will receive the same grade, and the expectations for the depth and breadth of the project increase with the number of authors. The preferred length of the project is 1,000 words.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
The Spiritual Lives of Leaders
Course Number 1563
12 Sessions
Paper/Project
Course Overview
Spiritual Lives of Leaders engages in a conversation that we seldom have at Harvard Business School – or across Harvard generally – that we believe you’ll find fascinating, inspiring, challenging, and useful. We invite everyone to participate equally in this conversation – whether you describe yourself as interested and curious, spiritual but not religious, an atheist or agnostic, a charismatic believer, or a lapsed fill-in-the-blank.
Students who experienced the three-year J-Term origins of this course came brimming with deeply personal and practical questions: What is spirituality? How can it be cultivated? What does spiritual leadership look like? How can I reconcile apparent tensions between my faith and the demands and aspirations of career and life? What do I need to know about the faith traditions of others to succeed as a leader operating in different communities around the world? Why do the institutions of religion so often fall short – or do real damage, contributing to deep division and conflict?
In Spiritual Lives of Leaders, we aim to create a space apart from the high hurry of our day-to-day lives to explore these questions. We’ve curated an amazing community of leaders, scholars, and thinkers from around the world to help us. Many of the leaders we invite fit us into very crowded calendars precisely because this area is important to them, and yet they don’t often get asked about their deepest commitments and influences that inform their leadership.
Why Should You Take This Course?
The following are questions that students who have taken this course have shared with us. If any of these resonate with you, that’s a pretty good sign that you would find value in joining our conversation and our community:
Living an Integrated, Purposeful Life
- “How do I live an integrated life where I can bring my faith and my own beliefs into the workplace? How do I integrate my career aspirations with my own personal values and personal aspirations?”
- “I’m curious what I can learn from religions not my own to make me a better leader for the future teams I get the opportunity to lead.”
Role of Spirituality in the Lives of Leaders
- “How do senior leaders translate convictions and insights from their private, internal spiritual lives to their public, external leadership?”
- “What is the role of spirituality and religion in the lives of high-pressure decision-makers? Is there a difference between the two?”
- “How can I build deep, enduring relationships with my business partners in other cultures by understanding their spiritual practices and commitments?”
When Faith and Work Collide
- “How can I hold strong to my personal faith while leading in a secular organization?”
- “When is it appropriate for me to talk about my own faith and beliefs in the workplace, while also ensuring that I am being inclusive?”
Bringing Meaning to Work
- “How can we bring meaning and purpose to the day-to-day lives of our employees?”
- “How can an atheist create a bond that seems to automatically exist between spiritual people?”
Repairing the World
- “How can leadership bring people together and away from the current divisive rhetoric and populism? How can leaders, especially young women, navigate challenging power asymmetry situations where there is very little appetite for change from within?”
- “In many contexts, religion and faith traditions appear to create deep division, conflict, and animosity toward others, so is there anything to be done without rejecting spirituality and faith altogether?”
Requirements
- Attend one 2-hour class each week, for 12 weeks across term
- Attend six 90-minute Journey Group sessions across the semester; groups are formed from a small cohort of students drawn from across participating Harvard schools.
- Participate in several optional field trips on selected weekends or evenings across the semester; planned destinations include the Arnold Arboretum, the Harvard Art Museum, the Harvard Dance Center, and a field retreat to a site such as the Society of St. John the Evangelist (just across the river) or Blue Cliff Monastery.
- Volunteer to design and lead sessions with invited guests, who will feature in most of our weekly sessions. Past guests have included Ken Frazier (CEO, Merck), Dr. Lisa Miller (Columbia University), David Brooks (NYT columnist and author), Martha Minow (former dean, Harvard Law School), and Larry Bacow (president, Harvard University).
- Submit a final paper or project reflecting on your spiritual journey and learning across the semester.
Grading
There are two graded requirements:
- Class participation
- Final paper/project
Participation is assessed more by quality and intensity of engagement than by simple quantity of classroom comments. We offer numerous opportunities across term to demonstrate engagement with the course and our guests and to help build a sense of community in the classroom and beyond.
Course Premise
Spirituality, faith, and religion play a crucial role in many people’s lives. They undergird convictions about right and wrong, help people to persevere through great hardship, inform people’s self-understanding and meaning-making, and shape people’s worldviews. In the best case, spirituality, faith, and religion can bring people together. In the worst case, so recently in evidence on campus and around the world, they can tear people apart.
Despite their centrality to many people’s experiences, however, spirituality, faith, and religion remain relatively unexamined—especially from a personal perspective—across the University. This course provides an opportunity to address this gap by bringing together students and faculty from across the University to explore what we can learn in conversation with leaders around the world who are informed by these practices and commitments.
This course grows out of our highly successful experience in piloting this curriculum across three well-subscribed J-Term SIPs. Student interest in this course has grown each year we have offered it, and we are currently collaborating with 30 students and faculty from across the University to build out the syllabus and terrain of the course to match most closely student needs and interests. While we expect a strong student base from among our own MBAs, we are scheduling the course in a timeslot that will accommodate a group of committed cross-registrants.
Aspiring cross-registrants desiring more information about the course can reach out to our teammates in their respective schools and programs, including Practitioner in Residence John Brown and Assistant Dean Laura Tuach (HDS), Adjunct Lecturer Metta McGarvey (HGSE), Professor Scott Westfahl (HLS), Professor Howard Koh (HSPH), Senior Fellow Tina Fernandez (ALI) and HBS Executive Fellows Angie Thurston and Rich Phillips This course is a move toward reconnection, toward integration, not just for the purpose of making meaning for ourselves but also to reconnect with each other.
Course Goals
By the end of the course, students should understand how an awakened sense and understanding of spirituality and faith traditions can drive both individual and corporate purpose, as they have seen this modeled in invited leaders from the realms of business, public health, education, and public policy. They also should have a better sense of how this awakened sense can help them to guide their own personal and professional agency across careers of increasing responsibility. Most broadly, they will have a deeper appreciation and understanding for what has been a crucial aspect of existence for individuals and societies.
Our hope is that this course will have a profound influence on your self-understanding, on your formation as a leader, on your understanding of the communities in which you will operate, and on your sense of personal purpose.
Course Outline
To serve the objectives outlined above, we are planning to organize our term into three principal modules, focused on three stages of the development of a global leader. These stages, with examples of existing curriculum that students have encouraged us to continue to offer, are presented below. We will continue to build out our plans and guest list across the summer and fall and invite your active participation even before term begins.
I. The Inner Journey – Learning to Make Meaning
- The Dance of Dharma
- Leadership and Character
- Making Meaning in the Workplace
- Finding Meaning in Relationship with Nature
II. The Outer Journey – Focusing On Your Leadership Role
- Difficult Decisions: How Faith Shapes Boardroom Debate
- Faith as An Enabler and Disabler
- Linking Spirituality, Health and Leadership
- Poetic Justice: Islam and Business
III. Moving Beyond – Locating Purpose in the World
- Moral Growth as a Business Leader
- Spiritual Philanthropy in Emerging Markets
- Trans-Generational Change: The Lessons of Ashoka
- Spirituality in Technology
- Regenerative Capitalism
Readings and Teaching Formats
The assigned readings for the course will be drawn from a variety of sources, including a curated selection of readings from ancient wisdom traditions as well as contemporary readings, some composed by invited guests. While we have developed a number of case studies for use in the course, we will favor experiential learning over case-based pedagogy, as well as live interaction with our invited guests.
We are currently assembling the final reading list for the course and can offer recommendations to students wishing to dive in across the summer and fall.
Journey Groups
During an early Tuesday afternoon class session, each student will be assigned to a 5-person Journey Group. Groups will be designed to be cross-sectional in nature, with representatives drawn from across participating schools in the University. This group will meet six times across the semester, ideally at a consistent time, agreeable to all members of the group, every other week from early February through mid-April. While some sessions can take place over Zoom, we strongly encourage in-person meetings, and some in-person sessions will be required.
Journey Groups are intended as safe, confidential spaces for students to share their understanding of their guiding values and to keep track of their own spiritual exploration across term. A favorite exercise is called Rivers of Life, in which students draw (yes, with colored pencils and drawing paper) a map of the significant life experiences that have shaped the leaders they have been, and are becoming.
A student shared with us this past year that her Journey Group was different from any other small group she participated in at school because “this is the only meeting that is about me.” That’s not a bad statement of our ambition in creating this aspect of the curriculum.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Strategies for Value Creation (SVC)
Course Number 1417
27 Sessions
Exam
NOTE: Because there is considerable overlap between this course (SVC, course #1417) and the fall course Corporate Finance: Corporate Financial Operations (CFO, course #1416), students cannot take both of them.
Career Focus
SVC should appeal to students who aspire to work in senior leadership positions (CEO, CFO, COO, or CMO) in both large and small companies; as strategy consultants or investment bankers who advise companies; or as private equity, public equity, venture capital, or hedge fund investors seeking to gain a better understanding of what creates value and why.
Educational Objectives
SVC is a capstone course that integrates and further develops concepts developed in RC Courses namely Finance 1, Finance 2, and Strategy, and to a lesser extent LEAD, Marketing, and LCA. It is a case-based course that is designed to provide students with the knowledge, skills, and judgment needed to make better investment, strategic, and operating decisions. The goal is to see value creation as an important—but by no means the only—corporate objective and a guiding principle for making important business decisions. In short, the goal is to develop a value creation mindset.
The course emphasizes the development of practical insights rather than formal theories, and the application of relevant theories to practice. Toward that end, the course includes several “Policy Days” which analyze current policy debates in corporate America such as payout policy (share repurchases), CEO pay, and activist investors. The policy days typically follow related cases and use readings from business journals, academic journals, and trade publications to illustrate opposing viewpoints.
Course Content and Organization
Cases typically analyze the value implications of major strategic decisions or analysis of unique business models. It will utilize more strategy concepts (creating and sustaining competitive advantage, managing competitive interactions, etc.) than a typical RC Finance class, and will utilize more financial concepts (measuring value and assessing risk) than a typical RC Strategy class. It is designed to teach a set of quantitative tools (microeconomics of supply and demand curves, the strategic value of optionality, the concept of price elasticity, etc.) and frameworks that will help you make important business decisions.
The course has five modules based on the Value Driver Framework developed by Fruhan and others.
● Understanding Value Creation (Value Driver Framework)
● Creating Competitive Advantage
● Sustaining Competitive Advantage
● Driving Profitable Growth
● Setting Corporate Objectives
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Strategies for Value Creation - Abridged (SVC-S)
Course Number 1418
14 sessions
Paper
Note: Because there is considerable overlap between this course (SVC-S) and Strategies for Value Creation (SVC, course #1417) and the fall course Corporate Finance: Corporate Financial Operations (CFO, course #1416), students can only take one of the three.
SVC-S is an abridged version of the spring course Strategies for Value Creation (SVC, course #1417) that is designed for students who are unable to take SVC. This integrated course combining elements of strategy and finance has four modules: (1) Understanding value creation, (2) Creating competitive advantage, (3) Sustaining competitive advantage, and (4) Driving profitable growth. Given the compressed nature of the course, SVC-S will place a somewhat greater emphasis on valuation and financing considerations.
SVC-S is designed to provide students with the knowledge, skills, and judgment needed to make better investment, strategic, and operating decisions. Cases typically analyze the value implications of major strategic decisions or analysis of unique business models. Similar to SVC, the course will utilize more strategy concepts (creating and sustaining competitive advantage, managing competitive interactions, etc.) than a typical RC Finance class, and will utilize more financial concepts (measuring value and assessing risk) than a typical RC Strategy class. The goal is to see value creation as an important—but by no means the only—corporate objective and a guiding principle for making important business decisions.
Student evaluation will be based on class participation and a short paper.
For information on the SVC course go to: Strategies for Value Creation (SVC)
Strategy Execution
Course Number 1312
27 Sessions
Paper/Project
NOTE: Because there is considerable overlap between this course (Strategy Execution, #1312) and the spring course Systems for Scaling Ventures (SSV, #1789), it is recommended that students not take both of them.
Educational Objectives
Having a good strategy is not enough to succeed in today’s competitive environment. More than 50% of start-ups fail within five years and more than half of the companies on the S&P 500 in 2000 no longer exist. Many of these firms had sound strategies but were unable to execute them effectively. With changing customer preferences, increasing global competition, disruptive technologies, heightened employee expectations, and unpredictable macroeconomic shocks, execution is more critical (and difficult) than ever.
Course Content
Instead of focusing on how to formulate a great business strategy, this course focuses on how to implement that strategy. In other words, this course takes strategy as given and teaches what you need to know to win in highly competitive markets. The more competitive your marketplace—with competitors trying to steal your customers, attract your best people, and leapfrog you in technology—the more valuable this course will be to you.
Using fundamental building blocks based on accountability systems and structures, we will teach you how to make the tough choices needed to ensure successful strategy execution. The course is divided into seven modules:
- Allocating resources to customers: You will learn how to choose a primary customer and allocate resources to market-facing and operating core units in a way that delivers maximum value to those customers.
- Prioritizing core values: You will learn how and when to create core values and beliefs systems to prioritize the needs of customers, employees, and shareholders.
- Tracking performance goals: You will learn how to select a small number of critical performance variables and design management control systems to track progress in achieving key goals.
- Controlling strategic risk: You will learn how to identify various types of internal and external risks and implement internal controls and boundary systems to protect your business franchise.
- Spurring innovation: You will learn how to design systems and structures to push people out of their comfort zone, foster creative tension, and drive innovation and entrepreneurial behavior.
- Building commitment: You will learn how to use systems and structures to build an organization culture that motivates people to help others achieve shared goals.
- Adapting to change: You will learn how to identify the strategic uncertainties that could upend your strategy, build early warning systems, and adapt current strategies to changing competitive conditions.
Concepts will be illustrated using case studies in both early-stage and mature firms in a variety of industries including consulting, consumer products, education, financial services, healthcare, hospitality, military, publishing, retail, robotics, software development, and space exploration.
By the end of the course, students will have gained the practical knowledge and confidence to execute strategy, measure performance, deliver results, and win in any competitive market.
Grading
The course grade will comprise class participation (40%), graded hand-ins and peer feedback (20%), and a final paper (40%).
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Strategy and Technology
Course Number 1286
28 Sessions
Paper/Project
28 Sessions
Paper/Project
Overview
This course explores the unique aspects of creating effective strategies for technology-intensive businesses. What are effective strategies for winning in markets with network effects? How can technology be leveraged to build multisided platforms? How can firms create and capture the value from intellectual property assets? What are the unique challenges of governing technology-intensive firms? And how can they build and sustain value in emerging technologies?
Industries covered range widely, including Generative AI, esports, autonomous vehicles, collaboration tools, cybersecurity, cloud services, e-commerce, social networking, browsers, semiconductors, operating systems, streaming media, intellectual property, mobile communications, electronic ink, blockchain, crypto currency, and wearable technology.
Course Content and Organization
The course is structured into six modules:
Network Effects: Technology-intensive businesses have unique attributes, which make their products increasingly valuable if more consumers buy their product or if more complements become available. What are the implications for market tipping, pricing and growth strategies?
Multisided Platforms (MSPs): The most important competitive battles in technology are no longer between standalone products or services, but between platforms. Many of the most successful companies are those who build multisided platforms (MSPs), which spawn large ecosystems of users and suppliers of complementary products and services. Why and how are MSPs different from “normal” firms? What are the key strategies for creating successful MSPs?
Tactics—Judo & Sumo Strategy: Many of the critical challenges in fast-moving technology businesses are tactical in nature: how and when do firms cooperate and compete with firms within their industry? How can small firms use their larger competitors’ size to their own advantage (judo strategy)? When and how can large firms impose their will (sumo strategy) against other players in their ecosystem, without running afoul of antitrust laws?
Managing Intellectual Property: A defining characteristic of technology industries is the disproportionate share of value which resides in intellectual property (IP) assets. We will explore the current challenges in the system of patents, how firms create IP and build business models enabling them to appropriate value from their IP.
Governance of Technology Firms: Start-ups and large firms in the technology world face special governance problems, especially asymmetrical information between management and boards.
Look Forward, Reason Back: Large-scale industry change happens faster in technology than in other markets. Cutting edge technologies have unique problems related to untested demand, uncertain performance, and the challenge of how firms can build and maintain their competitive edge in order to take advantage of new technological opportunities. This module explores how managers ‘look forward’ into highly uncertain environments, then ‘reason back’ to devise strategies for today.
Career Focus
The course should be of particular interest to those interested in managing a business for which technology is likely to play a major role, and to those interested in consulting, private equity or venture capital. The course may also be valuable for students who do not necessarily plan to pursue a career related to technology. Indeed, the concepts and frameworks covered (e.g., network effects, judo strategy, multisided platforms) apply well beyond technology industries.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Strategy for Entrepreneurs
Course Number 1257
27 Sessions
Paper
(formerly Strategy for Entrepreneurs and Startups)
Overview of Strategy for Entrepreneurs
All startups start as ideas. They are conjectures, hypotheses, and predictions about how a firm can make money by solving a problem that the market has yet to solve. As with any new idea, knowing with certainty if your startup idea will work is impossible. Worse yet, a startup idea is a bet with an unknown probability of success and an unknown payoff. When inspiration strikes, and you write down an exciting startup idea on a napkin, you don’t know if it will work, and you don’t know how much value it will generate.
Strategy for Entrepreneurs (SfE) will teach you how to effectively learn about your idea’s chances of success and the value your firm might create. The benefits of learning are twofold. First, you generate signals about your idea’s potential that can convince others—from investors to employees—to join you. Second, if you learn your idea stinks, you can iterate and pivot to a new, more promising idea.
But learning—especially about startup ideas—is challenging. Signals are biased and noisy. Designing experiments is non-trivial, and running tests is expensive. Failure is hard to admit and learn from. Getting to and listening to feedback is challenging. The ideas with the most potential and impact are often also the ideas that are hardest to test. SfE is structured to help you learn in the face of all these challenges. The course is designed for entrepreneurs, but the examples, cases, and exercises are relevant for future investors and joiners, too.
Course Structure and Content
The course structure is unusual.
Roughly 50% of the sessions are case discussions.
The other 50% of the course focuses on developing, testing, and receiving feedback on a startup idea you develop over the semester.
Students should enter the course with an idea they would like to develop into a startup, either now or in the future, or an idea they have already started to build. The course will then push you to develop your idea through writing and experimentation. On the writing front, you will be pushed to clearly articulate the problem you are solving, outline a solution, and describe how you will make money; throughout the course, you will give and receive written and in-person feedback on the idea you write. At the semester's mid-point, a week of class is devoted to running an experiment testing your startup idea.
SfE’s unusual structure and focus on developing and testing a startup idea make it an excellent complement to more case-centered early-stage entrepreneurship courses like Launching Technology Ventures (LTV), Avoiding Startup Failure, and Founder’s Journey.
The cases and exercises focus on early and growth-stage startups. The cases feature startups from across the globe and a diverse set of protagonists. While focused on for-profit ventures, many cases feature founders focused on broadening the benefits of innovation and technology. The course includes startups from across the globe, including the US, India, Ghana, and Colombia, and startups working on a range of problems, including women’s and mental health, cloud kitchens, the circular economy, b2b compliance training, on-demand laundry, and even toothbrushes. The course will help you develop the following skills:
- How to run convincing startup experiments.
- Map a startup’s traction and business model into funding and valuation numbers.
- How to give other entrepreneurs effective feedback on their startup ideas.
- Write cogently, persuasively, and effectively.
- When to ignore and when to listen to advice from VCs and other key stakeholders.
- Identify and evaluate market gaps with customer interviews, minimum viable product tests, pricing surveys, and more.
- Decide in the face of uncertainty and limited data.
You can learn more about the course on the public version of the course website: www.sfehbs.com
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Supply Chain Analytics
Course Number 2245
14 Sessions
Paper/Project
Due to significant overlap in course content, students cannot take both this course and the spring term full-semester Supply Chain Management course.
Career Focus
This course is appropriate for students interested in pursuing careers in any management function (e.g., operations, marketing, finance) in firms that make, sell and/or distribute physical products, or in organizations (e.g., consulting firms, investment banks, private equity firms, software providers, transportation providers) that analyze, invest in, and/or offer products and services to those firms.
Given this course’s analytical focus, it is also appropriate for any students broadly interested in the deployment of analytics capabilities in businesses. Although primary applications will be centered on supply chain and operations, most classes will have equally important takeaways related much more broadly to human-algorithm (or human-AI) collaboration, i.e., how human employees can work together with AI and algorithms to improve business outcomes. No analytics experience is necessary – students of all backgrounds are welcome!
Educational Objectives
Supply Chain Analytics (SCA) builds on aspects of the first-year Technology and Operations Management (RC TOM) course. However, whereas RC TOM focuses primarily on producing and developing products and services, SCA emphasizes managing product availability, especially in a context of rapid product proliferation, short product life cycles, and global networks of suppliers and customers. Hence, topics not examined in RC TOM such as inventory management, distribution economics, and demand forecasting are explored in SCA. SCA also differs from RC TOM in that RC TOM concentrates primarily on material and information flows within an organization, whereas SCA focuses on managing material and information flows across functional and organizational boundaries, and thus has ties to the first-year courses in marketing and leadership.
Supply Chain Analytics also builds on aspects of the first-year Data Science for Managers (RC DSM) course. However, whereas RC DSM focuses primarily on mechanics and applications of particular data science techniques, SCA emphasizes how to deploy data science (analytics) capabilities in business operations and how employees can best leverage their own expertise and data science tools to improve business outcomes.
Please note that the full-semester Supply Chain Management course will include a majority of the material in Supply Chain Analytics plus a broader, more “general management” view of supply chain management, including additional non-analytics cases with case protagonist guests joining to share their broader management perspectives. Due to significant overlap in course content, students cannot take both courses.
Grading
Grading will be based on class participation, engagement, and a capstone project consisting of playing a week-long “Supply Chain Game” simulation and writing a corresponding report.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Supply Chain Management
Course Number 2108
27 Sessions
Paper/Project
Due to significant overlap in course content, students cannot take both this course and the fall term half-semester Supply Chain Analytics course.
Career Focus
This course is appropriate for students interested in pursuing careers in any management function (e.g., operations, marketing, finance) in firms that make, sell and/or distribute physical products, or in organizations (e.g., consulting firms, investment banks, private equity firms, software providers, transportation providers) that analyze, invest in, and/or offer products and services to those firms.
Educational Objectives
Supply Chain Management (SCM) builds on aspects of the first-year Technology and Operations Management (RC TOM) course. However, whereas RC TOM focuses primarily on producing and developing products and services, SCM emphasizes managing product availability, especially in a context of rapid product proliferation, short product life cycles, and global networks of suppliers and customers. Hence, topics not examined in RC TOM such as inventory management, distribution economics, and demand forecasting are explored in depth in SCM.
SCM also differs from RC TOM in that RC TOM concentrates primarily on material and information flows within an organization, whereas SCM focuses on managing material and information flows across functional and organizational boundaries. Due to the boundary-spanning nature of supply chain management, the SCM course also has strong links to the first-year courses in marketing, leadership, and strategy. The course emphasizes the "general manager's perspective" in managing supply chains. Cases in the course illustrate that barriers to integrating supply chains often relate to organizational issues (e.g., misaligned incentives or change management challenges) and operational execution problems (e.g., misplaced SKUs in a retail store) that fall squarely in the domain of the general manager. The course makes clear that suitable information technology and appropriate use of analytical tools are necessary, but by no means sufficient, for supply chain integration.
Compared to the Supply Chain Analytics half-semester course, SCM will include a majority of the material in Supply Chain Analytics plus a broader, more “general management” view of supply chain management, including additional non-analytics cases with case protagonist guests joining to share their broader management perspectives.
Grading
Grading will be based on class participation, engagement, and a capstone project consisting of playing a week-long “Supply Chain Game” simulation and writing a corresponding report.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Sustainable Investing
Course Number 1495
Paper/project
The course won the 2021 Teaching Recognition Award for Excellence in Sustainable Finance Education from the Financial Times.
Career Focus
This is an investing/finance course, designed to build on skills introduced in the RC finance course, but with an emphasis on how investors should incorporate what have traditionally been considered “non-financial” criteria in their decisions: for example, climate risk, environmental sustainability, minority representation on boards, and even the potential to create social good. Covering both public and private markets, the course will present the unprecedented opportunities that have arisen due to energy transition and other trends through rigorous approaches to business model assessment, valuation, transaction structuring and exits, as well as equity selection and portfolio construction. The course also explores incentives, decision-making, and the crucial problems and opportunities within the industry itself.
This course is geared toward students interested in working in the investment industry - whether directly, as an asset manager/investor, advisor or private individual, or indirectly as an entrepreneur or operator receiving investment capital. The course will also provide important learnings for students looking to work in the development and non-profit sectors where collaboration between the public and private sectors is important. We will emphasize practical skills, including pitching stocks, performing diligence, measuring impact, and evaluating portfolio performance.
This course will be differentiated from other excellent offerings at HBS by focusing on the intersection of investing/finance and key global challenges, guided for example by the UN Sustainable Development Goals, including climate, gender equality, and poverty reduction. Emphasis will be placed on the analytical tools needed to understand the financial perspective and make investing decisions; however, students will also be learn to rigorously assess investments in the context of non-financial objectives. Investing – Sustainable Investing is a finance course, which could be taken on a stand-alone basis or as a complement to Private Equity Finance, VC/PE, and Entrepreneurial Finance, Investment Management or Investment Strategies.
Course Content and Objectives
An increasing share of assets globally are subject to a non-traditional (environmental, social, and governance [“ESG”] and impact screens), including over 30% of all professionally managed assets worldwide (ca. $30 trillion). Most large asset managers (e.g., Morgan Stanley, Bain Capital, TPG, Blackrock, State Street) are establishing sustainability investment practices, and developing products to meet the demands of capital owners, including pension funds, endowments, and family offices.
The promises are seductive: better long-term risk management, “doing well by doing good”, and new sources of alpha such as investment in energy transition which is viewed as a “once in a generation” investment opportunity. Skeptics argue a focus on non-traditional criteria may distract from and reduce returns, or, on the other extreme, shift funding away from worthy philanthropic causes. Using tools from both the asset pricing and corporate finance toolkits, this course examines these questions in detail: What does it mean in practice to incorporate non-traditional preferences and criteria? How do such activities affect risk and return? Do these new practices actually alter company behavior, or create social value? How is and how should social value be defined and measured?
In public markets, we evaluate the costs and benefits of negative screens, ESG integration, and activist investing. Private market cases cover venture capital in Asia and Africa, private equity in the US renewables market, as well as instruments involving the public sector, such as social impact bonds.
Cases critically examine the logical and market case for a wide range of models, ranging from those that seek (and obtain) above market returns, to those designed to use the power of financial contracting to unlock innovation and help transform the social sector. Cases will require rigorous financial and investment analysis, building on and extending skills acquired in the RC finance courses.
The landscape is changing quickly; nearly every case was written or updated for this course in the past twenty-four months; most classes will feature protagonists as guests. Recent cases include TPG Rise Climate, Blackrock Circular Economy Fund, Generation investment Management, CPPIB, Carbon Credit Investing, and British International Investments among others.
Course Organization
The first module provides an overview of the industry, an introduction to key challenges, and the existing evidence base. The second module investigates private market activity with a focus on how firms make investment decisions given both traditional and non-traditional objectives. The third module examines the challenges related to defining, measuring and managing “impact” or non-traditional goals and objectives. The fourth module explores objectives and implementation in the public market context including negative and positive screens, engagement and activism and ESG integration. The fifth module looks at the frontiers of this practice including robo-investing and the evolution of large-scale financial institutions.
Class Sessions: The course has approximately 14 cases, some of which include simulations or group exercises. Class participation and other activities will account for 60% of the grade.
Paper/Project: The Paper/Project will account for 40% of the grade.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Systems for Scaling Ventures (SSV)
Course Number 1789
NOTE: Because there is considerable overlap between this course (SSV, #1789) and the spring course Strategy Execution, #1312, it is recommended that students not take both of them.
Course Format: Spring Q3Q4. Students will meet once a week for a 120-minute session and will discuss cases, interact with guests, and/or actively apply tools.
This course is for founders, joiners, investors, and consultants aspiring to create value by designing (or helping design) the management systems necessary to bring new ventures from early-stage startups to growth-stage and beyond. Early-stage ventures initially (and naturally) rely on informal interactions to develop their offers, connect with customers and investors, and launch operations. Upon entering the growth stage, scaling ventures introduce, often of necessity, increasingly formal management systems to recruit, organize, direct, develop, and motivate their employees. However, the application of conventional wisdom often results in top-down systems that are excessively bureaucratic and hinder agility. This course will help you learn how to build a growth-stage venture while keeping your employees empowered and your organization nimble. You will learn to build a solid foundation that will allow your organization to amplify its impact in today's highly volatile environment.
Educational Objectives
The goal of this course is to expose you to management systems used by ventures to overcome tradeoffs between scale and agility. By ventures, we mean entrepreneurial organizations prioritizing innovation and employee empowerment, rather than standardization and tight monitoring of rote processes. This is not a course about launching a startup or financing it, nor a course about highly stable, established enterprises. This course is about leading and managing an entrepreneurial organization as it accelerates growth, usually the point at which most ventures need to formalize management systems. Through cases, readings, and a final project, the course will introduce the tools organizations need to enable growth across one or more markets, while continually adapting to new and changing circumstances.
Course Content
a. Formalizing management systems to support growth. You will learn about why, when, and how ventures start to formalize management systems—for example, developing operating budgets and determining different job functions— and how they evolve these systems and functions through various stages of growth. You will also learn about how executives adjust management systems to different forms of growth—organic, inorganic (through M&A), franchising or licensing, and so on. Our discussions will highlight the core tension of this course for high-growth organizations — between empowering employees or teams to adapt to new markets and implementing formal systems to drive disciplined execution.
b. Driving results. Employees in growth-stage ventures must explore new opportunities in the market while driving the growth of offerings where the organization has already achieved product-market fit. You will learn how to design performance alignment systems, such as Objectives and Key Results systems (OKRs), Balanced Scorecards (BSCs), and Performance-potential models, to hold employees accountable for driving financial results for established offers, while encouraging them to uncover new opportunities for offerings and growth.
c. Agility and empowerment. Next, you will learn how to develop decision-support dashboards and guidelines, as well as agile teams, to enable employees to share best practices and achieve coordination, while preserving employees’ empowerment and ability to continue learning (e.g., through a Structured Empowerment Framework). You will also uncover how data analysis (including AI and machine learning techniques) can be incorporated into the development of such dashboards and guidelines.
d. Building systems for learning. Growth-stage ventures that empower their employees also need to ensure that those employees have the skills to find out how to drive results. You will learn how to build feedback and information systems to (a) initially train employees, (b) provide them with direct feedback on their decisions (e.g., through performance assessments), (c) promote peer-to-peer feedback (e.g., through enterprise social networks), and (d) engage employees in developing new ideas and best practices (e.g., through surveys, contests, agile process and teams, and A/B testing).
e. Connecting empowerment to culture. Beyond holding employees accountable, growth-stage organizations need to build a culture promoting the pursuit of shared goals in line with the organization’s purpose and values—not just the goals of emerging silos. You will examine systems (such as value-based recruitment and training, value-based assessments, and rituals) used to keep employees aligned with the growing organization’s values and purpose.
Final Project/Report. The course will provide you with the opportunity to work with a growth-stage venture, applying concepts and tools from the course to solve problems and uncover new ways to foster growth as a consulting team would. You will be asked to deliver a final report or presentation to the organization and then to submit a final report for the course.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
TALK: How to Talk Gooder in Business and Life
Course Number 2227
12 Sessions
Final Project
We talk to people to achieve success in every aspect of business and life. Even though we do it constantly, conversation is surprisingly tricky, especially for leaders. This course will sharpen your conversational awareness, confidence, and skills using the TALK framework, derived from cutting-edge behavioral science:
Topics: in which we figure out what to talk about, and how to manage topics effectively.
Asking: in which we learn how to ask and answer questions well.
Levity: in which we aim to balance humor and warmth with gravity.
Kindness: in which we remind ourselves to speak respectfully, engage receptively with opposing views, and listen responsively.
In this course, you will:
- Reflect on your conversational goals: Why do we talk? What does it mean to do it well? How do these goals play out over the short- and long-term?
- Study the TALK framework to understand conversation as a fundamental part of the human experience—a repeated coordination game we play with others every day, one filled with hundreds of micro-decisions.
- Participate in many immersive conversation exercises (both silly and serious)--always as yourself (no role playing).
- Take advantage of this safe environment to practice specific conversational approaches that may (or may not) work for you.
- Record and listen back to yourself to reflect on your conversational performance and progress.
Course logistics:
- 12 session course: Experiential exercises, weekly reflections, and an individual final project
- 2 sections of 60 students
- Some class sessions will take place in the Hives (depending on classroom availability)
- Course guests will include experts on sales/persuasion, matchmaking, conflict management, designing work meetings, freestyle music, digital communication, and conversational AI.
- Grading is based on class participation, assignments, and final project.
- No technical background required.
- This course focuses mostly on human-to-human dialogue (interacting with other people), not monologue/public speaking.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Tough Tech Ventures
Course Number 1727
Course Overview
Tough tech ventures face both high levels of technology and commercial pathway uncertainty, and therefore demand their own strategies and tactics for managing risk vs. reward. Historically, most entrepreneurship courses (at HBS, and elsewhere) disproportionately focus on consumer- and /or software-centric business model and product experimentation tools (e.g., business model canvas, Lean Startup methodology) which are optimized for venture opportunities with relatively low technological and/or market uncertainty.
While tough technology has the potential to transform incumbent industries and tackle our most pressing societal issues, the tough tech ventures which design and deploy these solutions confront a number of challenges that are distinct from those faced by more mainstream startups. This course has been built from the ground up to dig deeply into these challenges and to provide impactful and actionable frameworks which build on all the tools learned so far at HBS to overcome them in order to drive impact at scale.
Career Focus
This course has been specifically designed for students who are considering founding, joining or investing in tough tech ventures upon, or soon after, graduation. While the course is focused on advanced technology, students need not have a technical background, merely a passion for making an impact through participation in these ventures. The primary objective of this course is to enable students to holistically understand and evaluate tough tech ventures at the various stages of their development, identify specific commercialization frictions and apply a set of strategies to overcome those challenges and successfully lead these ventures to scale in order to generate financial returns and deliver the intended impact.
Key Learning Objectives
- Understand key founding and funding models for tough tech innovation
- Define tough tech R&D and product roadmaps, incorporating intellectual property concerns and “technoeconomic” forecasting
- Articulate paths to market and business models while accounting for tough tech value chains and competition
- Explore and negotiate strategic partnerships and investments
- Analyze the tough tech lifecycle financing sources and tradeoffs from early grants and equity to later stage deployment capital
- Examine global and local market failures that affect tough tech ventures and policy interventions that may stimulate (or stymy) the investment in, and scalability, of these ventures
- Identify best practices for designing, building, incenting and leading successful tough tech teams
Course Content & Organization
The main class tool will be case discussions based on a variety of tough tech ventures, including those pursuing frontier clean energy, material science, biotech and aerospace technologies. We will have case protagonists and guests in every class including tough tech entrepreneurs, investors and domain experts so you can engage directly with these practicioners from the burgeoning tough tech venture ecosystem. Additionally, the course will borrow heavily from Professor Matheson’s activities in founding, leading and investing in tough tech ventures and Professor Krieger’s research on R&D strategy and tough tech ventures.
Grading will be a combination of class participation, periodic written reflections and a final written case done in small Teams.
Copyright © 2023 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Transforming Education through Social Entrepreneurship
Course Number 1602
28 Sessions
Paper
Career Focus
This course is designed for students who are interested in the intersection of education (K-12 and higher education) and business — whether that means starting a business in the education sector or being a board member or investor, to someone who wants to make a difference in the education sector while pursuing a career in other industries.
This course draws on the extensive experiences of the instructor (HBS ’93) who has been a social entrepreneur in the education sector for the past three decades. His work includes founding a venture backed school network, leading a firm that has been advising and supporting public school districts around the US, investing in numerous educational startups, and serving as a board member in numerous educational non-profit organizations.
This course is geared for students of all backgrounds, and everyone can deeply engage in the class discussion. Education work-related experience is not necessary.
Course Overview
The course covers a wide range of topics across K-12 and higher education. Topics include education reform efforts, adaptive and personalized learning approaches, disruptive innovations such as AI and machine learning, and system-level change efforts. The broad set of topics will create an opportunity for the class to deepen its understanding of the complexities and constraints of the sector while ferreting out what works. Cases are set in various markets including the U.S., Asia, Europe, and Latin America. A third of the cases are set in a non-US context.
The cases feature social entrepreneurs leveraging entrepreneurial and managerial practices to deliver pattern-breaking change in K-12 schools and higher educational institutions. The cases will examine protagonists working within established educational systems as well as through independent education-focused organizations. Three-quarters of the cases are on private enterprises (for-profit and non-profit) and about a third of the cases are on private venture-backed companies. Nearly all the sessions include visits from case protagonists.
Course Organization
In addition to an introductory module which will provide background and context of the education sector, the course will be organized into the following modules:
- Personalizing learning: How can schools meet the unique needs of each student? What role can technology play in this effort and how is it changing the role of the teacher and the classroom?
- Striving for equity and performance: How should schools define success beyond test scores? What are the skills and aptitude necessary for the future? How will the recent ruling by the Supreme Court of the U.S. impact the definitions of success, merit, and equity?
- Achieving systemic coherence: What are ways in which leaders can align systems, structures, and resources to lead an inherently complex organization that serves a vast range of needs?
- Evaluating opportunities: How should social entrepreneurs define success for families and schools while satisfying investors? The course will examine ventures that are rapidly adapting technology, selling directly to parents (e.g., consumers) as well as to institutions (e.g., colleges, schools). The course will evaluate emerging ideas and ventures and get a chance to ponder the question of how social entrepreneurs can do well and do good at the same time.
- Disrupting higher education: What will the rapid changes occurring among colleges and universities mean for the future? How are entrepreneurs using technology and new business models to bring quality post-secondary education to all?
- Scaling change: How can entrepreneurs and leaders scale what works? What are the challenges in replicating, scaling, and sustaining successful models?
The course also endeavors to foster a strong community of students who share an interest in the education sector across HBS and other parts of Harvard University.
Grading and course requirements
Grading is based on class participation (50%) and final paper (50%).
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Transforming Health Care Delivery
Course Number 2195
At the root of the transformation occurring in the health care industry—both in the United States and internationally—is the fundamental challenge of improving clinical outcomes while controlling costs. Addressing this challenge will require dramatic improvements in the processes by which care is delivered to patients. This, in turn, will involve novel technologies, fundamentally different approaches to care delivery, a rethinking of incentives, and new roles for individuals and organizations throughout the health care sector. This course will equip students with strategies and tools to help navigate the ever-changing landscape of the health care industry.
Career Focus
This course is appropriate for students interested in understanding the fundamental improvement challenges facing the health care sector and developing strategies for addressing them. Students may have career interests in organizations that provide health care (e.g., hospitals, medical groups, retail clinics) or in firms that partner with, supply, consult to, or invest in such organizations (e.g., payers, biopharmaceutical and device companies, health information technology, venture capital and private equity).
Educational Objectives
This course will help students develop the managerial skills required to identify and implement transformational change. It will draw upon a range of approaches for improving value in health care delivery, including continuous improvement, organizational redesign, population health management, precision medicine, patient engagement, digital health, payment reform, and the creation of appropriate incentives for value delivery and innovation. For each of these approaches, the course will emphasize the importance of identifying improvement opportunities, implementing relevant changes, and measuring their effects on performance.
Course Faculty
The course will be co-taught by Susanna Gallani and Robert Huckman.
Susanna Gallani is the Tai Family Associate Professor of Business Administration. Her research focuses on performance management systems in health care organizations and how these systems operate to align behaviors, measure, and reward performance. Themes that are central to her interests include the role that performance management systems play in improving health care value, enhancing health equity, and reducing workplace burnout.
Robert Huckman is Albert J. Weatherhead III Professor of Business Administration, the Howard Cox Faculty Chair of the HBS Health Care Initiative, and the Unit Head for Technology and Operations Management. He studies topics related to performance improvement, digital innovation, and consumer engagement in health care. He is a member of the Board of Trustees of Brigham and Women’s Hospital and serves as an advisor to several private health care companies.
Course Format
Transforming Health Care Delivery is composed of two half-courses: (1) a case-based course in Q3 and (2) a field course built around strategic projects with local Boston-area hospitals in Q4. The Q3 course can be taken on its own (i.e., without the Q4 option) and is a prerequisite for the Q4 course. For additional information about the Q4 course, please see the description for 6215—Field Course: Transforming Health Care Delivery.
Typically, students in the course have formed a close-knit community to support each other's interests in learning more about the health care industry. To that end, Professors Gallani and Huckman will host optional, small-group “coffee chats” about current topics in health care.
Course Content
The Q3 course includes 14 in-class sessions, which are organized into the following modules:
- Module 1— Prioritizing Health: This module will discuss various dimensions of a critical challenge in health care delivery—improving the value of care delivered to patients. Beyond managing cost, the challenge of improving value depends critically on shifting the focus of delivery systems from health care to health. Prioritizing health requires delivery systems to address issues related to the social and behavioral determinants of health, preventative care, effective management of chronic disease, and understanding the limits of medical intervention.
- Module 2— Optimizing Care: This module will consider how health care systems can organize to deliver value by providing health more effectively and efficiently. The approaches covered include redesigning care around the patient, aligning incentives and compensation, leveraging specialization, building insight through clinical data management, and fostering workforce resiliency and wellbeing.
- Module 3— Transforming Delivery: This module will examine new approaches and technologies for delivering care with a focus on improving health and increasing value. The topics covered include efforts to leverage new technologies (e.g., precision medicine, telemedicine, extended reality (XR), and generative AI), new models of care delivery (e.g., retail locations and home-based settings), and new care providers (e.g., non-physician providers, including patients and their families).
Grading and Evaluation
In the Q3 course, students will be evaluated on the basis of class participation and a final paper (completed in teams of 2-3 students) that involves developing a short case that applies course themes to a specific organization using publicly available information. Teams will be able to select the organizations they study. Further guidance will be provided early in the quarter.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Turnarounds and Transformation
Course Number 1636
27 sessions
Paper/Project
(formerly Entrepreneurial Management in a Turnaround Environment)
Career Focus
This course is intended for students pursuing a range of career options as business executives, investors, and/or consultants. First, it would be of interest to those who at some point in their career see themselves as a CEO or senior manager potentially leading a troubled enterprise (small, medium, or large) through a crisis or through significant performance transformation. Secondly, it would be important for investors dealing with distressed organizations needing restructuring or significant performance improvement. Finally, it will be of value to those who expect to support or interface with troubled enterprises as management consultants or as a restructuring advisors.
Educational Objectives
The focus of this course is the leader as a strategist, architect, decision maker, and change agent in a turnaround or transformation environment. This course will present situations where you can analyze potential opportunity in turnaround situations and decide if there is a reasonable chance for the managers in the case to create value. It will also present many situations where you will be challenged to develop a plan of action for the managers that will lead to the creation and realization of value.
Our curriculum will include a number of practical ‘how to’ sessions covering topics such as designing turnaround programs, successfully driving necessary cultural change, and transformation performance management techniques and systems. Some of these sessions will include and be co-taught with practicing executives and advisors. In others, we will invite case protagonists and guest speakers who have decades of hands-on experience to share with the class.
The course will be structured around several turnaround levers—some connected with planning and some with execution. The course will open and close with sessions devoted to analyzing leadership skills fundamental to planning and executing successful turnarounds.
Course Content and Organization
The course will include some brand-new cases with the CEO protagonists present in class, in order to give students first-hand exposure to turnaround challenges. We will look at a range of organizations, including small and large companies, family-owned ventures, private and public firms, and US and international companies.
We will structure the course around several turnaround levers that leaders use to transform businesses--both those in need of comprehensive turnarounds and those momentarily facing lackluster performance.
We will also adopt a holistic view of turnarounds that combines the analysis of strategy, organization, operations, culture, and finance. While these elements are analytically distinct, we will examine how they interact with and shape each other to either (1) preserve cash; (2) create a new value proposition and/or (3) unlock new growth avenues.
There will be synthesis segments after each group of cases to solidify learnings connected with each turnaround lever.
The opening and closing of the course will be devoted to analyzing leadership skills fundamental to planning and executing successful turnarounds. We will examine, among others, the importance of personal and organizational resilience, the management of critical thinking (logos), emotions (pathos), and relationships (ethos), and the challenges involved in professionalizing a leadership team in a crisis.
This course will be 25 class sessions that will be primarily case-oriented with some additional readings and high-profile in-class speakers, along with two project days.
This course complements Creating Value Through Corporate Restructuring and Financial Management of Smaller Firms.
Final Paper
Students will work in teams of three or four. Each team will choose an organization that has undergone a recent turnaround. The turnaround effort must have ended or be advanced enough to allow in-depth analysis.
Students will examine the turnaround process by applying the tools and principles from the course. In the write-up, I expect that you will explain the challenges the organization faced and how it dealt with them (2000 word description of the turnaround effort and why you chose it) and what you learned (separate 500 word analysis using tools and principles from the course, plus your own recommendations for the company).
A more detailed summary of the outline for this paper will be provided at the start of the term.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
U.S. Healthcare Strategy
Course Number 2157
Weekly seminar
Exam
Course Description
U.S. Health Care Strategy is designed to help students understand the strategic challenges currently facing the U.S. healthcare sector and to provide exposure to key subsectors that shape our healthcare markets, including payers, providers, and biopharmaceuticals. Students will also develop a nuanced perspective on the policies and regulations that impact the performance of the healthcare sector and the strategies employed within it. This course builds on the economic principles of business strategy and is ideal for students looking to gain a comprehensive understanding of the strategic dynamics at play in the healthcare sector and to apply this knowledge to real-world scenarios.
Course time will be split between lectures and case discussions/examples. For each course topic there are required readings, listed in the syllabus below. Generally, I will introduce each topic with an interactive lecture that draws upon these readings. Lectures will be followed by discussions of case studies or examples drawn from various sources.
Selected topics and cases include industry analysis (insurance sector: Oscar), dynamic competition (biopharmaceutical product strategies), sustainability of profits (hospital sector: Vanderbilt), horizontal and vertical Integration (hospital sector: Beth Israel-Lahey and insurance/PBM sectors: Kaiser Permanente and Cigna-Express Scripts), market entry and disruption (e.g., value-based primary care: Oak Street).
For Whom is this Course Appropriate?
This course builds on concepts covered during the required first-year strategy course taught in the MBA curriculum and is not open to cross-registrants. It is designed to accommodate and challenge students with a wide range of pre-existing exposure to U.S. healthcare, ranging from those who have worked in the sector for many years to those approaching it for the first time. Per the course title, this course does not address health care strategy outside the U.S. our class discussions will delve into U.S.-specific institutions. Students with a limited background who are interested in the course content are encouraged to enroll and to engage with me in office hours to discuss any concepts or unfamiliar material. I also encourage clarifying questions during class discussions.
Course Requirements
We meet once weekly, on Tuesdays except for Wednesday Sept 4 and Wednesday Nov 6. Course requirements (grade share) are as follow:
- Class participation, including polls (40%)
- Written assignment (20%) – format TBD
- Exam (40%) timed, self-scheduled, open-note exam
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Unpacking the US-China Rivalry
Course Number 1515
14 Sessions
Paper or Project
Enrollment: Limited to 50 students
Course Content and Objectives
The US-China bilateral relationship is in its worst shape since the two nations normalized diplomatic relations in 1979. The deterioration in Sino-American relations, and the intensely competitive rivalry that has developed, have important implications for the rest of the world, including the business sector. This course has three principal goals: (i) to leave students with a significantly better understanding of this most consequential bilateral relationship, holistically and across the multiple dimensions of the rivalry; (ii) to expose students to a diversity of perspectives, encouraging them to challenge and refine their own; and (iii) to engage students in creative ideation toward progress—as they define that—in some aspect of the US-China relationship.
Class sessions will focus on key competitive domains, including political economy; national security; technology; and world order visions. The course will be reading- and discussion-intensive. It will not be case-based. It will emphasize practitioner-oriented readings (e.g. articles from Foreign Affairs and Foreign Policy; “think tank” reports, e.g. Council on Foreign Relations, CSIS, RAND, IISS; book chapters; speeches, transcripts and official policy statements; along with a few articles from scholarly journals). The course will also feature guest speakers. Assigned readings and guest speakers will, by design, represent a diversity of views. These will include Chinese and other non-US perspectives. The course aims to help students further refine the substantive world views they will have been developing at HBS, while enhancing their capacities for perspective-taking and empathy.
Students will select the topic for their final paper or project from among a list of choices to be provided.
Course Grading
The course grade will be based on the following: (i) 40% on class participation; (ii) 20% on short-answer assignments submitted throughout the course; and (iii) 40% on the final paper or project.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
Venture Capital and Private Equity
Course Number 1428
Overview
Note: this course is not for students with prior full-time VCPE experience; it is for students new to VCPE.
Professor Josh Lerner started the Venture Capital and Private Equity (VCPE) course in 1996, and it today is one of the longest-running and largest offerings in the second-year curriculum.
Designed as a survey course, the curriculum examines the firm-wide managerial issues that VCPE investors encounter. This course does not help build deal-execution skills; students instead should enroll in Entrepreneurial Finance, Private Equity Finance, or Venture Capital Journey.
The course covers three broad categories:
THE INVESTORS AND |
PRIVATE EQUITY |
VENTURE CAPITAL |
|
|
|
Course Content
Class Sessions:
Through case discussions and intimate interactions with guests, you will get a true feel for what life is like in VCPE. Guest speakers the past three years:
- 3G Capital (Alex Behring, Daniel Schwartz, Justin Fox, and Mike Spinello)
- Accel (Andrei Brasoveanu)
- Aldrich Capital Partners (Mirza Baig, Raz Zia)
- Altos Ventures (Anthony Lee, Ho Nam)
- Apax Digital (Marcelo Gigliani, Dan O’Keefe)
- Bessemer Venture Partners (Mary D’Onofrio, Elliott Robinson, Janelle Teng)
- Blackstone (Michael Chae, Stephen Schwarzman)
- Broadway Angels (Sonja Perkins)
- CalSTRS (Margot Wirth)
- Cambridge Associates (Jody Fink)
- Carlyle Group (Tanaka Maswoswe)
- Centerbridge (Billy Rahm)
- CPPI (Shane Feeney, John Graham, Nate Goulbourne, David Lubek, Deborah Orinda)
- CRV (Jon Auerbach)
- Founder Collective (David Frankel, Eric Paley, Micah Rosenbloom)
- IGNIA Partners (Álvaro Rodriguez)
- Individual Foodservice (Ken Sweder)
- Innova Capital (Andrzej Bartos and Krzysztof Kulig)
- Interline (Mike Grebe)
- Johnson Media (Kevin D. Johnson)
- KKR (Raj Agrawal, Joseph Bae, Rob Lewin)
- Lone Star (André Collin)
- Luminate Capital Partners (Hollie Haynes)
- NextView (Rob Go)
- Oaktree (Raj Makam)
- Owl Capital (Jen Fonstad)
- P2 Capital (Josh Paulson)
- Pear VC (Keith Bender, Mar Hershenson)
- SIN Capital (David Sin)
- Stone Arch Capital (Clay Miller)
- TA Associates (Jennifer Mulloy)
- Tectonic Ventures (Juan Luis Leungli)
- True Ventures (Jon Callaghan)
- Warburg Pincus (Sean Carney, Bess Weatherman)
- Wheelhouse Partners (Ann Berry)
- Whiskey Capital (Stephen Campbell, John Shumate)
- Yale Investments Office (Amy Chivetta, John Ryan, David Swensen)
- York Capital (Jeremy Blank, Bill Vrattos)
Submissions:
Some cases will require a submission. These will be graded pass/fail.
Team-based final paper:
Students will work in teams of two. The teams will choose a topic that can cover anything that is VCPE-related. Examples of papers are posted on Canvas. A small group of authors will present their findings to the class. N.B.: the paper will be due before Thanksgiving break.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.
War & Peace: The Lessons of History for Leadership, Strategy, Negotiation & Humanity
Course Number 2292
Course Overview
What might we learn by examining & debating the lessons of over 2,500 years of history in which human beings have sought to avert, instigate, wage, win & end wars? The course is designed with one primary objective in mind: to take the long history of war & peace and weave it together in a way that fundamentally challenges & changes our understanding of the human condition-as well as our approach to leadership, strategy, negotiation and policy. More specifically, we will:
- Draw lessons for leadership, strategy, negotiation, and policy from cases where decision making occurs in contexts characterized by high-stakes, uncertainty, and a cacophony of competing ideas, ideologies, and narratives.
- Examine the powerful role that our implicit models and “theories of the case” play in the choices we ultimately make as leaders and strategic actors.
- Face the possibility that our strongly held views might be wrong-or of limited applicability in a new environment or shifting strategic landscape-and develop an appreciation for the humility required to challenge and refine our beliefs, theories, and models.
- Identify and grapple with inescapable tensions and tradeoffs in strategic interactions, and think critically about which factors ultimately win out in the choices we make when there is no dominant strategy.
- Evaluate the role and limits of decision making in the context of political, historical, institutional, and other constraints, while also imagining and working to create future states of the world in which what is not negotiable or achievable today becomes possible for us to negotiate or achieve in the future.
- Challenge received wisdom and implicit theories regarding the causes of conflict and the prospect of its resolution.
- Reflect on our own place in the world, as well as our capabilities and responsibilities as citizens of the world in which we must act, engage with others, and lead.
- Make the case that the study of history is not just an interesting or insightful endeavor, but a potentially game-changing investment in our journeys as human beings and leaders.
- Make history fun.
The course will feature cases, lots of incredible history, and an emphasis on analysis, debate and reflection. This course meets weekly and will be offered in Q1Q2 (Fall). Students will submit a final project that they will have been working on throughout the course.
Copyright © 2024 President & Fellows of Harvard College. All Rights Reserved.